DX-M DX-G - Service Manual For Download

HEALTHCARE ReadMeFirst
Imaging Services Service Manual for Download
► Purpose of this Document

This document describes how to
• add the “order list for documentation”.
• print.
• add comments.
► Document History
Edition. Release Changes

Revision Date compared to previous Version 1.1
1.2 06-2008 Added how to integrate the order list for documentation in a
printed manual. See section 1.
Edition 1, Revision 2
06-2008 printed in Germany
Document Node ID: 16099429
Agfa Company Confidential Copyright © 2008 Agfa HealthCare N.V.
ReadMeFirst
1 Integrating the Order List for Documentation
IMPORTANT:
The “order list for documentation” is not part of the service manual for download.
Purpose of the “order list for documentation”:
To verify the latest level and completeness of your Service Manual.
(1) In the MEDNET GSO library select the product of your interest.
(2) Select “Order list and Front page → PRODUCT - Chapter 00 - Order List for
Documentation”.
(3) Download the “order list for documentation” to your computer.
(4) When creating a paper manual:
Print the order list and put it behind the cover sheet.
2 Printing single Pages, Chapters or the complete Manual
IMPORTANT:
Preferably print this manual double-sided:
This PDF manual contains empty pages at the end of several chapters, to have the
next chapter starting with an uneven page number when printed doubles-sided.
If printed one-sided, dispose these empty pages.
Preferably print circuit diagrams on a DIN A3 or ANSI B (Ledger) printer, if

available.
Some pages – especially circuit diagrams for equipment – have been created on paper
size larger than DIN A4/Letter. Printing these pages on DIN A4/Letter may result in
reduced legibility. It is recommended to print these pages separately on a DIN A3 or
ANSI B (Ledger) printer.
DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.
Edition 1, Revision 2 Page 2 of 5

06-2008 Agfa Company Confidential
ReadMeFirst
2.1 Printing single Pages or Chapters
To print single chapters or pages of a chapter proceed as follows:

(1) Click the bookmark of the desired chapter.
(2) Write down or remember the shown PDF page number. See Figure 1.
Figure 1: PDF page number in the Adobe reader toolbar
(3) Go the end of the section or desired range of pages.

(4) Select "Print".
(5) Select the page range.
(6) Select "Reduce to printer margins" and "Auto-rotate and Center".
(7) Select “OK”.
Figure 2: Print dialogue for printing single pages or chapters


ReadMeFirst
NOTE:
“Shrink to printable area” may be named on other Adobe Reader versions
“reduce to printer margins” or “shrink oversized pages to paper size”.
2.2 Printing the complete Service Manual
To print the complete service manual proceed as follows:

(1) Select "Print".
(2) Select “All”.
(3) Select "shrink to printable area" and "Auto-rotate and Center"
(see NOTE above).
(4) Select “OK”.
Figure 3: Print dialogue for printing the complete manual
3 Adding Comments
• If you open this file in an Adobe Reader version ≥ 7, the comment toolbar will
show-up.
• This allows adding comments, to highlight or underline text and many more text
manipulations.
Figure 4: Adobe Reader comments toolbar


ReadMeFirst
3.1 Exporting your Comments
NOTE:
Exporting your comments allows importing them again in a next version of the manual.
(1) In the drop down menu “Comment & Markup” select "Show comments List".
Figure 5: Drop down menu “Comment & Markup”
(2) Select the desired comments: Press the CTRL-key for multiple selections.
(3) Select “Options - Export Selected Comments”.
(4) Save the file with any name.
3.2 Importing Comments
(1) In the drop down menu “Comment & Markup” select "Show comments List".
(2) Select “Options - Import Comments”.
(3) Browse for the comments file and press “select”.
NOTE:
The imported comments possibly appear on different pages, if the file where the
comments have been imported has a different number of pages.


HEALTHCARE
Imaging Services Service Manual
Document No: DD+DIS001.10E
DX-M
Type 5170 / 200
DX-G
Type 5170 / 100
as of Software Version NIM_2000
2nd Edition *
* For the revision status per chapter please refer to the latest version of the “order list, checklist for completeness” in the GSO Library.
CONFIDENTIALITY NOTE:
Use, dissemination, distribution or reproduction of this document by unauthorized personnel is not permitted and may be unlawful.
04-2010 printed in Germany Document Node ID: 29335184
eq_00_about manual_e_template_v07
1
DD+DIS001.10E About this Manual
► Manufacturer
Agfa HealthCare N.V.
Publisher
Agfa-Gevaert HealthCare GmbH
Tegernseer Landstraße 161
D - 81539 München
Germany
Copyright © 2010 Agfa HealthCare N.V.
All rights reserved.
Technical modifications reserved.
AGFA and the Agfa-Rhombus are trademarks of Agfa HealthCare N.V.
WARNING:
Improper operation or service activities may cause damage or injuries.
INSTRUCTION:
(1) Read the "Generic Safety Directions" document
(see MEDNET GSO => General Info => Agfa HealthCare => Publications =>
Service Manual) prior to attempting any operation, repair or maintenance task on
the equipment.
(2) Strictly observe all safety directions within the "Generic Safety Directions" and on
the product.
NOTE:
To verify the latest version of single documents and of Service Manuals refer to the
Document Type ‘Order List’ in the GSO library.

Edition 2, Revision 0 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 0 / 2

04-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
This document provides information on the structure and contents of the Service
Manual for the DX-G (Type 5170 / 100) and DX-M (Type 5170 / 200) digitizers as of
software version NIM_2000.

Revision Date
2.0* 04-2010 Initial version for DX-M and DX-G with Software Version
NIM_2000 and higher
*Based on DX-G Service Manual Edition 1


► Chapter Overview
Chapter
0 Order List
0 Generic Safety Directions
1 Controls, Connections and Set Up Procedures
2 Functional Description
3 Repair and Service
3.1 Machine specific Safety and Repair Information
3.2 Machine specific Tools, Software Tools and Auxiliary Equipment

3.3 Troubleshooting
3.4 Electrical and Mechanical Codes, Fuses, LEDs
3.5 Replacement of Parts
3.6 Adjustments and Calibrations
3.7 Software Menus and Setting
3.8 Software Releases, Patches
4 Reference and Circuit Diagrams
5 Spare Parts List
6 Accessories
7 Field Modifications
8 Manufacturing Standard Modifications
9 Maintenance
10 Service Bulletins
11 Installation Planning 1 2 3
12 Glossary


► Explanation of Notes
Safety relevant Notes

Icon Signal Word Situation
CAUTION: Possible dangerous situation: Light injuries or damage to the
equipment described in the manual and/or damage to any
other equipment or goods and/or environmental pollution can
be the consequence.
WARNING: Dangerous situation: Potential serious injury to a user,
engineer, patient or any other person and possible
mistreatment of patients can be the consequence.
DANGER: Direct, immediate danger: Death or serious injuries can be the
consequence.
Not-safety relevant Notes

Icon Name Type of Information
INSTRUCTION: Indicates an instruction where it is important to follow literally
the described actions.
IMPORTANT: Highlights very important actions which have to be carried out

to prevent malfunction.
NOTE: • Indicates advice to facilitate the following step or action

without having a direct influence on the step or action.
• Highlights unusual points.
• Indicates background information.
• Can be used to explain or highlight displays of the
graphical user interface.
► Conventions
Highlighting of Tasks
Task number Task Description Remark
(1) Connect the cable. Examples for working steps to be performed in
(2) Switch the machine on. the listed sequence.
Highlighting of Buttons, Functions and Names within a Task

(1) Press <F9> or double-click the Examples are: Menu topics, keyboard keys,
<Refresh> button. icons, device buttons, commands etc.
(2) Enter file name. In this example a file name has to be entered
as term.


1 About this Manual
This manual is the Technical Documentation for the digitizer type 5170, subtype 100
and 200, with device software version NIM_2000 and higher.
Name of the digitizer: DX-G (Type 5170 / 100), DX-M (Type 5170 / 200)
The DX-G / DX-M digitizer is part of a CR system, comprising:

• Digitizer: A digitizer for scanning image plates retaining latent X-ray images. The
digitizer accepts a maximum of 5 cassettes at a time, to be scanned sequentially.
• Cassettes with image plates:
o CR HD5.0 (NIP) also named "Detector":
The image plate is of type "Needle Image Plate"
o CR MD4.0R (PIP): The image plate is of type "Powder Image Plate"
o CR HM5.0 (Mammo-NIP only for use in DX-M)
o CR MM3.0R (Mammo-PIP only for use in DX-M)
• The NX Workstation: One or more CR workstations with ID Tablet for cassette
identification, image processing and image transmission of digitized images
received from the digitizer.
• ID Tablet (from SN 15539 on): Exposed cassette has to be identified in ID-tablet
prior to entering into the digitizer.
NOTE:
This manual treats the digitizer with cassettes and image plates (detectors).
For more information to the other components refer to:
• NX Workstation: MEDNET, GSO Library
• ID Tablet: MEDNET, GSO Library


HEALTHCARE
Imaging Services Generic Safety Directions
Generic Safety Directions

for Agfa HealthCare Imaging Products
This Generic Safety Directions document comprises the general safety relevant
information including relevant environmental and occupational safety instructions for
the Service Engineer.
It is valid for all Agfa HealthCare Imaging Products.

Revision Date compared to previous Version 1.4:
1.5 04-2014  Corrected link to Global Harmonization Task Force. See
section 12.
 Added reference to user manual safety directions when
operating the device or system. See section 13.
 Added safety note for cleaning and disinfection. See
section 15.
 Added reference to the user manual for cleaning
instructions. See section 15.
 Added safety note in case of power ON and cover
removed. See section 16.
 Added safety note to check tension before working at the
powered-off device. See section 16.
 Added note to combine release system components only.
Refer to section 18.
 Added recommendation to use the supplementary
protective earth connection as additional safety measure,
if available. See section 18.
► Referenced Documents
Document Title
Not applicable Not applicable

The controlled version of this document is available from the Agfa HealthCare Library. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.
eq_generic_safety_directions_e_template_v01
DD+DIS238.06E Generic Safety Directions
► Manufacturer
Published by
D - 81539 München
Germany
Copyright  2014 Agfa HealthCare N.V.
Agfa and the Agfa rhombus are trademarks of Agfa-Gevaert N.V., Belgium, or its affiliates.
All other trademarks mentioned in this document are held by Agfa HealthCare N.V. or the
respective owners and are used in an editorial fashion with no intention of infringement.
Nothing contained in this legal notice nor in any text in this document shall be construed
as granting by implication, estoppel or otherwise, any license or right to use any of the
trademarks, service marks, trade names or logos appearing in this document without the
express prior written consent of their respective owner.
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
(1) Read the "Generic Safety Directions" prior to attempting any operation, repair or
maintenance task on the equipment.
Refer to Document ID 11849633, Agfa Intranet / Agfa Portal via Internet.
the product.

Edition 1, Revision 5 Generic Safety Directions for HealthCare Imaging Products Page 2 of 30
LIST OF CONTENTS
1 DISCLAIMER......................................................................................................... 5
2 USED ICONS ........................................................................................................ 6
3 LABELS ................................................................................................................. 7
3.1 CE Mark................................................................................................... 7
3.2 Labels ...................................................................................................... 7
3.3 Labels concerning Laser Radiation ......................................................... 8
4 PRODUCT COMPLAINTS .................................................................................. 10
5 REFERENCES .................................................................................................... 10
6 INTENDED USE.................................................................................................. 11
7 INTENDED USER ............................................................................................... 11
8 QUALIFICATIONS FOR OPERATION AND SERVICE TASKS.......................... 11
9 ENVIRONMENTAL AND OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS............. 12
10 CONNECTIONS TO OTHER EQUIPMENT ........................................................ 13
11 ACCESSORIES AND SPARE PARTS ................................................................ 14
12 COMPLIANCE..................................................................................................... 14
13 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR OPERATION......................................................... 17
14 RADIATION PROTECTION ................................................................................ 18
15 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR CLEANING AND DISINFECTION......................... 18
16 GENERAL SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR SERVICE ACTIVITIES ....................... 19
17 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR INSTALLATION PLANNING ACTIVITIES ............ 21
18 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR INSTALLATION ACTIVITIES................................ 23
19 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR ACTIVITIES ........ 25
20 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR REMOTE SERVICE ACTIVITIES ......................... 28

21 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR TRANSPORT AND SHIPMENT OF SPARE

PARTS, ACCESSORIES AND DEVICES............................................................28
22 SAFETY DIRECTIONS CONCERNING MODIFICATIONS.................................28
23 SAFETY DIRECTIONS CONCERNING HAZARDOUS MATERIALS .................28
24 RECYCLING ........................................................................................................29
25 WASTE DISPOSAL .............................................................................................29
26 ERASING PROTECTED HEALTH INFORMATION (PHI) ...................................30

1 Disclaimer
The installation and service of equipment described herein is to be performed by qualified

personnel who are employed by Agfa HealthCare or one of its affiliates or who are
otherwise authorized by Agfa HealthCare or one of its affiliates to provide such services.
Fitters, engineers and other persons who are not employed by or otherwise directly
affiliated with or authorized by Agfa HealthCare or one of its affiliates are directed to
contact one of the local offices of Agfa HealthCare or one of its affiliates before attempting
installation or service procedures.
No part of this document may be reproduced, copied, adapted or transmitted in any form
or by any means without the written permission of Agfa HealthCare.
Agfa HealthCare makes no warranties or representation, expressed or implied, with

respect to the accuracy, completeness or usefulness of the information contained in this
document and specifically disclaims warranties of suitability for any particular purpose.
Agfa HealthCare shall under no circumstances be liable for any damage arising from the
use or inability to use any information, apparatus, method or process disclosed in this
document.
Agfa HealthCare is not liable for resulting consequences, damages or injuries if you don’t
operate the product correctly or if you don’t have it serviced correctly.
Agfa HealthCare reserves the right to change the product, the characteristics and its
documentation without further notice to improve reliability, function or design.
NOTE:
In the United States, Federal Law stipulates that medical devices should only be sold to,
distributed and used by or by order of a licensed physician.

2 Used Icons
Icon Signal Word and Situation

CAUTION: Possible dangerous situation: Light injuries or damage
to the equipment described in the manual and/or damage to any
other equipment or goods and/or environmental pollution can be the
consequence.
WARNING: Dangerous situation: Potential serious injury to a user,
engineer, patient or any other person and possible mistreatment of
patients can be the consequence.
DANGER: Direct, immediate danger: Death or heavy injuries can
be the consequence.
INSTRUCTION:
Indicates an instruction where it is important to follow the described
actions literally.
IMPORTANT:
Highlights very important actions which have to be carried out to
prevent malfunction.
NOTE:
 Indicates advice to facilitate the following step or action
without having a direct influence on the step or action.
 Highlights unusual points.
 Indicates background information.
 Can be used to explain or highlight displays of the graphical
user interface.

3 Labels
3.1 CE Mark
CE Mark This product carries the CE Mark. The CE Declaration (CE Conformity)
becomes invalid if the product is changed without explicit consent of the
manufacturer! This applies to all parts, not only to safety elements.
3.2 Labels
For the meaning of the labels in and on the product refer to:
 The corresponding product or system User Manuals and
 The figure below, with a list of possible service activity related labels and their
meaning. To prevent injuries or damage to the equipment, follow the instructions
on the label or the related service instructions.
Hot surface Laser radiation Magnetic field Ionizing radiation
High voltage Hand injuries Do not touch Protective earth

connection

3.3 Labels concerning Laser Radiation
According to its classification, laser radiation can lead to eye and skin injuries.
Each laser source is classified from class 1 to class 4, based on standard
DIN EN 60825-1:2007.
The table below lists the meaning of the different laser classes. Note the detailed
instructions in the user manual and technical documentation.
Class # Meaning Example Label
Class 1: Not dangerous to the human eye, even

when using optical instruments. Can
nevertheless produce irritating effects, CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
especially with low ambient light
conditions.
Class 1 M: Not dangerous to the human eye if no

optical instruments (magnifying glass or LASER RADIATION
binocular) are used. DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH
Can nevertheless produce irritating OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
effects, especially with low ambient light CLASS 1M LASER PRODUCT
conditions.
Class 2: Dangerous to the human eye for

intentional staring into the beam.
Not dangerous for short term exposure
< 0,25 seconds.
Using optical instruments does not
increase the risk of eye injury. LASER RADIATION
Can even for short term exposure < 0,25
seconds produce dazzling and irritating DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM
effects, especially with low ambient light CLASS 2 LASER PRODUCT

conditions.

Class # Meaning Example Label
Class 2M: Dangerous to the human eye when

staring into the beam or when using
optical instruments (magnifying glass or
telescope). No hazard for short term
exposure < 0,25 seconds (aversion
response of the eye) without use of LASER RADIATION
optical instruments. Can produce DO NOT STARE INTO THE BEAM
dazzling and irritating effects even for OR VIEW DIRECTLY WITH
OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
short term exposure < 0,25 seconds, CLASS 2M LASER PRODUCT
especially at low ambient light conditions.
Class 3R: Possibly dangerous to the human eye for

direct view into the beam.
Risks of an eye injury is increasing with
duration of exposure.
Can produce dazzling and irritating
effects, especially with low ambient light LASER RADIATION
conditions.
AVOID DIRECT EYE EXPOSURE
CLASS 3R LASER PRODUCT
Class 3B: Normally dangerous to the human eye

for direct view into the beam.
Viewing diffuse reflections is normally not
dangerous.
Risk of small skin injuries or ignition of
explosive material if the power of the LASER RADIATION
laser beam is close to the upper limits of
class 3 B. AVOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM
CLASS 3B LASER PRODUCT
Class 4: Dangerous to the human eye for direct

view into the beam or viewing diffuse
reflections.
Very often class 4 lasers also implicate a
fire hazard.
LASER RADIATION
AVOID EYE OR SKIN EXPOSURE
TO DIRECT OR SCATTERED
RADIATION
CLASS 4 LASER PRODUCT

4 Product Complaints
Any service person who has any complaints or has experienced any dissatisfaction in the
quality, durability, reliability, safety, effectiveness or performance of this product must
notify Agfa HealthCare by the Agfa HealthCare complaint procedure.
If the product malfunctions and may have caused or contributed to a serious injury of a
patient or an accident or if there are any hazards which may cause an accident,
Agfa HealthCare must be notified immediately by telephone, fax or written
correspondence to the following address:
Agfa Service Support - local support addresses and phone numbers listed on:
www.agfa.com
As an alternative, contact the Corporate Communication Department:
Agfa-Gevaert N.V.
Septestraat 27
2640 Mortsel, Belgium.
Fax +32 3 444 4485
5 References
Technical Documentation is available via Agfa HealthCare Library and your local Agfa
HealthCare support organization.
Access to the Agfa HealthCare Library:
 (Internal) Agfa users access: http://intra.agfa.net/he/en/intranet/library/index.jsp

 External users access (via the portal): http://healthcare.agfa.net/irj/portal/library

6 Intended Use
This Agfa HealthCare product should only be operated in a hospital or clinical radiological
environment by qualified staff.
It must only be operated according to its specifications and its intended use. Any
operation not corresponding to the specifications or intended use may result in hazards,
which in turn may lead to serious injuries or fatal accidents (for example electric shocks).
AGFA will not assume any liability whatsoever in these cases.
Make sure that the product is constantly monitored in order to avoid inappropriate
handling, especially by children.
The product must only be installed and put into operation under the specified conditions.
The intended use statement of the product or system is listed in the User Manual of the
product or system.
7 Intended User
This manual is written for Agfa trained Field Service Engineers and Clinical Application
Specialists, trained users of Agfa HealthCare products and trained diagnostic X–Ray
clinical personnel who have received proper training. Users are considered as the persons
who handle the equipment as well as the persons having authority over the equipment.
8 Qualifications for Operation and Service Tasks
This technical documentation describes adjustments and routines which must only to be
performed by qualified technical personnel.
The Agfa (trained) Field Service Engineers and Clinical Application Specialists must have
received adequate Agfa HealthCare training on the safe and effective use of the product
and applicable environmental and occupational safety matters before attempting to work
with it. Training requirements may vary from country to country.
Agfa trained Field Service Engineers and Clinical Application Specialists must make sure
that training is received in accordance with local laws or regulations that have the force of
law.
Your local Agfa HealthCare representative can provide further information on training.

9 Environmental and occupational Safety Instructions
Each Agfa trained Field Service Engineer and Clinical Application Specialist:
 Must make his or her personal contribution to improve safety and protect the
environment.
 When working on a customers site, has a duty to take reasonable care to avoid injury
to himself or herself or to others who may be affected by their acts or omissions.
 Is obligated to adhere strictly to regulations and instructions.
 Shall familiarize himself or herself with the provisions of the Agfa Healthcare
Health, Safety and Environment Policy and any specific rules or procedures relating to
occupational safety at work and the protection of the environment.
 Shall promptly report any near misses, accidents, incidents or dangerous occurrences
to their line manager and co-operate fully in any investigation.
 Shall co-operate with company management on matters relating to
health, safety and environment and, where appropriate, discuss with and / or assist
their manager in resolving matters relating to health, safety and environment.
 Shall ensure that any company equipment issued to them, or, for which they are
responsible, is correctly used and properly maintained.
 Shall wear protective equipment whenever instructed or if it is recommended to do so.
 Shall be responsible for good housekeeping in the area in which he or she is working.
 Shall report situations, which could put them at risk, on either company or
customers' premises, to their manager or supervisor; and, if warranted, directly and in
confidence, to the Health and Safety Coordinator, Global HSE* Manager, or ultimately
to the Managing Director.
* Health, Safety and Environment
 Shall report any injuries, diseases or dangerous occurrences to his or her line
manager.
 Shall report any accidents, incidents or near misses to his or her line manager.
 Shall report any situation of which he or she is aware that is potentially dangerous.
 Shall comply with any health surveillance procedure instituted for his or her benefit or
for compliance with regulations.

10 Connections to other Equipment
Agfa HealthCare equipment must only be used in combination with other Agfa HealthCare
equipment or components if these are expressly recognized by Agfa HealthCare as
compatible. A list of such equipment and components is available from Agfa HealthCare
service on request.
Changes or additions to the equipment must only be carried out by persons authorized to
do so by Agfa HealthCare. Such changes must comply with best engineering practice and
all applicable laws and regulations that have the force of law within the jurisdiction of the
hospital.
Connections to other equipment:

WARNING:
Accessory equipment not complying with the safety requirements of this product
may lead to a safety hazard.
INSTRUCTION:
Consult the technical documentation before making any connections to other equipment.
Consideration relating to the choice of accessory equipment shall include:
 Use of the accessory equipment in the patient vicinity.
 Evidence that the safety certification of the accessory equipment has been
performed in accordance with the appropriate IEC 60601-1 and IEC 60601-1-1
harmonized national standard.
In addition all configurations must comply with the medical electrical systems standard
IEC 60601-1-1. The party that makes the connections acts as system configurer and is
responsible for complying with the systems standard.
If required, contact your local service organization.

11 Accessories and Spare Parts
Parts and accessories replacement:

WARNING:
Hazards may be introduced because of component failure or improper operation.
INSTRUCTION:
 Replace defective parts with Agfa HealthCare original spare parts.
 Use only tools and measuring instruments which are suitable for the procedure.
 Only approved Agfa HealthCare accessories must be used. For a list of compatible
accessories contact your local Agfa HealthCare organization or www.agfa.com.
12 Compliance
Directive for HealthCare Imaging Products:

Council Directive 93/42/EEC of 14 June 1993 concerning medical devices
(OJ No L 169/1 of 1993-07-12)
 ANNEX I - ESSENTIAL REQUIREMENTS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS The

products are designed and manufactured in such a way that, when used under the
conditions and for the purposes intended and, where applicable, by virtue of the
technical knowledge, experience, education or training of intended users, they will not
compromise the clinical condition or the safety of patients, or the safety and health of
users.
 ANNEX II - EC DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY: Full quality assurance system

ISO 13485
 ANNEX X - CLINICAL EVALUATION: The clinical evaluation follows a defined and

methodologically sound procedure.

Applied standards for Agfa HealthCare Imaging medical electrical equipment:
NOTE:
Equipment delivered by Agfa HealthCare is not necessarily classified as medical
electrical equipment. For details refer to the related user and /or service manual.
 IEC 60601-1, Ed. 3: Medical electrical equipment - Part 1: General requirements for
basic safety and essential performance
 ISO 14971:2000, Medical devices – Application of risk management to medical devices
 IEC 60601-1-2, It specifies the manufacturer of the ME (Medical Electrical) equipment

or ME system provides information to the responsible organization that is essential in
determining the suitability of the ME equipment or ME system for the electromagnetic
environment of use, and in managing the electromagnetic environment of use to permit
the ME equipment or ME system to maintain basic safety and provide its essential
performance without disturbing other equipment.
Additional standards for documentation:
IEC 82079 Ed. 1: Preparation of instructions for use - Structuring, content and
presentation
Harmonization:
Global Harmonization Task Force (GHTF) http://www.imdrf.org
This document has been prepared to comply with Study Group 1 guidance document of
the Global Harmonization Task Force (GHTF) to assist development of a consistent,
harmonized definition for a medical device that could be used within a global regulatory
model and would offer significant benefits to the manufacturer, user, patient or consumer,
and to Regulatory Authorities and support global convergence of regulatory systems.
IECEE CB SCHEME:
The IECEE CB (Certification Body) Scheme is the world's first truly international system
for acceptance of test reports dealing with the safety of electrical and electronic products.
It is a multilateral agreement among participating countries and certification organizations.
Agfa has produced a CB test report and claims national certification in all other member
countries of the CB Scheme.
Details see: www.iecee.org

Radiation of radio frequency:

CAUTION: For USA only:
This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance with the service manual, may cause interference
to radio communication.
NOTE:
This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A
computing device pursuant to Subpart B of Part 15 of FCC Rules, which are designed to
provide reasonable protection against such interference when operated in a commercial
environment.
Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause interference.
The user will be required to take all necessary measures to correct the interference at
his own expense.

13 Safety Directions for Operation
Accessibility of the mains power switch:

CAUTION:
Do not obstruct the mains power switch.
Position the Agfa HealthCare product so that it is possible to disconnect the mains power
connection.
 Before operating the device or system e.g. for verification of an installation, repair or
preventive maintenance activity, refer to the safety notes in the relevant user manual.
 Under certain conditions the Agfa HealthCare product will show a display containing a
message. This message will show that either a problem or action has occurred or that
a requested action is required or cannot be performed. The user must read these
messages carefully. They will provide information on what to do. This will be either
performing an action to resolve the problem or to contact the Agfa HealthCare
service organization. Details on the contents of messages can be found in this
technical documentation.
 All images created using any image technology can show artifacts which could be
confused with diagnostic information. If there is any doubt that the diagnostic
information could be corrupted, additional investigations must be performed to get
clear diagnostic information.
 Ventilation openings must not be covered.
 If you notice conspicuous noise or smoke, disconnect the product immediately from
the mains.
 Do not pour water or any other liquid over the device.
 If a system malfunction causes an emergency situation involving the patient, operating
personnel or any system component, activate the emergency stop for the system
concerned. All motor driven system movements will be stopped.
 Do not store any magnetic media near or on devices, which produce magnetic fields,
since stored data may be lost.
Explosive environment:
DANGER:
Risk of explosion.
Never operate this device in zones where there are flammable anesthetics or oxygen
which may cause an explosion.

Usage of an un-interruptible power supply:

WARNING:
Images can be lost due to power failure.
Connect the equipment to an un-interruptible power supply (UPS) or an institutional
standby generator.
14 Radiation Protection
Only qualified and authorized personnel shall operate any X-Ray system. In this context
qualified means those legally permitted to operate this X-Ray equipment in the
jurisdiction in which the X-Ray equipment is being used, and authorized means those
authorized by the authority controlling the use of the X-Ray equipment. Full use must be
made of all radiation protection features, devices, systems, procedures and accessories.
Ionizing radiation can lead to radiation injuries if handled incorrectly. When radiation is
applied, the required protective measures must be complied with.
15 Safety Directions for Cleaning and Disinfection
DANGER:
Risk of explosion when using wrong cleaning agent.
Risk of electric shock when cleaning with power ON.
When the equipment is going to be cleaned, be sure to turn OFF the power of each
device, and to unplug the power cord from the AC outlet.
Never use anhydrous or high solvency alcohols, benzine, thinner or any other flammable
cleaning agent.
 For instructions about cleaning of the device or accessories, refer to the user manual.
 Details about cleaning and disinfection or sterilization methods that may be used on
system parts or accessories that can become contaminated through contact with the
patient or with body fluids, are referred to within the individual service or user
documents.

16 General Safety Directions for Service Activities
 This system uses high voltage. Consider the respective safety regulations.
 Electrical repairs and connections must only be performed by a qualified electrician.
 Mechanical repairs and connections must only be performed by a qualified technician.
 The safety directions for operation (see section 13) are also valid for all service
activities.
 During all service activities observe prescribed local and country-specific
requirements (e.g. occupational safety and accident prevention regulations).
 All existing screw connections must be tightened sufficiently firmly, but they may not
be overstressed when tightening. There must always be compliance with stated
torque values!
 Damaged or missing screws may be replaced only with the same screw types that
have the specified hardness rating. Unless a different value is listed in the
instructions, all screws used must be hardness rated 8.8.
 All screws must be secured in accordance with the corresponding data.
If "Loctite" has to be used to secure screws, this is stated in the instructions.
 Any Agfa service PC or tool which is to be connected via RS232, RJ45, USB or other
interface to an Agfa device must not be connected to the mains but must be operated
on its internal battery or indirect supply (low voltage).
 When handling printed circuit boards (abbr.: PCBs) the following points must be
observed:
o Always switch off the equipment and unplug the power cord, before you
disconnect or connect cables on printed circuit boards.
o When working on PCBs, always wear an anti-static wrist strap. Never touch any
parts or components on PCBs with your bare fingers.
o PCBs have to be kept or transported in their protection bags. Never carry a
PCB without protection bag and walk on carpet or plastic floor covering
(electrostatic charge).
o Once the PCB is taken out of its protection bag, it has to be protected from
electrostatic charge by a grounded mat.

General safety note, in case of power ON and cover removed:

DANGER:
Risk of electric shock when working at the device with opened cover and
power ON.
Only work at the powered device with opened cover for service purposes, if this is
absolutely unavoidable.
Before working at the powered device with opened cover for service purposes,
 first identify the high voltage wires and connectors in the circuit diagram.
 if possible, cover high voltage wires and connectors with insulating material.
 greatest possible care must be taken, never to get in contact with high voltage wires
or connectors.
General safety note to check tension before working at the powered-off device:
DANGER:
High voltage. Risk of electric shock.
Before working at the device with opened covers, perform following steps to ensure the
device is de-energized:
 Switch off the power at the main power switch.
 Prevent that the device can be switched on by other persons. Example: Put a sign
"Don't switch on" in local language to the main switch.
 Use an appropriate tester and confirm that the device is de-energized (0V!).
 Observe additional safety notes at the device and in the specific service documents.
 For devices with capacitors (e.g. X-Ray generator): Confirm by measuring the
voltage at the capacitors, that the capacitors are discharged.
 For devices with batteries for power supply (e.g. mobile X-ray unit): Observe special
safety notes in the related service manual.
Static discharge at electrical components:

CAUTION:
Static discharge! Electrical components may be destroyed:
For the repair on electrical components, wear a grounding strap
(Order number: CM+9 9999 0830 0) around the wrist and connect the other end of this
strap on a grounded conducting metal piece.

17 Safety Directions for Installation Planning Activities
Install equipment in the patient environment only, if it is classified as “Type B equipment”.

Install all equipment outside the patient environment, which is not classified as “Type B
equipment”. Refer to the specifications in the user manual of the system or product. For
definition of the patient environment see dimensions in the figure below.
R
Patient vicinity
h
Patient vicinity
patient_vicinity.cdr
R = 1.5 m / 4.9 feet (EN 60601-1) or 1.83 m / 6 feet (UL 60601-1)

h = 2.5 m / 8.2 feet (EN 60601-1) or 2.29 / 7.5 feet (UL 60601-1)
Protecting CR (Computed Radiography) equipment against scattered X-Rays:

WARNING:
Image plate is sensitive for X-rays. Poor image quality possible.
The digitizer and the cassette storage shall be protected against X-ray radiation this way,
that the annual dose equivalent at the installation place will not exceed 1 mSv.
Protecting Film-Screen Systems against scattered X-Rays:

WARNING:
Film is sensitive for X-rays. Poor image quality possible.
The film-screen system shall be protected against X-ray radiation this way, that the annual
dose equivalent at the installation place will not exceed 1 mSv.

Accessibility of the power disconnection device:

WARNING:
Electrical device. Shock possible.
INSTRUCTION:
 Do not position Agfa equipment so it is difficult to operate the disconnection device

when an appliance coupler or separable plug is used as isolation.
 Local and International wiring regulations must be observed. Check all supplies and
voltages, currents, trips and fuses with the Hospital facilities department or their
engineers.
Fixing equipment at the wall or floor:

WARNING:
Unknown composition of wall or floor structure: Risk of injury or damage:
Hospital management is responsible for the position, location and fixing of all equipment.
Floor load:
CAUTION:
Heavy device may damage the floor covering.
Make sure that the floor covering is solid enough to stand the weight of the device.
Fixing equipment at the ceiling:

CAUTION:
Ceiling construction may be inadequate for fixing of equipment: Risk of injury or
damage:
Hospital management is responsible for the position, location and fixing of all equipment.

18 Safety Directions for Installation Activities
 If not otherwise stated, installation and configuration is performed by Agfa HealthCare

trained personnel.
 If damage of the package is visible from the outside contact your local AGFA
representative.
 Apart from wearing the required protective clothing, e.g. safety boots and gloves, care
must be taken that heavy loads are correctly lifted and carried to avoid injury. The
relevant instructions must be complied with. Heavy or awkward loads must be moved
by mechanical means or by several people.
 When installing the product be sure that there is either a mains plug or an all-pole
circuit breaker in the internal installation fitted near the product and that it is easily
accessible.
 If the device has a supplementary protective earth connection: It is recommended to
use the supplementary protective earth connection as additional safety measure.
 Defective covers, sharp edges or protruding parts of equipment can cause injuries, if
accidentally knocked into. Route cables and position equipment safely.
 This device should be installed behind the institution firewall for network security and
anti-virus protection. No ongoing computer virus protection or network security for this
medical device is provided (e.g. a computer firewall). Network security and anti-virus
provisions are the ongoing responsibility of the user or institution.
 In a system, combine released system components only. Refer to the compatibility
information which is referred to from the relevant service manual.
Connection of the device to the power supply:

CAUTION:
Risk of damaging the device by using the wrong power supply.
INSTRUCTION:
Prior to connecting the device to the mains:
 Compare the power requirements indicated on the type label with the available
power supply in the installation room.
 Check the service manual for the type of input voltage selection, manual or
automatic: If manual, select the appropriate voltage and fuses.
 Confirm to use the correct socket and plug for the required power supply.
 Check the equipment will work with the power supply available.

Ground potential differences:

CAUTION:
To comply with ISO 60601-1 (annex I) all computers and peripherals must be
connected to the same power source.
INSTRUCTION:
 Always connect the associated monitor to the same uninterruptible power source as
the PC.
 When different combinations of equipment are used in various medical environments
a potential difference (V) can exist between the protective earths in different localities.
If the protective earthing fails this potential difference can cause a hazard for the
operator or for the patient.
Performing the electrical test according to national regulations before putting the
equipment into service:
WARNING:
Improper ground connections or too high leakage current may lead to electric shocks.
 After installation, before putting the equipment into service, inform the responsible
organization* about the necessity of the electrical test according to national
regulations.
If specific national regulations do not exist: It is recommended to perform the
electrical test according to IEC 62353.
 Make sure, that all grounding connections are present.
*Responsible Organization:
Entity accountable for the use and maintenance of a medical equipment or a medical equipment system. The
accountable entity can be, for example, a hospital or an individual clinician.
NOTE:
Refer to the Agfa HealthCare Library for system specific IEC 62353 test documents.

19 Safety Directions for Maintenance and Repair Activities
 This technical documentation identifies the parts on which preventive inspection and
maintenance shall be performed by Agfa trained service personnel. For required
preventive maintenance frequency refer to the technical documentation or contact
local service management.
 In general the device has to be switched off during service activities. Exception: If the
device is switched on to perform tests pay particular attention to any hazards due to
moving and rotating parts. Avoid lose clothing or finger traps. Switch off the device
immediately after the tests.
 Do not turn motors manually. If required, first disconnect the motor from the motor
control board.
 Make sure that the power cord does not show any signs of damage.
 After repair work always check that the integrated safety features are not overridden
or disconnected.
 If there is any visible damage to the machine casing do not hand-over the product to
the customer. First repair the machine casing.
Replacing batteries:
WARNING:
Battery can explode, causing chemical burns.
INSTRUCTION:
 Check that batteries are inserted with correct polarity.

 Only use batteries of the same type or an equivalent type as specified by the
manufacturer.
 Dispose of empty batteries in compliance with the specifications of the manufacturer.
 When removing batteries from the equipment take appropriate measures to avoid
short circuit of the battery:
Either use tape to cover the two poles of the battery or put the battery back in its
original packing and secure the packing by tape.

Performing the electrical test according to national regulations after repair work:
WARNING:
Improper ground connections or too high leakage current may lead to electric
shocks.
 After any repair work which may influence electrical safety of the product, inform the
responsible organization* about the necessity of the electrical test according to
national regulations.
If specific national regulations do not exist: It is recommended to perform the
electrical test according to IEC 62353.
 Make sure, that all grounding connections are present.
*Responsible Organization:
Entity accountable for the use and maintenance of a medical equipment or a medical equipment system. The
accountable entity can be, for example, a hospital or an individual clinician.
NOTE:
Refer to the Agfa HealthCare Library for system specific IEC 62353 test documents.
Performing service activities at devices emitting laser radiation:

WARNING:
Laser radiation. Eye injury possible.
INSTRUCTION:
 Strictly observe the warning notes in the service manual of devices emitting laser
radiation (See service manual chapter describing Safety Guidelines / General
Repair Instructions) and at the corresponding steps of instructions.
 Strictly observe the warning labels at the modules emitting laser light. For the
meaning of the labels refer to section 3.3 in this document.
 Do not look into the laser beam.
 Do not open modules containing a laser. Only open modules containing a laser if
explicitly instructed to do so.
 Do not keep tools in the laser beam unless explicitly instructed to do so.
 Make yourself familiar with the path of the laser light and the conditions, when the
laser beam is switched on. Refer to the functional description in the corresponding
service manual.
 Do not operate modules with laser outside the device.

Sharp edges:
CAUTION:
Sharp edges inside the device: Cut or abrasion possible.
Be careful at maintenance and replacement of parts.
Cleaning optical elements:

CAUTION:
Image artifacts possible after cleaning optical elements.
When cleaning optical elements follow the service manual precisely.
Secured screws:
CAUTION:
Opening screws secured by red lacquer may misalign important device
adjustments:
Do not open screws that are secured by red lacquer.
Opening PCs and Workstations:

WARNING:
Electrical shock and damage to the equipment possible.
 Only open the PC or workstation if explicitly stated in the service manual.
 Unplug before opening.
 Observe anti-static safety regulations.
Replacing fuses:
WARNING:
Replacing fuses by wrong type may lead to fire hazard.
Use only fuses of the exact value and characteristics stated in the service manual or on
the device.

20 Safety Directions for remote Service Activities
Remote Service Activities:

WARNING:
During remote service activities images can be lost.
Inform the customer prior to remote service activities to finish the current work and to
stop working on the system.
21 Safety Directions for Transport and Shipment of Spare Parts,

Accessories and Devices
 In compliance with transport regulations, all uninterruptible power supplies (UPS)

must be shipped with batteries disconnected.
 Use the original packing when returning spare parts, accessories or devices.
 Before returning any spare part with a built in lithium battery remove it and dispose the
batteries locally according to local waste regulations.
22 Safety Directions concerning Modifications
Modifications made in products/systems shipped by Agfa HealthCare must not be

implemented without written permission from Agfa HealthCare.
This applies in particular to changes which may affect the mechanical and/or electrical
safety or radiation-protection properties of a product (e.g. changing of safety distances,
removal of locks/instructions etc.).
23 Safety Directions concerning Hazardous Materials
'Hazardous materials' is the designation for substances which can ignite or explode or
which are toxic, injurious to health, corrosive or irritating. The “Hazardous Material”
instructions must be read and the required protective measures must be complied with
when performing work to avoid health risks.
Their properties together with the hazards and protective measures connected with them
are identified clearly by symbols and described by the instructions appertaining to the
hazardous substances.

24 Recycling
Agfa HealthCare has Recycling Passports available for equipment and CR cassettes. The
Recycling Passport explains how to dispose or recycle the equipment or CR cassette at
the end of the life cycle.
The Recycling Passports are meant to be used as information for waste treatment
partners and companies that want to recycle or dispose end-of-life Agfa equipment and
CR cassettes.
To get a copy of the required Agfa HealthCare Recycling Passport please contact your
local Sales organization.
25 Waste Disposal
On August 13, 2005, the European Directive on Waste Electrical and

Electronic Equipment (WEEE) 2002/96/EC, amended by Directive
2003/108/EC, came into force.
The directive on Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) aims to

prevent the generation of electric and electronic waste and to promote the
reuse, recycling and other forms of recovery. It therefore requires the collection
of WEEE, recovery and reuse or recycling.
This directive has to be implemented into national law by the individual
European countries by August 13th 2005.
Due to the implementation into national law, specific requirements can be

different within the European Member States.
This symbol on the product, or in the manual and in the warranty, and / or on
its packaging indicates that this product shall not be treated as household
waste.
For more detailed information about take-back and recycling of this product,
please contact your local Agfa service organization. By ensuring this product is
disposed of correctly, you will help prevent potential negative consequences
for the environment and human health, which could otherwise be caused by
inappropriate waste handling of this product. The recycling of materials will
help to conserve natural resources.
If your equipment or replaced spare parts contain batteries or accumulators
please dispose of these separately according to local regulations.

26 Erasing Protected Health Information (PHI)
AGFA HealthCare Field Service Personnel or its authorized affiliates are responsible for
the removal of Protected Health Information (PHI) patient data from devices, modules or
parts that are removed from the customer’s site. This also applies to the exchange of
spare parts, especially to parts that are returned to central warehouses for repair or
refurbishing. Examples for parts or modules that may contain Protected Health
Information (PHI) are: Computer hard disks, CD-ROMs, backup tapes, archive tapes.

Chapter 1
HEALTHCARE Controls, Connections
Imaging Services
and Setup Procedures
DX-M
Type 5170 / 200
DX-G
Type 5170 / 100
This document describes:

 All important service tasks to be carried out prior to putting the device in operation
 Location and function of the controls and connectors of the device

2.3 02-2011 DX-M Mobile added in following sections:
 1.4.1 - Mounting the optional Earthquake Kit / Mobile
 1.4.3 - Removing Transportation Locks
 4 - Completion of Installation
 6 - Appendix
Document Title
DD+DIS002.10E DX-G / DX-M Service Manual,
Chapter 11 - Installation Planning
DD+DIS043.08E NX Service Documentation,
Chapter 4 - Installation and Configuration

eq_01_setup_procedure_e_template_v07
DD+DIS001.10E Controls, Connections and Setup Procedures
► Manufacturer
Publisher
D - 81539 München
Germany
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
the equipment.
the product.
NOTE:


02-2011 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
LIST OF CONTENTS
1 INSTALLATION PREPARATION .............................................................................................5

1.1 Checking Installation Site Prerequisites ...................................................................................6
1.2 Unpacking the Digitizer .............................................................................................................6
1.3 Checking the Shipment Completeness.....................................................................................7
1.4 Mechanical Installation..............................................................................................................8
1.4.1 Mounting the optional Earthquake Kit / Mobile .........................................................................9
1.4.2 Lowering the Digitizer in the Middle of the Room ...................................................................10
1.4.3 Removing Transportation Locks .............................................................................................12
2 CONFIGURATION OF STANDALONE INSTALLATION OF DIGITIZER AND NX

WORKSTATION .....................................................................................................................17
2.1 Configuring the NX Workstation with Default Settings ...........................................................17
2.2 Loading Digitizer Model Files..................................................................................................20
2.2.1 Loading Digitizer Model Files on the NX Workstation ............................................................20
2.3 Testing Standalone Installation...............................................................................................24
3 CONFIGURING THE DIGITIZER AND THE NX WORKSTATION FOR THE HOSPITAL

NETWORK .............................................................................................................................24
3.1 Moving Digitizer to final Position in the Hospital .....................................................................25
3.2 Adapting Digitizer to uneven Floor..........................................................................................26
3.3 Configuring NX Workstation and Digitizer for Hospital Network.............................................28
4 COMPLETION OF INSTALLATION .......................................................................................32

4.1 Checking the Technical Image Quality of the System ............................................................32
4.1.1 Cleaning and Checking of the Image Plate ............................................................................32
4.1.2 Erasing the Cassette...............................................................................................................34
4.1.3 Exposing the Cassette ............................................................................................................35
4.1.4 Scanning the Flatfield Image(s) ..............................................................................................37
4.1.5 Checking the Images at the Lightbox or Viewing Station .......................................................38
4.2 Checking the Hand-Over Test (HOT) File ..............................................................................40
4.3 Performing a Backup ..............................................................................................................40
4.4 Hand-over of the System to the Clinical Application Specialist ..............................................41
4.4.1 Setup of Connectivity to additional System Components.......................................................41


4.4.2 Customizing System Components according to Customer Preferences................................41
4.4.3 Customer Training ..................................................................................................................42
4.4.4 Performing further Activities depending on local Regulations ................................................46
5 INSTALLATION CHECKLIST .................................................................................................47

6 APPENDIX..............................................................................................................................49
6.1 Additional installation steps for mobile use.............................................................................49
6.1.1 Removing Transportation Locks (Mobile Installation).............................................................49
6.1.2 Installing the Digitizer at the mobile site .................................................................................54
6.1.3 Completing the Installation for Mobile Installations.................................................................58


1 Installation Preparation
NOTE:
The Installation Checklist in section 5 of this chapter gives an overview of all steps
and guides through the complete installation process.
Be aware to register the installation times for the different tasks in the service report
according to the task codes in the installation checklist.
The purpose of this section is to list the required tasks before installation and
configuration to guarantee a smooth digitizer installation.
# Task Overview Section

1 Checking installation site prerequisites 1.1
2 Unpacking digitizer 1.2
3 Checking shipment completeness 1.3
4* Mounting the optional earthquake kit 1.4.1
5 Lowering the digitizer 1.4.2
6 Removing transportation locks 1.4.3
* Step can be skipped if earthquake kit is not available.
IMPORTANT:
 This document describes the installation and configuration of a standalone system
(Digitizer with NX Workstation and ID Tablet).
To be able to install the complete system it is additionally required to perform
installation and configuration steps of the NX Workstation.
Refer to Chapter 4 of the corresponding NX Workstation version in the
Mednet GSO Library, path: <Computed Radiography =>
CR Workstation Software>
 Up to NX 2.0.8200 / 3.0.8200:
The digitizer model files < DX-G.XML> and < DX-M.XML> keep digitizer software
parameters for the NX Workstation. They are not part of the NX Workstation
software and have to be downloaded before starting the installation from the
Mednet GSO Library path:
<Computed Radiography => CR Digitizers => DX-M/DX-G as of
NIM_2000 => Software>
 As of NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300:
The digitizer model files are installed ex factory.


1.1 Checking Installation Site Prerequisites
ACTION:
Confirm that all prerequisites described in the "Installation planning checklist" are
fulfilled. This checklist is available at the end of Chapter 11, Installation Planning.
1.2 Unpacking the Digitizer
(1) Compare the labels on the boxes with the customer's order list and the
shipping papers.
(2) Check the packing material for visible transport damage such as:
 Dented edges
 Damage on the box
 Torn fixing elements (metal straps)
(3) Check the attached safety indicators on the packing boxes.
White field is OK.

Red field is not OK.
STOSSEMPFINDLICH
Figure 1
IMPORTANT:
If the device was tilted, the circle in the arrow head of the TILTWATCH changes from
white to red.
If the device was subjected to shocks, the square field in the middle of the
SHOCKWATCH changes from white to red.
In both cases, and if damages are visible from the outside:
 Inform the carrier. This damage must be noted down in the handover documents.
 If device should be replaced, contact your local AGFA representative.
 Otherwise start installation. If device doesn’t work, contact your local AGFA
representative.


CAUTION:
Damage of unpacked digitizer by inappropriate transport.
Reduced Image Quality possible.
Move the unpacked device very carefully. Especially observe door sills.
Move the digitizer only when lifted completely! Never move the lowered digitizer.
(4) Unpack the digitizer.

The unpacking instructions are printed on the digitizer box.
1.3 Checking the Shipment Completeness
(1) Compare the scope of delivery with the packing list.
Example for packing list:
Quantity Description
1 Digitizer
1 Packing list for Accessory
1 CE declaration of conformity
1 Enclosure with information concerning RoHS*
1 Power cable, Europe, 3.00 m
1 Power cable, USA, 3.00 m / 10 feet long
1 Network cable 5 m / 16 feet long
1 1.5 mm CU filter
1 2 mm Al filter (for DX-M only)
1 Installation Procedure
(Chapters 1 and 11 of the Technical Documentation)
1 USB stick with software for the digitizer, limit patterns for
flatfield evaluation and service enclosures
1 Ratchet for lifting and lowering the device including extension and
nut (8mm)
1 Special Allen key for removal of vacuum valve
1 CD with User Manuals in various languages
1 DX-M Mobile only: Tool to lock/unlock IP Carrier
1 DX-M Mobile only: Quick Guide for Mobile Installation
* ROHS = Restriction of certain Hazardous Substances
NOTE:
Number and format of cassettes and/or image plates is depending on the
individual order.
(2) In case the delivery is not complete contact the Regional Support Network (RSN).
External partners: Contact your local Agfa representative.


1.4 Mechanical Installation
WARNING:
Damages of the device, functional problems or damage of consumables possible
if transport locks are not removed completely or digitizer not lowered
completely.
Never operate the digitizer when:
 Transportation locks are inserted.
 Digitizer is not lowered completely.
CAUTION:
Do not operate the digitizer, if not lowered completely!
The following table lists the main mechanical installation preparation tasks:
# Task Section
1 Mounting the optional earthquake kit / mobile 1.4.1
2 Lowering the digitizer in the middle of the room 1.4.2
3 Removing transportation locks 1.4.3


1.4.1 Mounting the optional Earthquake Kit / Mobile
IMPORTANT:
The mobile installation of the DX-M digitizers requires the installation of the base plate
and the wall fixation. These parts must be mounted before the installation of the
digitizer at the mobile site by the manufacturer of the mammography trailer / bus.
For the mounting of these parts the responsibility lies in the hand of the manufacturer
of the mammography trailer / bus. The field service engineer is only responsible for the
installation of the digitizer itself at the prepared mobile site.
WARNING:
Unknown composition of wall or floor structure. Risk of injury or damage.
The Hospital is responsible for:
 Choosing fixing material suitable for hospitals requirements.
 Drilling the holes in the wall and floor.
 Mounting of the earthquake kit at the wall and floor.
The field service engineer is not responsible for the mounting on the wall and floor of
the hospital. The field service engineer should only work on the digitizer itself.
NOTE:
For instructions how to install the Earthquake kit refer to the Enclosure document
delivered with the Earthquake kit.


1.4.2 Lowering the Digitizer in the Middle of the Room
CAUTION:
Move the digitizer only when lifted completely! Never move the lowered digitizer.
NOTE:
For minimum required space for operation and maintenance refer to:
(1) Take the ratchet with extension and nut (8mm) out of the accessory box. The
accessory box is located on the output buffer. Also remove the USB Memory
Stick and the Allen Key.
(2) Insert the ratchet in the digitizer
(see Figure 2).
(3) Turn the axle clockwise, until the
digitizer rests on its floor plate:
The ratchet can be moved easily
now.
IMPORTANT:
Do not turn more as soon
as digitizer rests completely
on the floor in order to avoid
damage to the lift
mechanism.
Figure 2
CAUTION:


(4) Open the 2 fast locks

(see Figure 3).
(5) Open the right cover.
Figure 3
(6) Store the ratchet and the Allen key

in the box of the right cover.
NOTE:
There is an additional
compartment in the right
cover for the USB stick.
Figure 4


1.4.3 Removing Transportation Locks
IMPORTANT:
This section describes the removal of the transportation locks for a common
installation. For mobile installations refer to the appendix (6.1.1 - Removing
Transportation Locks (Mobile Installation)).
CAUTION:
Remove all transportation locks.
REQUIRED TOOLS:
The Standard Tools are defined in chapter 3.2 of the
DX-G / DX-M Service Documentation.
NOTE:
The removal of the transport locks is also described in an instruction attached to the
input buffer. Every transport lock is marked with a label that should be collected for the
completeness check in Figure 13.
IMPORTANT:
Transport locks can be removed only if digitizer is lowered completely. See previous
section.
(1) Turn screws on the left side

counterclockwise and on the right
side clockwise to open the cover.
closed opened
Figure 5


(2) Remove front cover (A) by pulling

it to the front followed by lifting it
off the 2 metal lugs (see detail
B
in Figure 6).
(3) Turn 2 screws (B) and (C) of the
A
left cover counterclockwise.
(4) Open the left cover as far as
possible.
C
Figure 6
(5) Check shock watch at the bottom

of the left frame of the device.
IMPORTANT:
85MC/10G
If the shock watch is red, SHOCKWATCH
additionally perform the

following tasks:
 Register the damages
to Regional Support
Network (RSN) / For
non AGFA Employees
please contact your
Figure 7
local AGFA representative.
 Check the swivel drive
mechanics and the acrylic
light guide with its fixation
for damages or loose parts.
(6) Write date and result of shock watch check with a waterproof pen at the rack.


(7) Remove four transportation locks

on the right side.
Figure 8
(8) Remove four transportation locks

on the left side.
(9) Store the transportation locks and
screws in the accessory box.
Figure 9
(10) Remove cable tie at swivel drive

with a cutter.
Remov
e
Figure 10


(11) Open transportation lock screw for

IP carrier counterclockwise
approximately three turns using the
ratchet (8 mm) with extension.
See IMPORTANT note below.
Figure 11
IMPORTANT:
Do not turn the transportation lock screw for IP carrier more than
3 turns. More turns can lead to damages of the device.
(12) Remove transportation lock at

cassette buffer unit.
Figure 12
(13) Verify that the list of removed

transportation lock comprises:
 The mechanical locks
 Ten labels “Remove” (red)
 One label “Unlock” (yellow)
(14) Close all covers. 10 x

1x
Remove
Remove
Remove
Remove
Remove
Remove
Remove
Remove
Remove
Remove
Unlock
Figure 13


(15) Connect mains cable.
Power Supply Input

100 - 240 V / 50 - 60 Hz AC
Figure 14
(16) Remove instructions (A, B) from

A
the input buffer and dispose them.
(17) Remove the protection foil (C) B
from the display.
C
(18) Clean the adhesive that may stick
to the input buffer or the display
with a lint free cloth and
CR Screen Cleaner (same as used
for cleaning the image plates).
Figure 15


2 Configuration of Standalone Installation of

Digitizer and NX Workstation
The following table lists the main installation tasks:
# Task Section
1 Configuring the NX Workstation with Default Settings 2.1
2 Loading Digitizer Model Files 2.2
3 Testing Standalone Installation 2.3
2.1 Configuring the NX Workstation with Default Settings
IMPORTANT:
 Do not yet connect the NX Workstation to the hospital network.
Connecting the digitizer and the NX Workstation into the hospital network is
performed after the configuration of both.
 It is required to login to Windows with a Windows administrator account to perform
the following configurations.
(1) On the NX Workstation configure IP

address "192.192.192.193" and
subnet mask 255.255.255.0 (see
control panel / network connections).
For detailed instructions refer to
chapter 4 of the NX Workstation
Service Manual.
Figure 16
NOTE:
The default IP address of the digitizer ex factory is "192.192.192.192".
The IP address of the connected NX Workstation must differ from this
address within the last three digits.


(2) On the NX Workstation configure

computer name "DefaultNX"
(see control panel / system /
computer name).
Figure 17
(3) Connect network cable between

digitizer and NX Workstation.
Do not yet connect the digitizer to
the hospital network.
Figure 18
(4) Switch on the digitizer.

NOTE:
After switch on a self test is
executed. It takes Status Indicator
approximately 3 minutes
until the status indicator
lamp at the front panel
changes from red to green.
For explanation of the
status indicator colors see
table on the next page.
Figure 19


Description of the status indicator lamp:
Status Indicator Digitizer Status Action

Activating the erasure Enter cassettes into the input buffer
Constant
cycle. for erasing.
Blue
Proceeding the erasure Remove cassettes from Output
Flashing
cycle. buffer.
Stand-by mode Enter cassettes into the input buffer
Constant
(READY) for scanning.
Green Busy with scanning and
Flashing transporting cassette Remove cassettes from output buffer.
and image plate
Check Digitizer touch panel and
workstation display for further
 Service mode
information and detailed instructions.
Constant Or:
Or:
 Fatal error
Contact an Agfa certified Service
Red Engineer.
 Warm up / Self-test Check Digitizer touch panel and
 Processing workstation display for further
Flashing information and detailed instructions.
Software down
 Error


2.2 Loading Digitizer Model Files
NOTE:
The digitizer model files need to be installed and configured to enable a
NX Workstation to communicate with the digitizer.
Digitizer with NX Workstation
Network
Figure 20: Example system
2.2.1 Loading Digitizer Model Files on the NX Workstation
NOTE:
Up to NX 2.0.8200 / 3.0.8200:
The digitizer model files are available on the GSO Library. See section 1, page 5.
As of NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300:
The digitizer model files are installed ex factory. Skip step (1) and start with step (2).
(1) Copy the digitizer model file <DX-G.xml> or <DX-M.xml> to following path
on the NX Workstation:
<C:\Agfa\Healthcare\NX\Bin\DigitiserModels>
NOTE:
For details to the following steps refer to the latest NX Workstation
service documentation. Refer to Service Manual in Mednet GSO, path:
<Computed Radiography => CR Workstation Software>
(2) Copy the application license file (ALF) to the directory as described in the
NX Workstation manual.
(3) Enable the ALF-file with the License Manager.


(4) Start NX Activation Utility.

(5) During the "Activation process"
change the “Available Dose Types”
from “LGM” to “EI”.
(6) Select "None" as "Available Twain
Digitizer" and follow the
instructions on the screen.
(7) Start the NX Configuration Tool.
Figure 21
(8) Go to "General Settings" - "Workstation Settings". For details refer to the latest
NX Workstation service documentation. Refer to Service Manual in Mednet
GSO, path: <Computed Radiography => CR Workstation Software>
(9) Check that IP address is the same than configured in section 2.1.
(10) Enter the following AE Titles:
 General Settings - ID station name: "DefaultNX"
 General Settings - Performed Station AE Title: "NX_DefaultNX"
 Fast Preview Settings - AE Title: "FAST_DefaultNX"
Figure 22


(11) Go to "Devices" in the NX

Configuration Tool.
(12) Create new Digitizer.
(13) Click the <Upload> button to
initiate upload of the digitizer
model file.
Figure 23
(14) Select <DX-G> or <DX-M> model

file and click <Open> to load the
model into the database.
Figure 24
(15) Click <OK> to confirm the

uploading of the model file.
Figure 25
(16) Select <DX-G> or

<DX-M> from the dropdown menu.
(17) Enter "DefaultDXM" and click on
<OK>.
Figure 26: Example of upload with

DX-M model file version 2.0.3.0


(18) Set IP address of the digitizer to "192.192.192.192".

(19) Configure the default router with "192.192.100.1".
(20) Configure Emergency Procedure.
(21) Test the Connection with the button <Test Connection>.
Figure 27
(22) Activate the configuration.

This will restart the NX Software.
NOTE:
If configuration was not successful, check the user interface
configuration e.g. for exposure index settings.


2.3 Testing Standalone Installation
(1) Identify an unexposed cassette.

(2) Insert the cassette in the digitizer and let it scan by the digitizer.
(3) Check, if the image reaches the NX Workstation:
 If the image reaches the NX Workstation,
the system works and the installation was successful.
 If the image did not reach the NX Workstation,
repeat the installation step by step.
3 Configuring the Digitizer and the NX Workstation for the

Hospital Network
The following table lists the main tasks for configuring digitizer and NX Workstation for
the hospital network:
# Task Section
1 Moving Digitizer to final Position in the Hospital 3.1
2 Adapting Digitizer to uneven Floor 3.2
3 Configuring NX Workstation and Digitizer for Hospital 3.3
Network


3.1 Moving Digitizer to final Position in the Hospital
(1) Switch off digitizer.

(2) Remove the mains and network
cable.
(3) Lift up the digitizer approximately
1,5 to 2 cm by turning the axle
counterclockwise.
1,5 - 2 cm
0.59 - 0.78 inch
Figure 28
(4) Move the digitizer to the final position.

IMPORTANT:
Remove all cables below the digitizer before lowering it.
(5) Lower the digitizer by turning the ratchet clockwise, until the digitizer rests on its
floor plate: The ratchet can be moved easily now.
IMPORTANT:
Do not turn the digitizer more than necessary to avoid damages of the
lift mechanism.
(6) Remove the ratchet.

(7) Store ratchet in the right cover.
(8) Close right cover.


3.2 Adapting Digitizer to uneven Floor
NOTE:
DX-G from SN* 1001 onwards and DX-M from SN10001 onwards offers the
possibility to adapt the digitizer to uneven floor. This is possible using two adjustment
plates. This adjustment is only required if the digitizer does not stay firm on the floor.
*SN = Serial Number
IMPORTANT:
Before the next steps, make sure, that:
 The digitizer is not switched on.
 The right cover is closed.
 The digitizer is lowered completely.
(1) Check, whether the digitizer stands

firm on the floor:
Keep the digitizer at the output
buffer and slightly shake it (See
Figure 29).
Evaluation:
 If the digitizer does not stay
firm, adjust it via adjustment
plates. Continue with step (2).
 It the digitizer stays firm, skip
the following steps and
Figure 29
continue with section 3.3.
(2) Remove front cover.

(3) Loosen the two screws from each
adjustment plate.
It is not necessary to remove the
screws.
Figure 30


(4) At this side, where the digitizer

stays firm, insert a screwdriver
between frame and adjustment
plate.
(5) Turn the screwdriver slightly to
push the adjustment plate down.
See Figure 31.
(6) Tighten the 2 screws of the
adjustment plate.
Figure 31
(7) Repeat the procedure for the other
side.
(8) Again check, whether the digitizer
stands firm on the floor.
(9) Close front cover.
IMPORTANT:
Be aware that the case is not flexible and can be raised easily.


3.3 Configuring NX Workstation and Digitizer for Hospital Network
IMPORTANT:
It is required to login to Windows with a Windows administrator account to perform the
following configurations.
(1) On the NX Workstation configure IP address, subnet mask and computer name
with the provided information of the hospital.
For detailed instructions refer to chapter 4 of the NX Workstation Service Manual.
(2) Start the NX Configuration Tool.
(3) Click on "Devices" and choose the affected digitizer.
(4) Enter hospital specific data like IP address, AE title, default router and subnet
mask.
(5) Insert USB Memory Stick into USB Port of the NX Workstation.
(6) Click on <Create CPF> and save the file on the USB Memory Stick root folder.
Figure 32


(7) Release the USB Memory Stick from the NX Workstation.

(8) Open front cover of the digitizer.
(9) Insert the USB Memory Stick (scope of delivery) in the digitizer.
For more information refer to chapter 3.2.
NOTE:
The USB port of the digitizer does not accept all types of USB sticks.
USB Port
Figure 33
(10) Close front cover.

(11) Switch on digitizer and wait until the status indicator lamp is green.
(12) Start the service menu in the local display of the digitizer.
For more information concerning the service software and how to access the
service menu refer to DX-G / DX-M Service Documentation Chapter 3.7,
"Software menus and settings".
(13) Select <Configuration - Digitizer Settings>.
Settings of the digitizer will be shown.
Service Menu Service Menu > Configuration > Digitizer Settings
Device Info Site Specific Data Date: DD.MM.YYYY 01.01.2010
Reporting Digitizer Settings Time: hh.mm 12.00
Modification Exchanged Components User Interface Language: EN
Analysis & Repair Switch on&off HV on PMM Installation site located higher than 2000 m / 6562 ft. No
Preventive Maintenance Device Specific Data Number of Logfiles 10
Configuration Protection Mechanism Mammography Image Plate Types NIP
Backup / Restore Network Settings see next page. NEXT
Figure 34 Figure 35: Example Screenshot


(14) Click on <Next> to go to the next screen.

(15) Select <Load Data from USB Stick> to load digitizer settings from storage
medium. The uploading process may take a minute and no progress bar will be
shown.
Service Menu > Configuration > Digitizer Settings
Configure Network Data:
Select „Load Data from USB Stick to load ADC.CPF from USB Stick “
OR
Click on next button to configure digitizer and destination setting
manually.
Load Data from USB Stick
Figure 36
(16) Choose digitizer destination from menu and click on <OK>.

NOTE:
The option "View Network Settings" will show the active ("old") network
settings. The new configured IP will be active after restart of the device.
Select Digitizer DEFAULTDXM 192.168.4.178
View Network Settings
Figure 37: Example Screenshot
(17) Wait until the service menu is shown in the local display.
This may take some moments and it is possible that the digitizer does not show
any reaction.
(18) When finished, remove the USB Memory Stick from the digitizer.
(19) Mount front cover.



(21) Connect the NX Workstation to the hospital network.
(22) Connect the digitizer to the hospital network.
(23) Switch on digitizer.
(24) Test the Connection with the button <Test Connection> on the NX
Workstation in the NX Configuration Tool.
(25) Activate the configuration. This also starts the NX Workstation.


4 Completion of Installation
IMPORTANT:
For mobile installations refer to the appendix (6.1.3 - Completing the Installation for
Mobile Installations) for additional steps.
The purpose of this section is to show the tasks that are required to prepare the
digitizer for hand-over to the clinical application specialist.
# Task Section
1 Checking technical image quality of the digitizer 4.1
2 Saving hand-over test file 4.2
3 Performing Backup 4.3
4 Handing-over the system to the Clinical Application 4.4
Specialist
4.1 Checking the Technical Image Quality of the System
4.1.1 Cleaning and Checking of the Image Plate
(1) Open the detector with the dedicated key

or a pen.
Figure 38
(2) Fix the shutter 1 with both thumbs and let

the image plate slide out carefully onto a 1
table 2 . 2
Figure 39


(3) Put the image plate onto the detector.

The image plate has little hooks (see
Figure 40) to fix the Image Plate.
Put the Image Plate on the detector so
that the hooks are hanging over the
border of the detector. With this procedure
a bending of the Image Plate is avoided.
Figure 40
(4) Check the image plate for scratches and pollution:

If scratches are visible, take another detector.
Inform the customer about the detection of scratches.
(5) Clean the image plate according to image plate type:

o For GenRad NIP, GenRad PIP and Mammo NIP clean the image plate
(white phosphor side) by wiping gently with CR Screen Cleaner (order
number* 10+9 9999 1197 0 or ABC-Code: EQP6D) over the whole surface
using a lintfree cloth.
o For Mammo PIP use the prosat wipes (order number* 10+9 9999 1219 0).
* The last digit in the order number indicates the spare part revision at release of this
document. When ordering, the actual revision of the spare part is delivered.
1
White phosphor side
2
Black tube side
of the cassette
Figure 41
IMPORTANT:
Do not put the CR Screen
Cleaner directly on the image
plate.
Always put the CR Screen
Cleaner on the lintfree cloth.
Figure 42


(6) Wait approximately 5 minutes until the surface is dry.

(7) Verify that the white phosphor side is oriented to the black tube side of the
detector.
(8) Put the image plate back into the detector so that the shutter does not scratch
over the image plate.
(9) Insert the key (or pen) into the detector.
(10) Close the shutter.
(11) Remove the key.
4.1.2 Erasing the Cassette
(1) Press the Erase button on the touch panel

at the front side of the digitizer.
The digitizer switches to erase mode.
The status indicator lamp on the left side
of the device is continuously lighting up
in blue.
Erase Button
Erase
Figure 43: Digitizer touch panel
(2) Put the detector in the detector buffer of

Tube side of
the digitizer. the cassette
(3) As a result, the digitizer starts erasing
the image plate and the status indicator Shutter opening and
is blinking blue. locking mechanism
(4) After erasing, the detector is moved to

the detector output buffer.
(5) The digitizer is remaining in “Erase mode”
for 10 seconds staying constantly blue.
This allows processing more detectors
Figure 44
in a row.
(6) The digitizer automatically switches to
constant green if no additional detector is
entered meanwhile.
(7) Remove the detector with the erased image plate from the
detector output buffer.


4.1.3 Exposing the Cassette
(1) Mount the filter at the modality:

 For GenRad and Mixed Use mount the Cu Filter at the GenRad modality.
 For Mammography Use mount the Al Filter at the Mammography modality.
IMPORTANT:
Use the Cu Filter only at the GenRad modality and use the Al Filter
only at the Mammography modality. Never use it vice versa!
(2) Expose the prepared detector(s) according to table on the next page.
NOTE:
There is an over- and underexposure tolerance.
The digitizer automatically checks for under- or overexposure and
prompts an error respectively:
 If no error was shown, the exposure is in a valid dose range.
 If an error was shown, refer to the appendix of this document.
IMPORTANT:
For exposure place the long side of the detector parallel to the
anode axis.
Anode
axis
OK Not OK
Figure 45
Exposed area
NOTE:
The entire image plate
must be fully exposed! Image Plate Image Plate
The collimated field must

be larger than the image
plate!
OK Not OK
Figure 46


X-Ray Source Exposure conditions per detector

GenRad It is recommended to expose the detector two times with 10 µGy
X-Ray Source to achieve a good evenness.
(1) Expose the detector with following typically values:
 12 mAs
 75 kVp
 1,3 m distance
 Large focus
 1,5 mm copper filter (Cu)
(2) Turn the detector 180° and expose it again.
Mammography Only 1 exposure necessary. The detector should not be rotated.

X-Ray Source
(1) Remove the compression paddle before the exposure.
(2) Tape the Al Filter at the tube exit.
NOTE:
The adhesive tape must not be in the X Ray beam.
(3) Expose the detector with the typically values:

 200 mAs
 28 kV
 Molybdenium source / Molybdenium filter (Mo/Mo)
 Large focus
 2,0 mm aluminium filter
NOTE:
 If the image is overexposed select next possible
lower mAs setting on the Mammography
modality.
 If the dose has to be decreased due to
overexposure, the settings must not fall below
50 mAs and 0,5 seconds.
 The setting will lead to a detector dose of
approximately 350 µGy or 40 mR.


4.1.4 Scanning the Flatfield Image(s)
(1) Expose a flatfield:

 For GenRad and Mixed Use:
Expose a flatfield with the largest available PIP or NIP detector (if
available): Use the same exposure parameters like for the exposure of the
shading calibration detector. See section 4.1.3.
 For Mammography Use:
Expose a flatfield with 24 x 30 cm and 18 x 24 cm detectors.
Use the same exposure parameters like for the exposure of the shading
calibration detector. See section 4.1.3.
(2) At the NX workstation select examination type “System diagnosis – Flatfield”.
(3) Identify the detector.
(4) Insert exposed detector in the digitizer.
(5) Wait till the digitizer has finished scan process.
(6) Print the image(s) or send it to the archive (depending on what is available).
For hardcopy the window level should be approximately 1.2.


4.1.5 Checking the Images at the Lightbox or Viewing Station
NOTE:
Checking the images and comparing to the limit patterns may only happen on
lightboxes and viewing stations that comply with the specified installation and
configuration conditions for diagnostic reading. For details please refer to the
respective instructions of the viewing stations / light boxes.
IMPORTANT:
The settings of window and level may not be changed after import of the
limit pattern set.
NOTE:
The slow scan direction is always parallel to the short side of the image plate (except
35 x 35 cm detectors). Due to the hanging protocol the appearance of the saved
flatfield might differ from the physical orientation of the detector as it has entered the
digitizer.
43 cm 30 cm 30 cm 24 cm
15 cm 18 cm
24 cm
Slow scan 35 cm
direction
5170enc01.cdr
Figure 47: Image Plate sizes and Slow scan directions
ACTION:
Check the image quality of the flatfield for the following aberrations:
 Stripes in fast scan or slow scan direction
 Large area inhomogeneities
 Unacceptable number of white dots
Evaluation:
(1) If the scanned flatfield does not show one of the aberrations,
no further action is required.
If the scanned flatfield shows one of the aberrations,
continue with step (2).


(2) Compare the image with the limit pattern set. For detailed instructions see
enclosure document which is part of the limit pattern set.
The limit pattern set is in scope of the delivery of the digitizer or is available in
Mednet GSO Library. It is also available as spare part:
o Limit Pattern Set for verification of shading calibration GenRad:
Spare part number* CM+9 5170 0860 0
o Limit Pattern Set, for verification of Mixed Use and Mammo Only use:
Additional evaluation step for Mammography Only use:
Perform the acceptance test protocol (ATP) of the CR Mammography Solution.

Refer to Chapter 3.6 of the CR Mammography Solution Manual.
IMPORTANT:
The ATP has to be done by an Agfa trained CR Mammography Solution
specialist.
NOTE:
See table below for an overview of use cases of modalities, consumables and
verification methods.
General Radiology Mammography

Detectors
GenRad GenRad Mammo Mammo

PIP NIP PIP NIP
35 x 43 35 x 43 24 x 30 18 x 24 24 x 30 18 x 24
General Radiology Cu Cu
X-Ray Modality
- - - -
(GenRad only) 1 1
Mixed use Cu Cu Cu* Cu* Cu* Cu*
(GenRad and Mammo) 1 1 2 2 2 2
Mammography Al Al Al Al
- -
(Mammo only) 2 2 2 2
* = The GenRad shading calibration also covers the calibrations for Mammo PIP and Mammo NIP.
Cu = Use Cu-Filter and GenRad consumables.
Al = Use Al-Filter and Mammography Consumables.
1 = Verification with GenRad Limit Pattern Set for Banding and Calibration
2 = Verification with Mammography Limit Pattern Set for Banding and Calibration
- = Not applicable


4.2 Checking the Hand-Over Test (HOT) File
NOTE:
The HOT (Hand-over-test) file is a log file, which is created new (i.e. is overwritten) with
every scan cycle. It shows the most important steps of the last scan cycle.
Checking the HOT file documents the successful completion of the technical
installation of the digitizer as well as the successful connection to the NX Workstation.
(1) Select <Reporting - HOT Report> in the service menu of the digitizer.
The HOT Report will be displayed.
(2) Check the HOT Report.
If the HOT Report must be saved, refer to DX-G / DX-M Service
Documentation, Chapter 3.7 "Software Settings and Menus".
4.3 Performing a Backup
After this replacement a backup procedure will be executed automatically by the

digitizer. The digitizer will save the backup data internally on the solid state disk.
It is recommended to export this backup data manually to an external storage medium.
For more information refer to:
DX-G / DX-M Service Manual, Chapter 3.7: Software Menu and Settings


4.4 Hand-over of the System to the Clinical Application Specialist
(1) Inform the clinical application specialist about completion of technical

installation.
(2) Inform the clinical application specialist about any irregularities during the
installation.
(3) Inform the clinical application specialist about the required activities as
described in following table:
# Activity Reference
Section
1 Setup connectivity to additional system components 4.4.1
(RIS, PACS, Hardcopy, etc.).
2 Customize system components according to customer 4.4.2
preferences.
3 Train the customer. 4.4.3
4 Perform further activities depending on local regulations. 4.4.4
4.4.1 Setup of Connectivity to additional System Components
(1) Download the connectivity release documents for additional system components
from the HealthCare Library.
Refer to HealthCare Library path: General Info => Connectivity & Application
NOTE:
To get access to the HealthCare Library or to get a copy of the
required documents contact your local service manager.
(2) Setup the connectivity to the additional system components as described in the
connectivity release documents.
4.4.2 Customizing System Components according to Customer Preferences
For instructions how to customize the system components refer to the corresponding
connectivity document and service manual of the system component.


4.4.3 Customer Training
(1) Hand-over the user manuals (which are also available on the MedNet HealthCare
Library):
# User Manual Reference to

HealthCare Library
1 DX-G / DX-M User Manual Computed Radiography
=> CR Digitizers =>
2 Getting started with DX-G / DX-M DX-M => User Manual
3 Getting started with the ID Tablet Computed Radiography =>
CR Accessories =>
ADC ID Tablet
4 CR Detectors, Plates and Cassettes Computed Radiography =>
CR Plates
NOTE:
To get access to the HealthCare Library or to get a copy of the
required documents contact your local service manager.
(2) Train the customer in following activities:

 Operating the digitizer. See section 4.4.3.1.
 Operating the ID tablet. See section 4.4.3.2.
 Usage of detectors, plates and cassettes. See section 4.4.3.3.
 If applicable: DX-M Mobile installation. See section 0.
4.4.3.1 Training for Operating the Digitizer
Following items have to be part of the training for digitizer operation.
 Cleaning the exterior of the DX-G / DX-M

 Cleaning the touch panel
 Cleaning the optical unit with the integrated brush


 Replacing the air filter element

 The user interface (Status indicator / touch panel / status messages at NX
Workstation)
 Switching on/off/reset the digitizer
 Power and network connector
 Boot-up procedure
 Basic workflow
 Erasing image plates
 Turning the volume of the digitizer signals and beeps on or off
 Changing the brightness of the touch panel
 Retrieving Information about the digitizer
 Moving the digitizer
 Troubleshooting and errors during operation
See DX-G / DX-M User Manual and user manual Getting started with DX-G / DX-M
for an explanation of the single items.
For NX Workstation specific training refer to the NX Workstation user documentation.
4.4.3.2 Training for Operating the ID Tablet
Following items have to be part of the training for ID tablet operation.
 Switching on/off the ID tablet

 Identifying cassettes of different formats with the ID tablet
 Steps at the NX Workstation for identifying a cassette
See user manual Getting started with the ID Tablet for an explanation of the single
items.


4.4.3.3 Training for Usage of Detectors, Plates and Cassettes
Following items have to be part of the training for usage of detectors, plates and
cassettes:
 Difference NIP/PIP plates and cassettes

 Labels and functional elements of the cassettes
 How to detect Full Leg / Full Spine Cassettes (if available on site)
 First use and normal operation
 Storage and transport
 Operating conditions
 Cleaning
See user manual CR Detectors, Plates and Cassettes for an explanation of the single
items.
4.4.3.4 Training for Mobile Installations
IMPORTANT:
Always cover the input buffer before moving the bus or trailer, so that no dust can
pollute the digitizer.


NOTE:
Print the sketch in this page and hand it over to the customer.


4.4.4 Performing further Activities depending on local Regulations
Enclosed a list of possible activities depending on local regulations:

This list is just an example.
# Activity Reference
1 Electrical check IEC 62353:2007 Test Documentation on the
GSO Library (Extranet Link / Intranet Link)
2 Acceptance Test Example for Germany: DIN6868
Contact your local service manager concerning the activities which are required due to
local regulations.


5 Installation Checklist
# Step Reference Okay Task

code*
Installation Prerequisites
1. Check installation site prerequisites. 1.1 □ PRI**
Optional: Contact operator of mobile site to

2.
check if mobile installation is prepared.
- □ PRI**
3. Unpack digitizer. 1.2 □ INS***
4. Check shipment completeness. 1.3 □ INS
5. Optional: Mount Earthquake Kit. 1.4.1 □ INS
6. Lower the digitizer in the middle of the room. 1.4.2 □ INS
7. Remove Transportation Locks. 1.4.3 □ INS
Configuration of Standalone System
8. Configure NX Workstation with default settings. 2.1 □ INS
9. Load digitizer model files. 2.2 □ INS
10. Test standalone installation. 2.3 □ INS

* Task Code, only applicable for Agfa employees
** PRI = Pre-Installation
*** Ins = Installation task


# Step Reference Okay Task

code*
Preparation for hospital network
11. Lift up the digitizer. 3.1 □ INS
Move digitizer to final position and lower the

12.
digitizer.
3.1 □ INS
13. Adapt digitizer to uneven floor. 3.2 □ INS
3.3 and
Configure NX Workstation and digitizer for
14.
hospital network.
NX service
documentation
□ ASC
Completion of Installation
15. Check technical image quality of the digitizer. 4.1 □ INS
16. Check HOT (hand-over test) file. 4.2 □ INS
17. Perform a backup. 4.3 □ INS
Hand-over the system to the Clinical

18.
Application Specialist.
4.4 □ INS
Further activities:
Setup connectivity to additional system
19.
components (RIS, PACS, Hardcopy, etc).
4.4.1 □ ASC
Customize system components according to

20.
customer preferences.
4.4.2 □ ASC
21. Train the customer. 4.4.3 □ ATR***
22. Optional: Train the customer for mobile use. - □ ATR***
Check for further activities depending on local

23.
regulations.
4.4.4 □ ABA****

** ASC = Configuration & Customization
*** ATR = Customer training
***** ABA = Acceptance Testing


6 Appendix
6.1 Additional installation steps for mobile use
6.1.1 Removing Transportation Locks (Mobile Installation)
CAUTION:
Remove all transportation locks as described.
REQUIRED TOOLS:
NOTE:
The removal of the transport locks is also described in an instruction attached to the
input buffer. Every transport lock is marked with a label that should be collected for the
completeness check in Figure 58.
(1) Turn screws on the left side

counterclockwise and on the right
side clockwise to open the cover.
closed opened
Figure 48


(2) Check the right cover. The handles

should be “closed” (see figure).
Figure 49
(3) Remove front cover (A) by pulling

it to the front followed by lifting it
off the 2 metal lugs.
(4) Turn 2 screws (B) and (C) of the
left cover counterclockwise.
Figure 50
(5) Unscrew the 2 handles at the left

cover (see figure).
(6) Open the left cover as far as
possible.
Figure 51


(7) Check shock watch at the bottom

of the left frame of the device.
IMPORTANT:
85MC/10G
If the shock watch is red, SHOCKWATCH
additionally perform the

following tasks:
 Register the damages
to Regional Support
Network (RSN) / For
non AGFA Employees
please contact your
Figure 52
local AGFA representative.
 Check the swivel drive
mechanics and the acrylic
light guide with its fixation
for damages or loose parts.
(8) Write date and result of shock watch check with a waterproof pen at the rack.
(9) Remove two transportation locks

on the right side.
Figure 53
(10) Remove two transportation locks

on the left side.
(11) Store the transportation locks and
screws in the accessory box.
Figure 54


(12) Remove cable tie at swivel drive

with a cutter.
Remov
e
Figure 55
(13) Open transportation lock screw for

IP carrier counterclockwise using
the ratchet (8 mm) with extension.
See IMPORTANT note below.
Figure 56
IMPORTANT:
Turn the transportation lock screw for the IP carrier until it stops.
Never turn it further with force.
(14) Remove transportation lock at

cassette buffer unit.
Figure 57


(15) Verify that the list of removed

transportation lock comprises:
 The mechanical locks
 Six labels “Remove” (red)
 One label “Unlock” (yellow)
(16) Close all covers.
Figure 58
(17) Fasten handles.

(18) Close handles.
(19) Remove instructions (A, B) from

A
the input buffer and dispose them.
(20) Remove the protection foil (C) B
from the display.
C
(21) Clean the adhesive that may stick
to the input buffer or the display
with a lint free cloth and
CR Screen Cleaner (same as used
for cleaning the image plates).
Figure 59


6.1.2 Installing the Digitizer at the mobile site
IMPORTANT:
For installation of the mobile site the digitzer must be:
 Switched off.
 No cable may be connected.
 There should be no cassettes in the buffer.
 Rear cover must be accessible.
(1) Remove 2 upper screws from the

rear cover of the digitizer.
Figure 60
(2) Mount spacer in line with the threads.

Take care, that the spacer is adjusted
as shown in the figure (the figure
shows left spacer on the left side).
(3) Fasten screw at the lower hole.
(4) Repeat step (2) and (3) for the
right spacer on the right side.
Figure 61


(5) Connect the power cable.

(6) Connect the Ethernet cable.
(7) Move digitizer on base plate.
Figure 62
WARNING:
completely.
 Mobile Transport Locks are inserted.
CAUTION:
(10) Lower the digitizer.


(11) Insert the fastening nut like shown in Figure 63. The notch of the fastening nut
should point inside the device, bottom side.
Figure 63
(12) Put washer on the fastening nut.

(13) Screw the device on the base plate with the short screw.
(14) Mount plastic cap.
Figure 64


(15) Put washer on the upper screw hole

and insert the screw (see Figure 65
for installed retaining bracket, spacer
on the right side).
Figure 65
(16) Fasten the screw.
Figure 66
(17) Repeat step (15) and (16) for the other side.
(18) Remount front cover.
(19) Put the Allen key in the retainer.
(20) Close digitizer.
Figure 67


6.1.3 Completing the Installation for Mobile Installations

(2) Wait until the operator screen is displayed (see figure below).
Figure 68
(3) Press to move the IP Carrier to IP Carrier Park Position.

Wait until message is displayed that the digitizer is ready to be switched off.
(5) Fix the IP Carrier Adapter Plate with transport lock
(no need to take off front cover, see figure below).
Figure 69
(6) Switch digitizer on.

The status indicator lamp will flash red.
Following message will be displayed: “Transport locks are attached.
Switch off the digitizer and remove transport locks”.
(7) Switch digitizer off.
(8) Unscrew the transport lock at IP Carrier Adapter Plate.
(9) Follow the instructions in section 4.1 to complete the installation.


HEALTHCARE Chapter 2
Imaging Services Functional Description

DX-M
Type 5170 / 200
DX-G
Type 5170 / 100
This document explains the functional principle including the functions of the individual
assemblies always under normal conditions (nominal functional sequence).
Furthermore it describes the structure and function of specific individual assemblies.
Edition. Release Changes compared to previous version:

Revision Date
2.1 06-2015 Updated section 6 Cassette Sets (Cassettes with Image
Plates) in a Nutshell with CR HD5.0 extr.
Document Title
Chapter 3.4 - Codes, Fuses & LEDs
Chapter 4 - References & Circuit Diagrams
Chapter 5 - Spare Parts List

06-2015 Printed in Germany Document ID: 29732105
Document_standard_e_template_v01
DD+DIS001.10E Functional Description
► Manufacturer
Published by
D - 81539 München
Germany
Agfa and the Agfa rhombus are trademarks of Agfa-Gevaert N.V., Belgium, or its
affiliates.
All other trademarks mentioned in this document are held by Agfa HealthCare N.V. or
the respective owners and are used in an editorial fashion with no intention of
infringement.
Nothing contained in this legal notice nor in any text in this document shall be
construed as granting by implication, estoppel or otherwise, any license or right to use
any of the trademarks, service marks, trade names or logos appearing in this document
without the express prior written consent of their respective owner.
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
the product.
IMPORTANT:
The installation and service of the product(s) described herein is to be performed
by qualified personnel who are employed by Agfa HealthCare N.V or one of its affiliates
or who are otherwise authorized by Agfa HealthCare N.V. or one of its affiliates to
provide such services.


06-2015 Type 5170/100/200 Agfa Company Confidential
LIST OF CONTENTS
1 THE DIGITIZER AS A PART OF THE CR SYSTEM................................................................4

2 INTRODUCTION IN DX-G / DX-M COMPONENTS AND WORKFLOWS ...............................5
2.1 Components of the DX-G / DX-M .............................................................................................5
2.2 Workflow of the DX-G / DX-M System......................................................................................6
2.3 Short Explanation of one Scan Cycle in the Digitizer ...............................................................7
2.4 Detailed Explanation of one Scan Cycle in the Digitizer...........................................................8
3 HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE.............................................................................................14

3.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................14
3.2 Service Software.....................................................................................................................15
4 SCANNING MODULES ..........................................................................................................16

4.1 Description of most important components for scanning........................................................17
4.1.1 Optic module ...........................................................................................................................17
4.1.2 Calibration board.....................................................................................................................17
4.2 Functions of calibration board and optic module ....................................................................17
4.3 Signal corrections before and during scan .............................................................................18
4.3.1 Introduction .............................................................................................................................18
4.3.2 Calibration of the PMT - Light Collector System at Production ..............................................19
4.3.3 Signal Corrections before Scan ..............................................................................................20
4.3.4 Signal Corrections during Scan ..............................................................................................20
5 STALL DETECTION ...............................................................................................................21

6 CASSETTE SETS (CASSETTES WITH IMAGE PLATES) IN A NUTSHELL ........................23
6.1 Introduction .............................................................................................................................23
6.2 Cassette/IP Types...................................................................................................................24
6.3 Applications.............................................................................................................................26
6.4 Image Plate Principle ..............................................................................................................26
6.5 Handling Image Plates............................................................................................................27


1 The Digitizer as a Part of the CR System
The DX-G / DX-M Digitizer is part of a CR system, comprising:

 Digitizer: A Digitizer for scanning image plates retaining latent X-ray images. The
Digitizer accepts a maximum of 5 cassettes at a time, to be scanned sequentially.
 Cassettes with image plates (also named "Detector"):
o CR HD5.0 (NIP)
o CR HD5.0 Extremities (NIP)
o CR MD4.0R (PIP)
o CR HM5.0 (Mammo-NIP only for use in DX-M)
o CR MM3.0R (Mammo-PIP only for use in DX-M)
 The NX Workstation: One or more CR workstations with ID Tablet for cassette

received from the Digitizer.
 ID Tablet (from SN 15539 on): Exposed cassette has to be identified in ID-tablet
prior to entering into the Digitizer. This means that patient data will be linked to
the image data.
NOTE:
NIP = Type "Needle Image Plate"
PIP = Type "Powder Image Plate"
NX workstation Digitizer
Cassettes with
Image Plates
ID Tablet Hospital Network
Figure 1: Overview of CR System


06-2015 Type 5170/100/200 Agfa Company
any Confidential
2 Introduction in DX-G / DX-M Components and Workflows
2.1 Components of the DX-G / DX-M
The Digitizer consists of different components. In the following figure these

components are shown in a profile view of the Digitizer.
Buffer Unit
Traverse with snaphooks

(IP Feeder)
PMT
Connector
Vacuum Valve
Light collector
IP Carrier Adapter Plate
Laser Beam
Spindle
Optic Module Swivel Unit
Gear Box
Slow Scan Drive

Vacuum Pump
Figure 2


2.2 Workflow of the DX-G / DX-M System
The following graphic and steps describe a standard workflow in a CR System.
Figure 3
Step :
Take the exposure.
Step :
Go to the processing station. Enter the patient data and select the examination type or
select the patient from the work list.
Step :
Insert the cassette in the ID tablet and select the "ID" button (ID stands for "identify").
Step :
Insert the cassette in the input buffer of the Digitizer: Scanning starts.
The Digitizer sends the image data during scanning (i.e. during the IP* cycle) to the
NX workstation. The Digitizer also erases the IP*. After scanning it can be used for the
next exposure.
* IP = Image Plate


2.3 Short Explanation of one Scan Cycle in the Digitizer
The following steps are an overview of the standard scan cycle in the Digitizer. For
details of the scan cycle refer to the next section.
(1) The user inserts the cassette with exposed image plate (IP) into the Digitizer.
(2) The RF-Tag reader reads the image plate data.
(3) The cassette unit opens the cassette and the traverse with snap hooks puts the
image plate on the IP Carrier adapter plate.
(4) The Vacuum Pump fixes the image plate on the IP Carrier adapter plate.
(5) The slow scan unit transports the image plate via the IP Carrier adapter plate to
the optic module.
(6) The laser beam which is generated in the optic module scans the image plate,
while the slow scan unit drives the image plate.
(7) The blue emitted light is collected by the light collector.
(8) The Photo Multiplier Tube (PMT) with Light Collector converts light to current,
which is converted to digital data by the PMI board.
(9) The digital image data are sent via network cable to the NX Workstation.
(10) The image plate is driven back by the IP feeder (Traverse with Snaphooks) to the
erasure unit: Several LED arrays erase the image plate.
(11) The traverse with snap hooks puts the image plate back into the cassette.
(12) The slow scan drive transports the IP Carrier adapter plate to home position.
(13) The cassette unit closes the cassette.
(14) The cassette with image plate is transported from the input buffer to the output
buffer.
(15) The green blinking LED at the front panel changes to constant green, indicating
that the scan cycle is finished.
(16) The user removes the cassette with image plate for the next exposure.
NOTE:
For a detailed description of the functionality of the Digitizer refer to next section.


2.4 Detailed Explanation of one Scan Cycle in the Digitizer
NOTE:
“Cassette set” is used as a term for cassette and image plate (IP) as a unit.
The table on the following pages gives an overview of the IP scan cycle of the Digitizer
and which sensors and actors are involved.
Explanation of the different columns:

 Action of the device:
What is the Digitizer doing?
E.g. pushing, scanning etc.
 Sensor:
Which sensor triggers the action?
E.g. switches, light barriers etc.
 Actor:
Which actor is implemented in the action?
E.g. motors etc.
 Control for Actor:
How it is ensured that the actor worked correctly?
E.g. with light barriers, stall detection etc.
 Result:
In which state is the device after the actor finished?
E.g. cassette information read out, ready for scanning etc.
REQUIRED TOOLS:
1 identified cassette
For more information concerning the sensors and actors refer to:
DX-G / DX-M Service Manual, Chapter 3.4 - Codes, Fuses & LEDs
DX-G / DX-M Service Manual, Chapter 4 - References & Circuit Diagrams
DX-G / DX-M Service Manual, Chapter 5 - Spare Parts List


(1) Switch the Digitizer on.
Action of the Device Sensor Actor Control Result Step

for Actor
The Digitizer starts the boot S203: - Device is ready. 1
sequence. main switch
- Idle status
indicator is green
constant.
- Local display
shows main
menu.
(2) Insert an identified and exposed cassette set into the input buffer.

for Actor
The Digitizer detects the - B214: Cassette - Cassette 2
presence of the entered Input Buffer presence is
cassette with help of the long Receiver recognized.
distance light barrier in the Sensor
input buffer. - Status indicator
- B215: Cassette starts to flash
Input Buffer green (until the
Transmitter end of the
cassette cycle).
The Digitizer pushes the M202: Stepper - B206: Cassette Cassette is pushed 3
entered cassette to the very motor Cassette Transport towards left-hand
left-hand side of the input Transport Home Position side.
buffer. Sensor
- S209:
Cassette Edge
Sensor
The Digitizer fixes the cassette M204: Stepper Stall detection - The cassette is 4
to the left-hand side of the motor (SM) fixed.
input buffer. Cassette
Fixation - The detected
cassette format is
known.
The Digitizer reads out the RF- B211: - RF-TAG contents 5
Tag in the cassette. TAG Reader are read out.
- Expected
cassette format is
known.
The Digitizer activates the S209: The trigger to start 6
cassette edge sensor based Cassette Edge the cassette
on the fixed cassette. Sensor opening is set.
The Digitizer unlocks the M203: Stepper Stall detection Detector flap is 7
cassette flap to prepare the motor (SM) (for blocking unlocked.
cassette flap opening. Locking before end
position)



for Actor
The Digitizer opens cassette M201: Stepper - B203: Detector flap is 8
flap. motor (SM) Cover Opener opened.
Opener Home Position
Switch
- B201: Opener
Control Sensor
…drives the Traverse with M514: Stepper B204: The Snaphooks are 9
Snaphooks into the opened motor (SM) Z - Sensor prepared to engage
cassette. Linear Transport with Image Plate.
The Digitizer engages the M510: Stepper Stall detection The Snaphooks are 10
Snaphooks into the Image motor (SM) engaged with
Plate. Snaphooks Image Plate.
The Digitizer checks whether - B216: The Snaphook 11
engagement of Snaphooks Snaphook Grip engagement is
with IP was successful. Right checked.
Transmitter
- B217:
Snaphook Grip
Right Receiver
Sensor
- B218:
Snaphook Grip
Left
Transmitter
- B219:
Snaphook Grip
Left Receiver
Sensor
The Digitizer releases cassette M203: Stepper Stall detection The Image Plate is 12
slider of the cassette to unlock motor (SM) unlocked in the
the Image Plate in the Locking cassette.
cassette.
The Digitizer checks whether B210: Locking The cassette slider 13
the slider of the cassette has Cassette movement is
moved to position to unlock Contact Sensor checked to unlock
Image Plate. IP.
The Digitizer transports the M514: Stepper B626: Traverse The traverse with 14
traverse with snapped Image motor (SM) On IP-Carrier snapped Image
Plate to the position to be fixed Linear Transport Sensor Plate is prepared to
to the IP Carrier via vacuum. be fixed to IP
Carrier via vacuum.
The Digitizer disconnects the M626: Stepper Stall detection Chassis is 15
connector bolts from the buffer motor (SM) disconnected from
unit. Connector buffer unit.
The Digitizer builds up vacuum M617: Vacuum U17 vacuum The vacuum exists 16
with the Vacuum Pump. Pump sensor Vacuum and is sufficient to
Pump on B510 suck the Image
IP handling Plate.
board
The Digitizer uncouples the M610: Stepper Stall detection The Traverse is 17
traverse from the wagon. motor (SM) uncoupled from
Carrier Drive wagon and coupled
to the Vacuum
Pump.



for Actor
The Digitizer moves the linear M514: Stepper B512: Linear The linear transport 18
transport to home position and motor (SM) Transport Home is in home position.
moves wagon to lower end Linear Transport Position Sensor
position.
The Digitizer switches vacuum M624: Stepper Stall detection The valve is set 19
valve depending on format of motor (SM) according to Image
Image Plate. Vacuum Valve Plate format.
The Digitizer relieves the M510: Stepper Image Plate is 20
Snaphooks. motor (SM) relieved and
Snaphooks prepared for
suction process.
The Digitizer sucks IP to M617: Vacuum U16 vacuum Image Plate is 21
Vacuum Plates via IP Carrier. Pump sensor, Vacuum sucked to Vacuum
Plate on B510 IP Plate.
handling board
The Digitizer moves Vacuum M515: Stepper Predefined value The Vacuum Plate 22
Plate with fixed Image Plate motor (SM) Slow in E-Label with calibration
down to position where the Scan board is positioned
laser beam hits the calibration to check laser
board. beam and cal
board sensors
(only during
startup).
The Digitizer switches laser Optic module Laser power The laser beam is 23
beam on. sensor within switched on.
optic module
The Digitizer reads out cal B610: The status of the 24
board sensors. Calibration cal board sensors
Board is known (only
checked during
startup).
The Digitizer moves PMT with M625: Stepper Stall detection The Photomultiplier 25
Lightcollector to approach IP motor (SM) module positioned
surface. Swivel Drive to start scanning.
The Digitizer moves IP - Optic module The Scan process 26
Vacuum Plate with fixed Image is performed.
Plate across the deflected - M515: Stepper
laser beam from the optic motor (SM)
module. Slow Scan
The Digitizer moves Vacuum M515: Stepper Motor moves a The Scan process I 27
Plate with fixed Image Plate motor (SM) Slow defined number finished.
down to position where scan is Scan of steps.
finished.
The Digitizer detaches PMT M625: Stepper Stall detection The PMT with 28
with Lightcollector from motor (SM) Lightcollector is
scanned IP surface. Swivel Drive detached.
The Digitizer switches Vacuum M617: Vacuum IP Handling The vacuum is 29
Pump off. Pump Board gone and the
Image Plate is not
fixed to Vacuum
Plate any longer.



for Actor
The Digitizer moves the wagon M514: Stepper - B625: The wagons of the 30
to couple position. motor (SM) Traverse linear transport are
Linear Transport Locked On coupled with
Carriage traverse with
Sensor Snaphooks.
- Stall detection
The Digitizer moves IP Carrier M610: Stepper - B612: The IP Carrier 31

away from the traverse into motor (SM) Carrier Drive moved to home
home position. Carrier Drive Home Position position.
Coarse Sensor
- B615: Carrier
Drive Home
Position Fine
Sensor
The Digitizer connects the M626: Stepper Stall detection The chassis is 32
connector bolts to the buffer motor (SM) connected to the
unit. Connector buffer unit.
The Digitizer moves traverse M514: Stepper - IP Handling The Image Plate is 33
with Image Plate caught by motor (SM) Board at position to start
Snaphooks to begin of erasure Linear Transport erasure.
at erasure unit (BOE). - Motor moves a
defined
number of
steps.
The Digitizer moves the M515: Stepper B519: The slowscan is in 34
slowscan to home position. motor (SM) Slow Slow Scan home position.
Scan Reference
Sensor
The Digitizer switches the Erasure unit Board in erasure The erasure unit is 35
erasure unit on. switched on.
The Digitizer moves traverse M514: Stepper Motor moves a The Image Plate is 36
with IP caught by Snaphooks motor (SM) defined number erased.
to end of erasure (EOE). Linear Transport of steps.
The Digitizer moves traverse M514: Stepper B204: The Image Plate is 37
with IP caught by Snaphooks motor (SM) Z - Sensor positioned in the
back into the cassette. Linear Transport cassette, held by
the Snaphooks.
The Digitizer pushes slider to M203: Stepper Stall detection The Image Plate is 38
lock the Image Plate in the motor (SM) (for blocking locked by the slider
cassette. Locking before end in cassette.
position)
The Digitizer disengages M510: Stepper M510: Stepper The Snaphooks are 39
Snaphooks from Image Plate. motor (SM) motor (SM) disengaged from
Snaphooks Snaphooks the Image Plate.
The Digitizer moves the linear M514: Stepper B512: Linear The linear transport 40
transport downwards. motor (SM) Transport Home is in waiting
Linear Transport Position Sensor position.



for Actor
The Digitizer closes the M201: Stepper - B203: Cover The cassette flap is 41
cassette flap. motor (SM) Opener Home closed.
Opener Position Switch
- B201: Opener
Control Sensor
The Digitizer locks the M203: Stepper Stall detection The cassette flap is 42
cassette flap. motor (SM) locked.
Locking
The Digitizer checks whether B210: Locking The cassette slider 43
the slider of the cassette has Cassette movement is
moved to position to lock Contact Sensor checked to lock the
cassette flap. cassette flap.
The Digitizer sets the flag in B211: RF-Tag flag is set 44
the RF-Tag of the cassette to TAG Reader to “erased”.
“erased”.
The Digitizer unfixes the M204: Stepper Stall detection The cassette is 45
cassette. motor (SM) unfixed.
Cassette
Fixation
The Digitizer pushes the M205: Stepper - B208: Cassette Room for arriving 46
cassettes in output buffer to motor (SM) Pusher Home cassette in output
give clearance to new cassette Pusher Position buffer is created.
to come. Sensor
- Stall detection
- B212: Cassette
Output Buffer
Transmitter
- B213 Cassette
Output Buffer
Receiver
Sensor
The Digitizer pushes M202: Stepper - B206: Cassette - The cassette is 47
unclamped cassette to the motor (SM) Transport pushed towards
output buffer and recognizes Cassette Home Position the output buffer.
cassette in the output buffer. Transport Sensor
- The cassette is
- Stall detection positioned in the
output buffer.
- The pusher is in
home position.
- The status
indicator turns to
constant green.
- Main menu is
shown on the
local display.
(3) Remove the erased cassette from output buffer of the Digitizer.


3 Hardware and Software
3.1 Overview
The Digitizer is controlled by the device software, which can be accessed via local
display on the Digitizer or web client. The following figure shows an overview of main
hardware structure of the Digitizer.
Erasure User User

LED Solid
Board Interface Interface
Status State
Indicator Disk
IP Handling
Board
NX Application
PMI52 Board Ethernet Software
(Photo Multiplier
Interface) Interface
Cassette DICOM
Handling Board
USB
PMI52
Power
Chip Optics Calibration
PMT Distribution
Reader Board Board Board
Figure 4


3.2 Service Software
The Service Software is installed on the Digitizer itself. It can be accessed via Service
Mode button of on the local display on the Digitizer. Alternatively it can be accessed via
web interface from a connected PC.
DX-G / DX-M Service Documentation Chapter 3.7 - Software Menus and Settings
Service Menu
Device Info
Reporting
Modification
Analysis & Repair
Preventive Maintenance
Configuration
Backup / Restore
Figure 5
NOTE:
The latest version of the Digitizer software is available for download under GSO Library
Path: <GSO Library – Computed Radiography – CR Digitizers – DX-M>


4 Scanning Modules
The next figure shows the modules that are relevant for scanning an image.
Laser Diode
BOL* Sensor
6 Facet Polygon
on Optic module
EOL** Sensor
on Optic module
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Geometric Correction 10
Sensors (1 to 18) 11
12
13
14
15
16
17 Calibration Board
18
* BOL = Beginning of Line

** EOL = End of Line
Figure 6


4.1 Description of most important components for scanning
4.1.1 Optic module
The components of the optic module are:
 Laser Diode
Power max = 80 mW (45 mW on IP)
 Polygon
o 6 facets
o Ball bearings
o Run-up period approximately 5 seconds
o Follow-up period approximately 10 minutes
 BOL (Beginning of Line) and EOL (End of Line) Sensor
4.1.2 Calibration board
The Calibration Board is equipped with 18 pin diodes.
4.2 Functions of calibration board and optic module
Calibration Board
The Calibration Board calibrates the optical path with respect to geometric distortions.
Therefore the Digitizer measures at each boot-up the timings of the laser beam
between pin diode 1 and 2, 2 and 3 and so on.
As a result a kind of "calibration curve" is created for each facets of the polygon. Using
this curves possible geometric distortions are corrected by adapting the pixel
acquisition time.


Optic Module / PMI52 Board (Jitter Correction)

The Jitter Correction is used for correcting line-by-line variations of geometric scan
width, which may be caused by variations of rotational frequency of polygon and/or
external vibrations.
Therefore the timings between BOL (Beginning of Line) and EOL (End of Line) signal
during each scan line is used for compress or expand the recorded line to desired line
width.
4.3 Signal corrections before and during scan
4.3.1 Introduction
The light collector has a blue LED built in, to compensate PMT sensitivity irregularities
due to the previously collected light.
This blue LED creates reference signals (REF LUM) before and during scan, to correct
the sensitivity of the PMT "on the fly" (High Tension correction).
PMT EEPROM
PMT
Light Collector
Blue LED
Figure 7


06-2015 Type 5170/100/200 Agfa Company
any Confidential
4.3.2 Calibration of the PMT - Light Collector System at Production
The following 4 steps are carried out at production:
STEP 1: Adjusting blue LED

The blue LED is adjusted at initialization of the system this way, that a defined
output signal (LPV = Linear Pixel Value) is reached. The voltage at the blue
LED to reach the value is stored in the PMT EEPROM as REF LUM value.
Parameters of REF LUM: Variations of LEDs and LED mounting position
NOTE:
There is always a set of parameters of REF LUM and REF CAL
for the following working points:
 PIP/NIP
 HR/SR
 Genrad / Mammography
STEP 2: Determination of translucence of the system

An IP with 20 µG is scanned by the system. The exact dose is measured by
during production and entered in the system. The analogue output signal at
the PMT is measured by the system, put into a relation to the entered dose
and stored in the PMT EEPROM as REF CAL value.
Parameters of REF CAL: Overall translucence of light collector inclusive PMT
sensitivity
STEP 3: Shading calibration for NIP and PIP

An IP with 20 µG is scanned. A reference value for each pixel of each line and
each polygon facet is stored in the PMT Flash ROM.
Parameters: Translucence of Lightcollector - PMT system per pixel on the
scan line


STEP 4: Erasure dose calibration

The automatic erasure dose detection is done via a comparison of the high
dose data of the scanned image with a calibration line recorded during
production of the Digitizer.
An image is exposed with 20 % below nominal erasure dose (e.g. with
80 mR for the 100 mR threshold). This image plate is scanned in the Digitizer
and the high-dose values are recorded. The resulting line is corrected by the
shading line of the Digitizer, sampled down and stored on the PMT memory.
For the scan, the appropriate threshold lines (for NIP or PIP) are read from
the PMT memory, overlaid by the shading line and used for the automatic
erasure dose detection.
4.3.3 Signal Corrections before Scan
AUTOZERO correction
With laser and blue LED switched off, the system measures the output of the PMT.
This value is the AUTOZERO value.
Parameters: Noise of the PMT electronics and remaining light
An error message will be displayed if the AUTOZERO value exceeds a certain limit
(e.g. covers are open).
4.3.4 Signal Corrections during Scan
AUTOCAL Correction
During laser blank time, till the next facet scans a line, the blue LED is switched on to
measure the sensitivity of the PMT. By combining the measured values of several lines
the sensitivity is automatically adjusted (high voltage at PMT).
Shading Correction for NIP and PIP

The digital value of each pixel is corrected with a correction factor determined during
shading calibration.


2D Calibration for NIP only

The 2D calibration corrects for inhomogeneities of a given image plate.
The calibration is done at production time of the image plate. The sub sampled data is
stored on the ID tag of the image plate.
After an exposure of a cassette the production client on the PC downsizes the image.
The production client checks the resized image for overexposure, underexposure and
dynamic range.
It normalizes the pixel values of the image to the maximum. The production client
stores the calibration image on disk and on the ID tag of the IP.
5 Stall Detection
With the stall detection the motor home and end position can be detected without using
additional sensors. Therefore an evaluation of the stepper motor control curve on the
motor controller chip is used.
NOTE:
The functional principle of the stall detection is simplified shown in figure 8.
In reality the motor speed can be reduced just before the stall position, or can even be
reduced in several steps before it stops.
Figure 8: Functional principle of stall detection


Functionality of a stall Detection
 When the stepper motor is accelerating the stall detection is switched off, as
torque differs too much during acceleration.
 When the motor reaches a stable speed, e.g. after 200 steps, the stall detection
is active for a number of steps, e.g. 5000 steps: The motor control curve is
evaluated by the motor controller chip.
 When the torque increases and reaches a certain "switch off torque", as the
motor reaches the end position, the motor controller detects the stall position,
drives the motor a certain number of steps (e.g. 50 steps) and stops the motor.
 During deceleration time the stall detection is switched off, as torque differs too
much during deceleration.
 Rubber pieces in the end position or other „softness“ in the mechanical system
support that the motor can be driven with relatively high speed towards the end
position.
 If the torque increases to the "switch-off" torque before the motor is supposed to
reach the stall position, the motor is also stopped. The software however "knows"
that this stop comes too early and issues an error message (e.g. "IP jam").


6 Cassette Sets (Cassettes with Image Plates) in a Nutshell
6.1 Introduction
NOTE:
“Cassette set” is used as a term for cassette and image plate (IP) as a unit.
Figure 9
 A fleece inside the cassette protects the IP against scratches and a lead foil serves
as back scatter protection.
 The cassette can be replaced without initialization.
 It has a re-writeable label for grease pen.
 Rubber corners protect cassette and image plate.
NOTE:
The cassette and image plate are drop sensitive. See section 6.5 for more information.


6.2 Cassette/IP Types
NOTE:
Refer to the CR/DR Interoperability Matrix, Document ID 31333326,
(Intranet Link / Extranet Link) for the latest list of compatible cassettes and Image
Plates.
The following table lists the available sizes and IP Types of the cassettes:
CR HD5.0 CR HD5.0 CR HD5.0 CR HM 5.0 CR MD4.0R CR MD4.0R CR

1 1
General FLFS Extremities MAMMO General FLFS MM3.0R
cassette cassette cassette (Mammo Plate and cassette MAMMO
4 4 4 4 5
(NIP ) (NIP ) (NIP ) NIP ) cassette (PIP ) (Mammo
5 5
(PIP ) PIP )
Available 35 x 43 cm 35 x 43 cm 18 x 24 cm 18 x 24 cm 35 x 43 cm 35 x 43 cm 18x24 cm
sizes available as available as
2
HR and 24 x 30 cm 24 x 30 cm 2
HR and 24x30 cm
3 3
SR SR
24 x 30 cm 35 x 35**
cm
18 x 24 cm available as
2
15 x 30 cm HR and
3
SR
24 x 30 cm
18 x 24 cm
15 x 30 cm
For use
in DX-G
For use
in DX-M
1
FLFS = Full Leg Full Spine = compatible
2
HR = High Resolution (10 pixel / mm)
3
SR = Standard Resolution (6.66 pixel / mm) = not compatible
4
NIP = Needle-structured Image Plate
5
PIP = Powder-structured Image Plate
Figure 10: NIP Figure 11: PIP


The following table lists the available sizes and resolutions of the cassettes:
Pixel Matrix Size

Cassette type Format (cm) Resolution Width x Width x Length
(pixel/mm) Length (mm)
(pixels)
CR MD4.0R 35 x 43 HR* 3480 x 4248 348,0 x 424,8
10
General plate 35 x 35 HR 3480 x 3480 348,0 x 348,0
and cassette 35 x 43 SR** 2320 x 2832 348,0 x 424,8
(GenRad PIP) 6,66
35 x 35 SR 2320 x 2320 348,0 x 348,0
24 x 30 1440 x 2928 232,8 x 292,8
18 x 24 10 1440 x 2328 172,8 x 232,8
15 x 30 1440 x 2928 144,0 x 292,8
CR MD4.0R
FLFS cassette 35 x 43 10 3480 x 4392 439,2 x 348,0
(GenRad PIP)
CR MM3.0R 18 x 24 3510 x 4644 175,5 x 232,2
MAMMO 20
(Mammo PIP) 24 x 30 4710 x 5844 235,5 x 292,2
CR HD5.0 35 x 43 HR 10 3408 x 4200 340,8 x 420,0
General 35 x 43 SR 6,66 2272 x 2800 340,8 x 420,0
cassette 24 x 30 2256 x 2880 225,6 x 288,0
(GenRad NIP)
18 x 24 10 1656 x 2280 165,6 x 228,0
15 x 30 1344 x 2880 134,4 x 288,0
CR HD5.0
FLFS cassette 35 x 43 10 3408 x 4368 340,8 x 436,8
(GenRad NIP)
CR HD5.0 AEC 18 x 24 1656x 2280 165,6 x 228,0
cassette 24 x 30 10 2256 x 2880 225,6 x 288,0
(GenRad NIP) 35 x 43 3408 x 4200 340,8 x 420,0
CR HM5.0 18 x 24 3508 x 4644 175,4 x 232,2
MAMMO 20
(Mammo NIP) 24 x 30 4708 x 5844 235,4 x 292,2
CR HD5.0 18 x 24 20 3312 x 4560 165,6 x 228,0?
Extremities
(GenRad NIP) 24 x 30 20 4512 x 5760 225,6 x 288,0
* HR = High Resolution
** SR = Standard Resolution


6.3 Applications
The table below lists the applications for which the CR detectors, plates and cassettes
are specifically designed.
= compatible
= not compatible
Type General Full Leg Full Mammo-

Radiography Spine graphy
Application Application
CR HD5.0 *
CR HD5.0 FLFS
CR HD5.0 Extremities
CR MD4.0R *
CR MD4.0 FLFS
CR MM3.0R MAMMO
CR HM5.0 MAMMO
* Using General Radiography cassettes for FLFS can lead to quality loss in the edge areas.
6.4 Image Plate Principle
After having been exposed in the x-ray modality, the image plate contains the latent
image of the patient.
The Digitizer takes the scan parameters from the RF-ID chip that was identified with
the exam type on the Control PC.


6.5 Handling Image Plates
For instructions concerning handling of the image plates refer to the document
“CR Detectors, Plates & Cassettes User Manual” with document ID 44170917,
available in the Agfa Healthcare library:
Computed Radiography > CR Plates & Cassettes info
CAUTION:
If a cassette is dropped, the image plate (IP) may be damaged and cause severe
damage in the Digitizer.
Always check the cassette (cassette with IP) thoroughly after it has been dropped.
CAUTION:
The image plate (IP) is fragile and cost intensive:
Risk of damage
When replacing or cleaning the IP great care must be taken:
 Never put an image plate down on its phosphor-coated side. This site is very
sensitive and can easily be destroyed.
 For cleaning the image plate consider the instruction and remarks in the
document “CR Detectors, Plates & Cassettes User Manual” available in the
Agfa Healthcare library with document ID 44170917
1
White phosphor
White phosphor side side
2 Black tube
Black tube side side
of the cassette
Of the cassette
Figure 12
IMPORTANT:
Do not put the CR Screen Cleaner
directly on the image plate.
Always put the CR Screen Cleaner
on the lint-free cloth.
Figure 13


Imaging Services Software / Hardware Compatibility
DX-M
Type 5170 / 200
DX-G
Type 5170 / 100
► Please note
The chapter “Software / Hardware Compatibility” has been replaced by following

documents:
• Solution Structure Data Document, Document ID* 30781759
(Intranet Link / Extranet Link)
• CR/DR Interoperability Matrix, Document ID* 31333326
* Access the document by entering the document ID in the Agfa HealthCare Library search window,
or follow the direct link.

service_bulletin_cover_e_template_v02
DD+DIS001.10E Software / Hardware Compatibility
This page is intentionally left blank to enable print out of even and odd pages on duplex printers.

The controlled version of this document resides on Agfa HealthCare Library. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.
Edition 2, Revision 2 DX-M Chapter 2 / Page 2 of 2

05-2011 Type 5170 / 200 Agfa Company Confidential
Chapter 3.1
HEALTHCARE Repair and Service
Imaging Services
Safety Guidelines / General Repair Instruction
DX-M
Type 5170 / 200
DX-G
Type 5170 / 100
This document describes the product specific safety notes of the digitizer.

Revision Date compared to previous version 2.0
2.1 09-2015  Replaced intended use statement by reference to User
Manual.
 Replaced description of labels on and inside the
digitizer by references to User Manual and Generic
Safety Directions.
 Added reference to the Lubricating Grease for the Slow
Scan Spindle.
Document Title

09-2015 Printed in Germany Document Node ID: 28902409
eq_03-1_safety-repair_e_template_v09
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Safety Guidelines / General Repair Instruction
► Manufacturer
Published by
D - 81539 München
Germany
affiliates.
infringement.
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
the product.
IMPORTANT:

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.1 / Page 2 of 14

Repair and Service
LIST OF CONTENTS
1 INTENDED USE .......................................................................................................................4

2 LABELS IN AND ON THE DEVICE ..........................................................................................4
3 SAFETY NOTES FOR SERVICE ACTIVITIES ........................................................................4
3.1 General Safety Notes for all Service Activities .........................................................................4
3.2 Safety Notes for Installation Planning.......................................................................................5
3.3 Safety Notes for Installation ......................................................................................................6
3.4 Safety Notes for preventive and corrective Maintenance Work................................................7
3.4.1 Safety Notes for Optic Module Replacement............................................................................8
3.4.2 Safety Notes for Board Replacement .......................................................................................9
3.4.3 Safety Notes for Photo Multiplier Tube (PMT) with Light Collector Replacement ....................9
3.4.4 Safety Notes for Power Supply Replacement.........................................................................10
4 ROUTINE SAFETY CHECKS TO BE CARRIED OUT AFTER EVERY REPAIR...................11

4.1 Electrical Check after Power Supply Replacements...............................................................11
4.1.1 Basic Protective Earth Test.....................................................................................................12
4.1.2 Electrical Check according to National Regulations ...............................................................14


Repair and Service
1 Intended Use
The intended use statement is listed in the User Manual of the Digitizer.
2 Labels in and on the Device
For the meaning of labels on the device refer to the corresponding Digitizer User
Manual.
For the meaning of labels in the device refer to the “Generic Safety Directions”,
Document ID 11849633, Agfa Intranet / Agfa Portal via Internet.
3 Safety Notes for Service Activities
3.1 General Safety Notes for all Service Activities
WARNING:
Risk of electrical shock.
Unplug the power cord before removing the supplementary earth connector.
When reconnecting the supplementary earth connector or replacing the power supply
check the protective earth resistance according to the national regulations.
WARNING:
Risk of electrical shock.
Switch off the digitizer and disconnect it from the mains before performing any service
interventions at the digitizer.
WARNING:
80 mW Laser (Class 3B) in the OPTIC MODULE may cause eye or skin injuries.
 Do not keep tools in the Laser beam when the device is switched on or the interlock
switch is overridden with a service key.
 Do not open the cover of the OPTIC MODULE.
 Avoid direct and indirect eye contact.


Repair and Service
WARNING:
During operation the erasure unit is hot:
Risk of burns.
Avoid contact with the Erasure Unit.
Observe the relevant sticker on the Erasure Unit.
CAUTION:
Sensitive surface. Reduced image quality possible due to clouded reflector.
Do not touch the reflector of the erasure unit by hand.
Do not use cleaning agents to clean the reflector.
Only use a lint-free cloth for cleaning.
3.2 Safety Notes for Installation Planning
WARNING:
standby generator.
CAUTION:
Reduced airflow may lead to pollution in the digitizer.
Keep a minimum of 5 cm (2 inches) between left digitizer side and the wall.
Do not store anything:

 In front of the left cover at the air outlet
 In front of the right cover (underneath the output buffer) at the air inlet
WARNING:
Hospital is responsible for:


Repair and Service
WARNING:
When different combinations of equipment are used in various medical
environments a potential difference (V) can exist between the protective earths in
different localities. If the protective earthing fails this potential difference can
cause a HAZARD for the OPERATOR or for the PATIENT.
 To comply with IEC 60601-1 (annex I) all computers and peripherals must be
 Always connect the associated monitor to the same
Uninterruptible Power Supply as the PC.
WARNING:
Image plate is sensitive for scattered X-rays. Reduced image quality possible.
The digitizer and the cassette storage shall be protected against X-ray radiation this
way, that the annual dose equivalent at the installation place will not exceed 1 mSv.
WARNING:
Excessive vibrations during scanning may decrease image quality.
Do not apply excessive shock or vibration to the digitizer during operation. This may
decrease the image quality. Neither should the device be moved during operation.
3.3 Safety Notes for Installation
WARNING:
completely.
CAUTION:


Repair and Service
CAUTION:
 Do not operate the digitizer, if not lowered completely!
 Remove all transportation locks.
3.4 Safety Notes for preventive and corrective Maintenance Work
WARNING:
Risk of hand injuries if cassette edge sensor is activated and hand or finger is
inserted in cassette entry.
 Keep fingers / hand away from cassette unit entry when
a cassette is inserted.
 Do not activate cassette edge sensor by hand.
CAUTION:
If you drop a cassette, the image plate (IP) may be damaged and cause
damages in the digitizer.
Always check the detector (cassette with IP) thoroughly after it has been dropped.
CAUTION:
Damages of the device possible during servicing or transport.
 Remove power plug before servicing.
 Transport may only be undertaken as described in the
manuals.
CAUTION:
Spindle is lubricated with special grease. To prevent loss of lubrication
properties, this grease may not be mixed with other lubrication material.
Lubricate the spindle only with the specific “Lubricating Grease for the Slow Scan
Spindle”. For order number refer to the digitizer spare parts list.


Repair and Service
3.4.1 Safety Notes for Optic Module Replacement
CAUTION:
Optic module electronics can be damaged.
Only disconnect the optic module cable when the digitizer is switched off.
CAUTION:
Risk of injury.
Be careful with the Optic Module mounting pins after removal of the Optic Module.
CAUTION:
Optics can be polluted.
 Handle the optic module very carefully.
 Store it flat on a safe and clean place.
 Put it the laser emission opening downward to avoid collecting dust.
Figure 1: Storage OK Figure 2: Storage Not OK


Repair and Service
3.4.2 Safety Notes for Board Replacement
CAUTION:
Electronics can be damaged.
 Only disconnect the boards when the digitizer is switched off.
 Use wrist strap to prevent from electrostatic discharge.
3.4.3 Safety Notes for Photo Multiplier Tube (PMT) with Light Collector Replacement
CAUTION:
The light collector can break when mechanically stressed.
Handle the PMT with light collector with great care.
CAUTION:
Light collector is fragile: Risk of damage.
When mounting the new light collector great care must be taken.
Do not touch the surface of the light collector.
IMPORTANT:
 Handle the Photo Multiplier with Light collector very carefully.
 Store it on the straight, metal side (see Figure 3).
 Store it on a safe and clean place.
 Protect PMT from bright light. Cover the light entrance to protect the PMT from
excessive light entering.
Figure 3


Repair and Service
3.4.4 Safety Notes for Power Supply Replacement
DANGER:
 If the cables at the input side at the bottom of the power supply (110/220V)
are mounted wrong, the housing of the digitizer can be connected to high
voltage. Danger to life.
 If the cables at the output side at the top of the power supply (28V DC) are
mounted wrong, all printed circuit boards supplied by the power supply will
be defective.
Mount the cables at the power supply input as indicated on the cables / power supply
and as shown below.
Figure 4: Bottom of the power supply (110/220V) Figure 5: Top of the power supply (28V DC).
There is a small label on the power supply, which
indicates how to connect (red “+”-sign) the cables.
Never connect a different-colored cable to the
connection label with the red “+”-sign.
CAUTION:
Bad Image quality possible.
Make sure, that cable of power supply does not create loop so as to avoid collision with
cables and tubes of IP-Carrier.


Repair and Service
4 Routine Safety Checks to be carried out after every Repair
Check the following points after every repair:
 Perform visual check for obstacles, protruding parts, defective housings, or sharp
edges in the machine environment.
 Check the function of the interlock switch.
 Check the condition of hoses, power cables, strain relief, and fuses.
 Test the function of the air filter.
 Check the grounding connections on metallic panels / housing parts.
 Check the condition of power cables and plugs.
 Follow the instructions for ESD (electrostatic discharge) safe return of
printed circuit boards for repairs by using the original packing material of the
replacement part.
4.1 Electrical Check after Power Supply Replacements
WARNING:
Improper ground connections inside the device or too high leakage current may
lead to electric shocks.
 After any work at the power supply or at any component connected to mains
voltage inform the operator about the necessity of the electrical check according
to national regulations.
 If specific national regulations do not exist it is recommend to perform the
electrical check according to IEC 62353.
 Make sure, that all grounding connections to metallic covers and all grounding
connections inside the device are present.
The electrical check is split up in two steps:
Step Task Reference

1 Perform the basic protective earth test. 4.1.1
2 Perform the electrical check according to National Regulations. 4.1.2


Repair and Service
4.1.1 Basic Protective Earth Test
IMPORTANT:
The basic protective earth test must be performed with and without power cord insert
into the digitizer. The power cord should not be connected to the mains!
(1) Use a multimeter that is capable to measure a resistance < 1 Ohm.
(2) Measure the resistance of the

multimeter configuration, i.e. select
smallest range of “resistance
measurement” and measure the
resistance of the probes.
Figure 6
(3) Disconnected the power cable at the wall side and at the device.
Basic (4) Put one probe at the ground connector of the
protective mains input socket as shown in Figure 7.
earth test
without (5) Put the other probe consecutively at the
power cord 4 measuring points shown in Figure 8 to
test the resistance. The electrical resistance
in this case has to be  0.1 Ohm higher than
the value measured during probe test on the
previous page.
Figure 7


Repair and Service
Figure 8: Measuring Points


Repair and Service
Basic (6) Insert the power cord at the digitizer side. Leave it disconnected at the wall side.
protective
earth test
including (7) Put one probe at the ground
power cord connector of the mains connector as
shown in Figure 9.
(8) Put the other probe at the
4 measuring points shown in
Figure 8 to test the resistance.
The electrical resistance in this case
has to be  0.3 Ohm higher than the
value measured during probe test in
step (1).
(9) Remount power supply cover.
(10) Remount rear cover of the digitizer.
Figure 9
IMPORTANT:
In case the electrical resistance of one measurement exceeds the limits
(0.1 Ohm without mains cable; 0.3 Ohm with mains cable):
Check the digitizer for loose grounding connections!
4.1.2 Electrical Check according to National Regulations
ACTION:
Perform the electrical check according to National Regulations.
It is recommend to perform the electrical check according to IEC 62353.


Chapter 3.2
Imaging Services
Tools and auxiliary Means
DX-M
Type 5170 / 200
DX-G
Type 5170 / 100
This document describes tools and auxiliary means for the DX-G (Type 5170 / 100)
and DX-M (Type 5170 / 200) digitizers as of software version NIM_2000.

2.2 07-2010 • Updated order numbers for
USB Memory Stick and Prosat Wipes
• Added Polynit Wipes
Document Title
Chapter 1 - Controls, Connections, Setup Procedure
Chapter 3.6 - Calibrations & Adjustments
DD+DIS043.08E NX Service Documentation,
Chapter 4 - Installation and Configuration

eq_03-2_tools-aux_e_template_v07
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Tools and auxiliary Means
► Manufacturer
Publisher
D - 81539 München
Germany
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
the equipment.
the product.
NOTE:

Edition 2, Revision 2 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 3.2 / 2

Repair and Service
LIST OF CONTENTS
1 BASIC SERVICE TOOLS .........................................................................................................4
2 ADDITIONAL SERVICE TOOLS ..............................................................................................5
2.1 Recommended Configuration of the Service PC ......................................................................6
3 SERVICE SOFTWARE (AS OF SOFTWARE VERSION NIM_2000) ......................................6


Repair and Service
1 Basic Service Tools
ACTION:
Make sure that the following tools are available.
Set 5,5 mm to 12 mm
Set 1,5 to 10 mm,

preferrably with ball-shaped head
Set 3 mm to 6 mm (magnetic)
Set 5,5 mm to 12 mm
Small and medium size
Small and medium size
Needle nosed pliers
Cutter
Antistatic wrist strap
200
Multimeter (Ohmmeter)
Flash light
Lint free cloth
Figure 1: Basic Service Tools


Repair and Service
2 Additional Service Tools
ACTION:
Make sure that the following tools are available.
Tool AGFA Order Number* Purpose

CR Screen Cleaner 10+9 9999 1197 0 Clean GenRad Image Plates.
(2 bottles)
Prosat wipes 10+9 9999 1219 0 Clean Mammo Needle Image
Plates.
Polynit wipes 10+9 9999 1273 0 Clean Mammo Powder Image
Plates.
Service key CM+9 0426 6309 0 Override the interlock.
Loupe 8x CM+9 9579 9904 0 Check image quality of films at the
light box.
Cu Filter CM+9 5155 1015 2 Exposure of test images:
1,5 mm Part of delivery of DX-G and DX-M
2 mm Al Filter CM+9 5148 1090 0 Exposure of test images:
Part of delivery for DX-M only
USB memory stick CM+9 5170 0760 1 Transfer data between the
(checked to be Service PC and digitizer. See also
virus-free) IMPORTANT note next page.
Vacuum cleaner CM+9 9999 0895 0 Clean the inside of the digitizer.
(220/240V, 50-60 Hz)
Dirt bags for vacuum CM+9 9999 0896 0 For usage with vacuum cleaner.
cleaner (10 x)
Vacuum cleaner Commercially available: Clean the inside of the digitizer.
(100/120V, 50-60 Hz) Acquire locally.
Service PC Commercially available: Copy the digitizer software from
Acquire locally. PC to CD ROM or USB Memory
stick.
For requirements of the Service
PC refer to 2.1.
Network cable Commercially available: Transfer data between the digitizer
Acquire locally. and the Service PC in case that
web interface is used.
* The last digit in the order number indicates the spare part revision at release of this document.
When ordering, the actual revision of the spare part is delivered.


Repair and Service
IMPORTANT:
For several service activities a USB stick is required. One USB Memory stick is
scope of delivery of the digitizer.
The USB port of the digitizer does not accept all types of USB sticks.
The USB Memory Stick delivered with the digitizer is recommended. The USB Stick
can also be ordered via order number*: CM+9 5170 0760 1
2.1 Recommended Configuration of the Service PC
ACTION:
Make sure, that the Service PC meets the basic requirements listed below.
Hardware Software
• Network connection RJ45 • Windows XP or Windows Vista
• CD ROM drive • Browser Internet Explorer ≥ 6.0
• USB port
3 Service Software (as of Software Version NIM_2000)
The service software controls the digitizer. With the service software it is possible to
perform e.g. maintenance tasks, calibrations or backups.
The service software can be accessed directly via service menu on the local display of
the digitizer. Alternatively it is possible to connect to the service software via web
interface from a Service PC.
DX-G / DX-M Service Manual, Chapter 3.7: Software Menus and Settings
ACTION:
Make sure that the latest service software is installed on the digitizer.
NOTE:
The latest version of the digitizer software is available for download in the
Mednet GSO Library, path:
<GSO Library – Computed Radiography – CR Digitizers – DX-M>


Chapter 3.3
Imaging Services
Troubleshooting
DX-M
Type 5170 / 200
DX-G
Type 5170 / 100
► Please note
For troubleshooting information refer to the separately available

Troubleshooting Guide, DD+DIS061.10E:
MEDNET GSO Library Æ Computed Radiography Æ CR Digitizers Æ DX-M Æ
Troubleshooting Guide *
* For external partners: Please ask your local Agfa representative for access.

eq_03-3_troubleshooting_e_template_v06
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Troubleshooting


Chapter 3.4
Imaging Services
Electrical and mechanical Codes, Fuses, LEDs
DX-M
Type 5170 / 200
DX-G
Type 5170 / 100
This document describes the location and meaning of the Codes, Fuses and LEDs on
the different Printed Circuit Boards (PCB) for repair activities.
It describes how to detect defective boards.
IMPORTANT:
Except F8 on IP-Handling board all fuses are not foreseen to be exchanged.
Fuses only prevent damage in case of defects within the digitizer.
Edition. Release Version

Revision Date
2.0* 04-2010 Initial version for DX-M and DX-G
with Software Version higher than NIM_2000
* Based on DX-G Service Manual Edition 1
Document Title
Not applicable

eq_03-4_codings_e_template_v07
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Electrical and mechanical Codes, Fuses, LEDs
► Manufacturer
Publisher
D - 81539 München
Germany
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
the equipment.
the product.
NOTE:


04-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW Version NIM_2000Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
LIST OF CONTENTS
1 DISPLAY CONTROL BOARD ..................................................................................................4

2 CASSETTE HANDLING BOARD .............................................................................................5
3 PMI52 BOARD (PHOTO MULTIPLIER INTERFACE)..............................................................7
4 PMI52 POWER DISTRIBUTION BOARD...............................................................................10
5 IP HANDLING BOARD ...........................................................................................................12
6 ERASURE LED CONTROL BOARD ......................................................................................14
7 STATUS INDICATOR ON THE USER INTERFACE BOARD ................................................15


Repair and Service
1 Display Control Board
NOTE:
The following Figure 1 shows the Display Control Board and the position of the
fuse F1 for quick finding.
Figure 1
IMPORTANT:
(1) Check the fuse F1.
(2) Replace the Display Control Board in case the fuse F1 is defective.
Fuse name Fuse value Load circuit

F1 1AT Backlight Driver


Repair and Service
2 Cassette Handling Board
NOTE:
The following Figure 2 shows the Cassette Handling Board and the position of the
switches, fuses and LEDs for quick finding.
Figure 2
Switch Meaning
ON = normal operation (= default)
S1 / 1
OFF = debug position. Only for R&D purpose.
S1 / 2 Not used.


Repair and Service
IMPORTANT:
(1) Check the fuses listed below.
(2) Replace the Cassette Handling Board in case one of the fuses is defective.

F1#18 2AT +39V booster for Stepper Motor Cassette Transport
F1#3 1AT Power supply layout module 5V Æ Logic Supply
F14 5AT +28V (main input voltage) from power supply
F1#13 1AT 5V supply for Radio Frequency (RF) Tag – Reader
F16 250mAT +28V supply for LED status indicator
(3) Check the conditions indicated by the LEDs.
LED Meaning
LD5 Red: ON if power for the board available.
LED blinking: Software is up and running.
LD6
LED steadily on: Software not running


Repair and Service
3 PMI52 Board (Photo Multiplier Interface)
NOTE:
The following Figure 3 shows the PMI52 Board and the position of the
switches, fuses and LEDs for quick finding.
Figure 3
Switch Meaning
S1#12 Hardware Reset
S1#2 Software Reset


Repair and Service
IMPORTANT:
(2) Replace the PMI52 Board in case one of the fuses is defective.

F1 1AT USB Interface
F1#16 1AT PMT (PhotoMultiplier) Interface
F1#17 1AT 1.2V PWR (Power)
F2#17 5AT 3.3V PWR
F3#17 2AT 24V PWR Polygon
LED Meaning
FL nCS on-board FLASH device activity
LD1#2
For R&D purpose only.*
FL nCS off-board FLASH device activity
LD2#2
For R&D purpose only.*
LD3#2 2V5 for MPC5200
LD4#2 1V5 for MPC5200
LD5#2 1V5 for MPC5200 PLL

Ethernet RECEIVE activity
LD1#4
For R&D purpose only *
LD1#5 USB PWR
1.5VD (Voltage Drop, Voltage it takes to make electricity flow through
LD4#12
a LED and thus light it up.)
LD5#12 2.5VD
LD1#16 5.0VD_PMT
Access-CF-Flash Card
LD1#3
FAIL/JAVA/ SWAP/SLED3
LD16
* If these LEDs are off, this does not necessarily mean malfunction of the board.


Repair and Service
LED Meaning
LD15 Timer 1s SLED2 Watchdog, blinking = OK
CF/I2C/ SPI/SLED1
LD14
USB/CAN/SLED0
LD13
Red LED, ON after power on.
LD12
OFF as soon as FPGA content is loaded properly
LD1#17 +12V OPT_OK
LD2#17 +12V CAL_OK
LD3#17 +20V/-10V PMT_OK
LD4#17 +8V ANALOG_OK
LD5#17 +12V CAN_PWR_OK
LD6#17 +12V HD_OK
LD7#17 24.0V_POLYGON_OK
5.0VD
LD8#17 (Voltage Drop, voltage it takes to make electricity flow through a LED
and thus light it up.)
LD9#17 3.3VD
LD10#17 1.2VD
* If these LEDs are off, this does not necessarily mean malfunction of the board.


Repair and Service
4 PMI52 Power Distribution Board
NOTE:
The following Figure 4 shows the PMI52 Power Distribution Board and the position of
the fuses for quick finding.
Figure 4
IMPORTANT:
(2) Replace the PMI52 Power Distribution Board in case one of the fuses is
defective.


Repair and Service

F1 2.5AT Optics Fuse -12V
F1#1 2.5AT Optics Fuse +12V
F15 3.5AT 1.5VDC (Volts Direct Current)
F16 3.5AT 3.3VDC
F17 1AT PMT -10V
F18 1AT PMT +20V
F19 1AT PMT +20V
F23 1AT CAN 12V
F24 1AT Analog 8V
F25 7AF 28VDC Input
F27 2AT Polygon 24V
F28 2.5AT 5VDC
F29 1AT Disc


Repair and Service
5 IP Handling Board
NOTE:
The following Figure 5 shows the IP Handling Board and the position of the switches
and fuses for quick finding.
Figure 5


Repair and Service
Switch Meaning
ON = normal operation (= default)
S1 / 1
OFF = debug position. Only for R&D purpose.
S1 / 2 Not used.
IMPORTANT:
(1) Check the fuse F8.
(2) Replace the vacuum pump and the fuse F8 in case the fuse is defective.
The fuse F8 will be delivered with the spare part vacuum pump with order
number*: CM+9 5170 4290 2
* The last digit in the spare part number indicates the spare part revision at release of
this document. When ordering, the actual revision of the spare part is delivered.

F8 7AF Supply voltage for vacuum pump

Logic power supply
F1#4 1AT
included in 5V DC/DC converter module
F1#16 5AT Step-up converter for slowscan drive SM0
F1#17 5AT Step-up converter for linear transport SM1

Supply for various actors (fan, SM2A,
F7 5AT
SM2B, SM3A, SM3B, SM4A, SM4B)
(4) Replace the IP Handling Board in case one of the fuses is defective.
LED Meaning
LD1 Red: ON if power for the board available.
Watchdog-LED
LD2 LED blinking: Software is up and running.
LED steadily on: Software not running: FAILURE
LD3 Currently no function


Repair and Service
6 Erasure LED Control Board
NOTE:
The following Figure 6 shows the LED Control Board and the position of the fuses for
quick finding.
F5 F2
F4 F3
Figure 6
IMPORTANT:
(2) Replace the complete Erasure Unit in case one or more fuses are defective.

F2 5AT LEDs 1-60 red
F3 5AT LEDs 61-120 red
F4 5AT LEDs 121-180 blue
F5 1AT Logic Supply


Repair and Service
7 Status Indicator on the User Interface Board
NOTE:
The following Figure 7 shows the Status Indicator of the User Interface Board.
Status
Indicator
Lamp
Figure 7

Constant
cycle. for erasing.
Blue
Flashing
cycle. buffer.
Constant
and image plate
• Service mode
Constant Or:
Or:
• Fatal error
Red Engineer.
• Warm up / Self-test Check Digitizer touch panel and
• Processing workstation display for further
Software down
• Error
Table 1: Description of the status indicator lamp


Chapter 3.5
Imaging Services
Replacements / Repair Procedures
DX-M
Type 5170 / 200
DX-G
Type 5170 / 100

This document describes the replacement steps of parts including the verification
method of each replacement. When applicable, references to DX-G / DX-M Service
Manual Chapter 3.6: Adjustments and Calibrations are made.
For the replacements described in this chapter it is necessary to have the relevant tools
available. There is a basic service tools set defined in DX-G / DX-M Service Manual,
Chapter 3.2: Tools and auxiliary means that contains all needed tools.
ACTION:
(1) Make sure that the tools of the basic service tools set are available.
(2) Make sure to know the safety notes in chapter 3.1 “Safety Guidelines”.
IMPORTANT:
 Replace only 1 board at a time. Always restart the device after the replacement of
a board before replacing another board.
 Never bend the belt too much, never with power and never against his regular
direction.

eq_03-5_replacements_e_template_v07
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures
Edition. Release Changes compared to Edition 2.0*

Revision Date
2.1 11-2010  Updated Section 4.6 “Stepper Motor Cassette Transport
(Cassette Transport Drive)”
 Updated Section 5.2 “Traverse Carriage Left / Right”
 Updated Section 5.4 “Snaphook Drive”
Document Title
DD+DIS001.10E DX-G / DX-M Service Manual, Chapter 3.1 - Safety Guidelines
DD+DIS001.10E DX-G / DX-M Service Manual, Chapter 3.2 - Tools and auxiliary means
DD+DIS001.10E DX-G / DX-M Service Manual, Chapter 3.6 - Adjustments and Calibrations
Enclosures For a list of orderable spare parts, which will be delivered with enclosed
replacement instructions, refer to section 1.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 2

Repair and Service
► Manufacturer
Publisher
D - 81539 München
Germany
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
the equipment.
the product.
NOTE:


Repair and Service
LIST OF CONTENTS
1 OVERVIEW TO ENCLOSED REPLACEMENT INSTRUCTIONS ............................................7

2 PANELING................................................................................................................................8
2.1 Replacing the Display Board with Touch Panel ........................................................................9
2.2 Replacing the Front Cover ........................................................................................................9
2.3 Replacing the Lower Buffer Cover ..........................................................................................11
2.4 Replacing the Right Side Cover ..............................................................................................13
2.5 Replacing the Left Side Cover ................................................................................................16
2.6 Replacing the Upper Left Cover..............................................................................................18
2.7 Replacing the Upper Right Cover ...........................................................................................20
2.8 Replacing the Buffer Right Cover ...........................................................................................22
2.9 Replacing the Upper Cover.....................................................................................................25
2.10 Replacing the Buffer Rear Cover ............................................................................................27
2.11 Replacing the Rear Cover.......................................................................................................29
2.12 Replacing the Cassette Input Cover .......................................................................................30
2.13 LED Status Indicator Board ....................................................................................................32
2.14 Fan ..........................................................................................................................................34
2.15 Air Filter ...................................................................................................................................35
3 FRAME AND VACUUM UNIT.................................................................................................37

3.1 Replacing the Power Supply ...................................................................................................37
3.2 Replacing the Vacuum Pump .................................................................................................37
3.3 Interlock Switch .......................................................................................................................38
3.4 Main Switch .............................................................................................................................40
3.5 Vacuum Valve .........................................................................................................................41
3.6 Fixed Vacuum Hose ................................................................................................................43
3.7 Vacuum Pump Sound Absorber .............................................................................................45
4 CHASSIS - CONNECTOR AND SWIVEL DRIVE ..................................................................46

4.1 Replacing the IP Handling Board ............................................................................................46
4.2 Connector Drive ......................................................................................................................46


Repair and Service
4.3 Connector Bolt ........................................................................................................................48
4.4 Locking Unit ............................................................................................................................54
4.5 Swivel Drive ............................................................................................................................56
4.6 Stepper Motor Cassette Transport (Cassette Transport Drive) ..............................................66
4.7 Lubricating Chambers .............................................................................................................68
4.8 Slow Scan Reference Sensor .................................................................................................70
5 CHASSIS - IP TRANSPORT ..................................................................................................72

5.1 Traverse with Snap Hooks ......................................................................................................72
5.2 Traverse Carriage Left / Right.................................................................................................74
5.3 IP Feeder Wire Ropes ............................................................................................................76
5.4 Snaphook Drive with Light Barrier ..........................................................................................78
5.5 Linear Transport Belts.............................................................................................................85
6 CHASSIS - IP CARRIER ADAPTER PLATE ..........................................................................87

6.1 Vacuum Plate ..........................................................................................................................87
6.2 Calibration Board ....................................................................................................................89
6.3 Distribution Board ...................................................................................................................91
7 CHASSIS - SCANNING AND ERASURE ...............................................................................92

7.1 Replacing the Optic Module ....................................................................................................92
7.2 Replacing the Photo Multiplier Tube (PMT) with Light Collector ............................................93
7.3 Replacing the PMI52 Board ....................................................................................................93
7.4 Replacing the PMI52 Power Distribution Board......................................................................94
7.5 Erasure Unit ............................................................................................................................94
7.6 Cleaning Brush .......................................................................................................................96
7.7 Replacing the Solid State Disk................................................................................................97
8 BUFFER UNIT – REAR ..........................................................................................................99

8.1 Replacing the Cassette Transport Belt ...................................................................................99
8.2 Buffer complete .......................................................................................................................99
8.3 Cassette Edge Sensor ..........................................................................................................103
9 BUFFER UNIT – FRONT......................................................................................................104

9.1 Replacing the Cassette Handling Board ...............................................................................104


Repair and Service
9.2 Rollo Light Seal .....................................................................................................................105
9.3 Stepper Motor Cassette Fixation ..........................................................................................106
9.4 Stepper Motor Opener ..........................................................................................................108
9.5 Z-Sensor ...............................................................................................................................109
9.6 Tag Reader ...........................................................................................................................111
9.7 Buffer Adapter Board ............................................................................................................112
9.8 Antistatic Brush .....................................................................................................................114
9.9 Cassette Grabber ..................................................................................................................115
10 REPLACEMENTS AT CASSETTE: REPLACING A DEFECTIVE ID-CHIP .........................117


Repair and Service
1 Overview to enclosed Replacement Instructions
INSTRUCTION:
The Enclosures are delivered with the Spare Part.
For an overview of published Enclosures, please refer to:
GSO Library - General Info - Agfa HealthCare - Publications -
Enclosures - General Enclosures*
* Only applicable for Agfa Employees.
For external partners: Please contact your local Agfa partner.
Spare parts with enclosed replacement instructions are listed in the table below.
Spare Part with enclosed Spare Part Order Number*

replacement instructions
Cassette Handling Board CM+9 5170 5990 1
Cassette Transport Belt CM+9 5170 9810 2
Display Board with Touch Panel CM+9 5170 1445 2
IP Handling Board CM+9 5170 2150 3
Optic Module CM+9 5170 2750 1
PMI52 Board CM+9 5170 3070 2
PMI52 Power Distribution Board CM+9 5170 4120 3
PMT with Light Collector CM+9 5170 3001 0
Power Supply CM+9 5170 9805 2
Vacuum Pump CM+9 5170 4290 3
Additionally available as spare parts for replacements:
Spare Part Spare Part Order Number*

Small Parts Kit (Fixing Material) CM+9 5170 9820 1
Small Parts Kit (Functional Parts) CM+9 5170 9825 1
*The last digit in the order number indicates the spare part revision at release of this document.
For an overview of all other spare parts refer to:

DX-G / DX-M Service Manual, Chapter 5: Spare Parts List


Repair and Service
2 Paneling
The following figures show an overview of all covers, which can be replaced.
Front cover , see section 2.2.

Lower Buffer cover , see section 2.3.
Right side cover , see section 2.4. 1
2
Figure 1
Left side cover , see section 2.5.

6
Upper left cover , see section 2.6. 5 7
Upper right cover , see section 2.7. 4 8

Buffer right cover , see section 2.8.
Upper cover , see section 2.9.
Figure 2
Buffer rear cover , see section 2.10.

9
Rear cover , see section 2.11.
10
Figure 3


Repair and Service
2.1 Replacing the Display Board with Touch Panel
REQUIRED SPARE PART:

The replacement instructions for the
Display Board with touch panel,
spare part number* CM+9 5170 1445 1,
are enclosed to the spare part.
* The last digit in the order number indicates the
spare part revision at release of this document.
When ordering, the actual revision of the spare part is
delivered.
Figure 4
2.2 Replacing the Front Cover

 DX-G Type 5170 / 100
Front cover with order number*:
CM+9 5170 1475 2
 DX-M Type 5170 / 200
CM+9 5170 9888 0
When ordering, the actual revision of the spare
part is delivered.
Figure 5
REQUIRED TIME:
Approximately 45 minutes:
 15 minutes preparation
 10 minutes replacement
 10 minutes verification
 10 minutes customer hand-over


Repair and Service
DISASSEMBLY:

(2) Disconnect the mains cable.
(3) Open two fast locks.
Figure 6
(5) Open fast locks (A) and (B) at front cover.

(6) Remove front cover (C).
A
B C
Figure 7
ASSEMBLY:
(1) Mount in reverse order.
Verification (1) Switch on the digitizer.

(2) Wait till the status indicator lamp on the
digitizer is green (= ready).
Status Indicator
This takes approximately 3 minutes.
Figure 8


Repair and Service
2.3 Replacing the Lower Buffer Cover

Lower Buffer cover with order number*:
CM+9 5170 9845 0
When ordering, the actual revision of the spare part
is delivered.
Figure 9
REQUIRED TIME:
DISASSEMBLY:

(3) Open right cover.
(5) Loose screws at rear cover.
(6) Remove 2 screws from the buffer rear cover under the output buffer.


Repair and Service
(7) Hold the lower buffer cover with one hand and remove screws at the lower
buffer cover (see Figure 10).
IMPORTANT:
When all screws were removed, the lower buffer cover can fall
down. Hold the lower buffer to avoid this.
Figure 10
(8) Remove lower buffer cover.
ASSEMBLY:

(2) Wait till the status indicator lamp on the digitizer is green (= ready).


Repair and Service
2.4 Replacing the Right Side Cover

Right cover with order number*:
CM+9 5170 1440 1
is delivered.
Figure 11
REQUIRED TIME:
DISASSEMBLY:

(3) Open two fastlocks (Figure 12).
Figure 12


Repair and Service
(5) Push clamp to the right and

remove the filter frame.
(6) Remove filter.
Figure 13
(7) Disconnect fan cable from device (A).

B
(8) Remove cables from the
white plastic holders (B). A
(9) Remove 3 Allen screws (C) at the fan.
(10) Remove the fan.
Figure 14
(11) Open right cover as far as possible.

(12) Lift the right cover out of the guidance.
(13) Remove the right cover.


Repair and Service
ASSEMBLY:

IMPORTANT:
When mounting the air filter. Observe arrows at filter element for airflow
direction. Airflow direction is from outside to inside of the digitizer as
indicated on the frame.
Airflow
Direction
Figure 15



Repair and Service
2.5 Replacing the Left Side Cover

Left cover with order number*:
CM+9 5170 1450 1
is delivered.
Figure 16
REQUIRED TIME:
DISASSEMBLY:

Figure 17


Repair and Service

(6) Remove front cover (C) A
D
(7) Open fast locks (D) and (E) at left cover.
B C
Figure 18
(8) Open the left cover as far as possible.

(9) Lift the left cover out of the guidance.
ASSEMBLY:



Repair and Service
2.6 Replacing the Upper Left Cover

Upper left cover with order number*:
CM+9 5170 1455 1
is delivered.
Figure 19
REQUIRED TIME:
DISASSEMBLY:

(4) Remove the front cover.
(5) Remove the upper cover.
(6) Unplug plug P50.
(7) Open the left cover.
(8) Remove 3 screws from the upper left cover.
IMPORTANT:
The cover is still connected to
the device with a cable.
Figure 20
(9) Lift upper left cover with LED status indicator board carefully up to get access
to the LED status indicator board inside.


Repair and Service
(10) Remove 2 screws from the cover of the

LED status indicator board.
(11) Remove the cover of the LED status
indicator board.
Figure 21
(12) Pull the LED status indicator board out

of the mounting in the upper left cover.
(13) Remove upper left cover.
Figure 22
ASSEMBLY:



Repair and Service
2.7 Replacing the Upper Right Cover

Upper Right cover with order number*:
CM+9 5170 1421 0
is delivered.
Figure 23
REQUIRED TIME:
DISASSEMBLY:

(6) Remove Upper cover.
(7) Remove Buffer right cover.


Repair and Service
(8) Remove 3 screws at the upper right cover (see Figure 24).
Figure 24
(9) Remove upper right cover.
NOTE:
Be aware of the connected remounting and mounting the covers.
ASSEMBLY:



Repair and Service
2.8 Replacing the Buffer Right Cover

Spare part with order number*:
CM+9 5170 1430 1
is delivered. Figure 25
REQUIRED TIME:
DISASSEMBLY:

(6) Disconnect cable from the display board (see Figure 26).
Figure 26


Repair and Service
(7) Remove 1 screw (see Figure 27).
Figure 27
(8) Pull down buffer right cover

carefully and remove it from
the device.
Figure 28


Repair and Service
(9) Turn the right buffer cover around.

The display board with the touch panel is visible.
(10) Remove 4 screws from the display board (see Figure 29).
Figure 29
(11) Remove the Display board with touch panel.
ASSEMBLY:
IMPORTANT:
When reinstalling the Display Board with Touch Panel be sure that Display
Board will be installed in correct direction. Compare mounted Display
Board with Figure 29, before mounting the right buffer cover again.



Repair and Service
2.9 Replacing the Upper Cover

Upper cover with order number*:
CM+9 5170 1479 2
is delivered.
Figure 30
REQUIRED TIME:
DISASSEMBLY:

Figure 31


Repair and Service

(6) Remove front cover (C).
A
B C
Figure 32
(7) Remove 2 screws of the upper cover.

(8) Remove upper cover.
Figure 33
NOTE:
Be aware that the cassette input cover fits into the notch and engages.
ASSEMBLY:



Repair and Service
2.10 Replacing the Buffer Rear Cover

Buffer rear cover with order number*:
CM+9 5170 1410 2
is delivered.
Figure 34
REQUIRED TIME:
DISSASEMBLY
(3) Disconnect the Ethernet cable.
Figure 35
NOTE:
Be aware of the connected cables remounting and mounting the covers.


Repair and Service
(6) Remove five screws from the left side of

the rear cover.
(7) Loose five screws from the right side of
the rear cover (see Figure 39).
(8) Remove Rear cover.
Figure 36
(9) Remove seven screws from the buffer

rear cover.
(10) Remove rear buffer cover.
Figure 37
ASSEMBLY:



Repair and Service
2.11 Replacing the Rear Cover

Rear cover with order number*:
CM+9 5170 9830 0
is delivered.
Figure 38
REQUIRED TIME:
DISASSEMBLY:
(3) Unplug network cable.
(5) Remove five screws from the left side of the
rear cover.
(6) Loose five screws from the right side of the
rear cover (see Figure 39).
(7) Remove Rear cover.
Figure 39
ASSEMBLY:



Repair and Service
2.12 Replacing the Cassette Input Cover

CM+ F9 5170 9835 0
is delivered.
Figure 40
REQUIRED TIME:
DISASSEMBLY:

(5) Open left cover.


Repair and Service
(8) Remove 2 screws from cassette input cover.
Figure 41
(9) Remove cassette input cover.
ASSEMBLY:
NOTE:
Be aware that the cassette input cover fits into the notch and engages.



Repair and Service
2.13 LED Status Indicator Board

LED Status Indicator Board with order number*:
CM+9 5170 1460 0
* The last digit in the order number indicates the spare part
revision at release of this document. When ordering, the Figure 42
actual revision of the spare part is delivered.
REQUIRED TIME:
Approximately 1 hour:
 10 minutes verification and
NOTE:
The detailed replacement of the covers is described in section 2 of this document.
DISASSEMBLY:
(7) Remove plug P50.
(8) Remove 3 screws from the upper left cover.
IMPORTANT:
The cover is still connected to
the device with a cable.
(9) Lift the carefully the upper left cover with LED
status indicator board to get access
to the LED status indicator board inside.
Figure 43


Repair and Service
(10) Remove 2 screws from the cover of the

LED status indicator board.
(11) Remove the cover of the LED status
indicator board.
Figure 44
(12) Disconnect one cable from the LED Status

Indicator Board.
(13) Pull the LED status indicator board out.
Figure 45
ASSEMBLY:



Repair and Service
2.14 Fan

CM+9 5170 4450 0
is delivered.
Figure 46
REQUIRED TIME:
NOTE:
DISASSEMBLY:
(4) Disconnect fan power cable.
(5) Remove 3 screws.
(6) Remove fan.
ASSEMBLY:



Repair and Service
2.15 Air Filter

CM+9 5170 9855 0
is delivered.
Figure 47
REQUIRED TIME:
NOTE:


Repair and Service
DISASSEMBLY:

(4) Push clamp to the right and
remove the filter frame to the right.
(5) Remove filter.
Figure 48
ASSEMBLY:
IMPORTANT:
When mounting the air filter. Observe arrows at filter element for airflow
direction. Airflow direction is from outside to inside of the digitizer as
indicated on the frame.



Repair and Service
3 Frame and Vacuum Unit
3.1 Replacing the Power Supply

Power supply, spare part number*
CM+9 5170 9805 0, are enclosed to the spare
part.
* The last digit in the spare part number indicates the spare
part revision at release of this document. When ordering, the
Figure 49
3.2 Replacing the Vacuum Pump

The replacement instructions for the Vacuum
Pump, spare part number*
part.
part revision at release of this document. When ordering, the
Figure 50


Repair and Service
3.3 Interlock Switch

CM+9 0426 6304 0
is delivered.
Figure 51
REQUIRED TIME:
NOTE:
DISASSEMBLY:



Repair and Service
(5) Press retaining clips at both sides.
Figure 52
(6) Pull out interlock switch.

(7) Disconnect cables.
(8) Remove Interlock switch.
ASSEMBLY:
(3) Open the right door approximately 1 cm (approximately 0.4 inch).
Result: The safety switch has to switch off the digitizer.
If the test fails, the switch is defective and needs to be replaced.
(4) Close right door.



Repair and Service
3.4 Main Switch

CM+9 0452 3173 0
is delivered.
Figure 53
REQUIRED TIME:
NOTE:
DISASSEMBLY:

(4) Remove 2 screws at the main switch holder.
(5) Pull out the main switch.
It is still connected to the device with 4
cables.
(6) Disconnect the 4 cables.
(7) Remove main switch.
Figure 54


Repair and Service
ASSEMBLY:

3.5 Vacuum Valve

CM+9 5170 2360 0
is delivered.
Figure 55
REQUIRED TIME:
Approximately 1,25 hour:
NOTE:


Repair and Service
DISASSEMBLY:

(4) Remove rear cover.
(5) Disconnect cable.
(6) Open 4 screws at vacuum valve with Allen key, which is delivered with the
device.
(7) Remove vacuum valve.
ASSEMBLY:
(2) Perform the stall calibration “Valve”.
For instructions refer to chapter 3.6: Adjustments and Calibrations

(3) Insert an unexposed cassette in the
ID tablet.
(4) At the processing station select examination type “System diagnosis – Flatfield”.
(5) Repeat steps (3) and (4) for all cassette formats the customer is using.
(6) Insert cassette(s) in the digitizer.
(7) Confirm that the image(s) arrives at the
NX processing station.
(8) Reject the image(s).


Repair and Service
3.6 Fixed Vacuum Hose

CM+9 5170 9894 0
is delivered.
Figure 56
REQUIRED TIME:
NOTE:


Repair and Service
DISASSEMBLY:

(5) Open power supply carrier.
(6) Open 2 clamps at fixed vacuum hose.
(7) Remove vacuum hose.
ASSEMBLY:

ID tablet.
(5) Insert cassette in the digitizer.
(6) Confirm that the image arrives at the
(7) Reject the image.


Repair and Service
3.7 Vacuum Pump Sound Absorber

CM+9 5170 9895 0
is delivered.
Figure 57
REQUIRED TIME:
NOTE:
DISASSEMBLY:
(5) Open 2 cable binders from the hose.
(6) Open clamp at vacuum pump.
(7) Remove pump sound absorber.
ASSEMBLY:



Repair and Service
4 Chassis - Connector and Swivel Drive
4.1 Replacing the IP Handling Board

IP Handling board, spare part number*
CM+9 5170 2150 0, are enclosed to the
spare part.
part revision at release of this document. When ordering,
the actual revision of the spare part is delivered.
Figure 58
4.2 Connector Drive

CM+9 5170 2185 0
is delivered.
Figure 59
NOTE:


Repair and Service
REQUIRED TIME:
 10 minutes for adjustment
DISASSEMBLY:
(5) Cut cable ties at rear cable duct.
(6) Open cable holder.
(7) Remove plug "P7" from IP Handling Board.
(8) Open 3 screws from connector drive.
(9) Remove connector drive.
ASSEMBLY:
(2) Perform the stall calibration “Connector".

(3) Insert an unexposed cassette in the ID tablet.
(6) Confirm that the image arrives at the NX processing station.


Repair and Service
4.3 Connector Bolt

CM+9 5170 2190 0
is delivered.
Figure 60
REQUIRED TIME:
Approximately 1,5 hours:
NOTE:


Repair and Service
DISASSEMBLY:
(1) Start the Service Client on the Control PC.

(2) Select <Analysis & Repair - Move IP Carrier to Maintenance
Position>.
(3) Select <Confirm> at the display of the digitizer.
(4) Click on <Maintenance Position> to move the IP carrier into the respective
position.
For information regarding Service Client refer to Chapter 3.2:
Tools & Auxiliary Means
CAUTION:
Switch off the digitizer before disconnecting the optic module cable.
(10) Disconnect cable at the optic module.
Figure 61


Repair and Service
(11) Disconnect five plugs from the PMI52 board.

Also disconnect the optic module cable from the PMI52 board.
Figure 62
(12) Disconnect one plug from the PMI52 power distribution board.
Note that plug is located below the upper left cover.
Figure 63


Repair and Service
(13) Open the cable holder.
Figure 64
(14) Loosen four screws of the PMI52 board carrier approximately 2 turns.
Note that 1 screw is located below the upper left cover.
(15) Remove PMI52 board carrier.
Figure 65


Repair and Service
CAUTION:
(16) Open two screws on the left and right of the PMT with light collector.
Figure 66
1
(17) Open the red screw in the top rear of the PMT with light collector.
(18) Lift the Safety Clip 2 on the top while holding the PMT with light collector.
Figure 67
(19) Carefully remove the PMT with light collector by pulling it to the front.


Repair and Service
(20) Unlock 4 black screws of the erasure unit.
Figure 68
(21) Disconnect the cables.

(22) Use the metal handle and pull the erasure unit carefully out of the device.
(23) Remove 2 screws from the upper holder.
IMPORTANT:
Connector Bolt may fall down and destroy light sensors that are located
underneath the connector bolt. When removing the 2 lower screws
keep the bolt with one hand.
(24) Remove 2 screws from the lower holder.

(25) Remove connector bolt.


Repair and Service
ASSEMBLY:
IMPORTANT:
Observe that both connectors are mounted parallel.
(2) Perform the stall calibration “Connector".

ID tablet.
4.4 Locking Unit

CM+9 5170 5600 1
is delivered.
Figure 69


Repair and Service
REQUIRED TIME:
NOTE:
DISASSEMBLY:

(7) Remove buffer rear cover.
(9) Remove plug "P37" from cassette handling board.
(10) Remove 2 screws at locking unit.
(11) Remove locking unit.


Repair and Service
ASSEMBLY:
(2) Perform the stall calibration “Locker".

4.5 Swivel Drive

CM+9 5170 2120 0
is delivered.
Figure 70
REQUIRED TIME:
NOTE:


Repair and Service
DISASSEMBLY:

Figure 71


Repair and Service
(7) Disconnect five plugs from the PMI52 board.
Figure 72
(8) Disconnect one plug from the PMI52 power distribution board.
Note that plug is located below the upper left cover.
Figure 73


Repair and Service
(9) Open the cable holder.
Figure 74
(10) Loosen four screws of the PMI52 board carrier approximately 2 turns.
Note that 1 screw is located below the upper left cover.
Figure 75


Repair and Service
CAUTION:
(12) Open two screws on the left and right of the PMT with light collector.
Figure 76
1
(13) Open the red screw in the top rear of the PMT with light collector.
(14) Lift the Safety Clip 2 on the top while holding the PMT with light collector.
Figure 77


Repair and Service
(15) Carefully remove the PMT with light collector by pulling it to the front.
IMPORTANT:
 Handle the Photo Multiplier with Light collector very carefully.
 Store it on the straight, metal side (see Figure 78).
 Store it on a safe and clean place.
 Protect PMT from bright light. Cover the light entrance to protect
the PMT from excessive light entering.
Figure 78
(16) Remove the 4 mounting screws

for the optic module.
Figure 79


Repair and Service
CAUTION:
Optics can be polluted.
 Handle the optic module very carefully.
 Store it flat on a safe and clean place.
 Put it the laser emission opening downward to avoid collecting dust.
Figure 80: Storage OK Figure 81: Storage Not OK
(17) Use both handles to pull the

optic module from the two mounting
pins of the optic module.
(18) Remove the optic module.
Figure 82


Repair and Service
CAUTION:
Risk of injury.
Figure 83
(19) Open the cable holders from the

swivel drive connector cable.
(20) Disconnect cable from swivel drive.
Figure 84


Repair and Service
(21) Remove 2 screws at mounting of

swivel drive.
Figure 85
(22) Remove clip from the left gear.

Important:
Gear is fixed with a driving pin. Take care
not to loose the pin.
(23) Remove gear.
Figure 86
(24) Remove swivel unit.
Figure 87: Removed swivel unit


Repair and Service
(25) Remove 4 screws from swivel drive.

(26) Remove swivel drive.
Figure 88
CAUTION:
Light collector is fragile: Risk of damage.
When mounting the light collector great care must be taken. Do not touch the surface
of the light collector.
ASSEMBLY:

(2) Perform the stall calibration “Swivel".

ID tablet.
(4) At the processing station select
examination type “System diagnosis – Flatfield”.


Repair and Service
4.6 Stepper Motor Cassette Transport (Cassette Transport Drive)

CM+9 5170 5310 0
is delivered.
Figure 89
REQUIRED TIME:
 10 minutes adjustment
NOTE:


Repair and Service
DISASSEMBLY:
(2) Disconnect the mains cable and network cable.
(3) Check the tension of the Cassette Transport Belt.
IMPORTANT:
The replaced Cassette Transport Belt must be mounted with a
similar tension.

(5) Remove the rear cover.
(6) Remove the buffer rear cover.
(7) Unplug cable from Stepper Motor Cassette Transport Drive from the extension
cable in the device.
(8) Unplug cable from light barrier.
(9) Open the 4 screws from the mounting of the Cassette Transport Drive.
Figure 90
(10) Remove the mounting of the Cassette Transport Drive including the motor.


Repair and Service
ASSEMBLY:
(2) Perform the stall calibration “Cassette Transport".

ID tablet.
4.7 Lubricating Chambers

CM+9 5170 9890 0
is delivered.
Figure 91


Repair and Service
REQUIRED TIME:
NOTE:
DISASSEMBLY:

Position>.
position.
(10) Remove Optic Module.
(11) Remove PMI52 Board carrier.
(12) Remove PMT with Light collector.
(13) Remove Vacuum pump.
(14) Remove vacuum plate.
(15) Remove Lubricating chambers.


Repair and Service
ASSEMBLY:

4.8 Slow Scan Reference Sensor

CM+9 5170 2585 0
is delivered.
Figure 92
REQUIRED TIME:
NOTE:
IMPORTANT:
Sensor is adjusted and may only be replaced together with its holder (as it is coming
from spare parts stock).


Repair and Service
DISASSEMBLY:
Position>.
position. For information regarding Service Client refer to Chapter 3.2:
(10) Remove optic module.
(12) Remove PMT with light collector.
(13) Remove wire ropes and fix it with tape.
(14) Remove Vacuum plate.
(16) Remove sensor.
IMPORTANT:
Do not remove the screw from the sensor. The sensor is adjusted.
ASSEMBLY:
(2) Wait till the status indicator lamp on the digitizer is green (= ready). This takes
approximately 3 minutes.
(7) Confirm that the image(s) arrives at the NX processing station.


Repair and Service
5 Chassis - IP Transport
5.1 Traverse with Snap Hooks

CM+9 5170 2630 0
spare part revision at release of this document. Figure 93
is delivered.
REQUIRED TIME:
NOTE:
DISASSEMBLY:

(9) Remove 2 screws each at wire rope mounting brackets.
(10) Lift left spring to release traverse.


Repair and Service
(11) Shift traverse slightly up.

(12) Lift right spring to release traverse.
(14) Remove Traverse with snap hooks.
ASSEMBLY:
(2) Perform Couple- / uncouple adjustment.
Refer to chapter 3.6: Adjustments and calibrations for instructions
(3) Perform the stall calibration “Wagon".

ID tablet.


Repair and Service
5.2 Traverse Carriage Left / Right

CM+9 5170 9870 0
spare part revision at release of this document. When Figure 94
ordering, the actual revision of the spare part is delivered.
REQUIRED TIME:
NOTE:
NOTE:
It is not required to replace both carriages if one is defective.
The spare part contains (left/right) due to logistical reasons.
DISASSEMBLY:



Repair and Service
(9) Remove 2 screws each at wire rope mounting brackets.

(10) Lift left spring to release traverse.
(12) Lift right spring to release traverse.
(15) Use waterproof pen to mark position of left and right carriage at “Igus rails”.
(16) Remove 2 screws at each carriage.
(17) Take off the carriage from the belt.
ASSEMBLY:
IMPORTANT:
Take care to mount the 2 carriages parallel (see marked positions).
(2) Perform the stall calibration “Wagon”.
(3) Perform the stall calibration “Linear Transport".
(4) Perform Horizontal traverse adjustment.
Refer to chapter 3.6: Adjustments and Calibrations for instructions
(5) Perform Couple / Uncouple adjustment.
Refer to chapter 3.6: Adjustments and Calibrations for instructions

ID tablet.


Repair and Service
5.3 IP Feeder Wire Ropes

CM+9 5170 9875 0
is delivered.
Figure 95
REQUIRED TIME:
Approximately 1,75 hour:
NOTE:
DISASSEMBLY:
(9) Remove erasure unit.


Repair and Service
(12) Remove wires manually out of the mounting brackets on the traverse.
(13) Remove IP feeder wire ropes.
IMPORTANT:
Consider the length of the 3 ropes while removing and notice their
positions. The spare ropes must be mounted at the same position.
There should be 2 short ropes for the left and the right side and one
long rope for the middle.
ASSEMBLY:
IMPORTANT:
 IP Feeder Wire Ropes must fit into the guidance on the plates.
 The center wire has to be in parallel to rail for IP Carrier Adapter
Plate.
 Ropes must be mounted in the same arrangement that before
disassembly. See important note above.
 Be aware, that springs at the lower pulleys tense the ropes.
(3) Perform the stall calibration “Valve".


Repair and Service

ID tablet.
5.4 Snaphook Drive with Light Barrier
IMPORTANT for DX-M Type 5170/200 SN 10001 – SN 10041:

When replacing the snaphook drive in a digitizer from SN 10001 up to SN 10041 it is
necessary to order the “Parts for Snaphook drive w. LB” with order number*:
CM+9517026940 additionally.
NOTE:
The snaphook drive with light barrier requires the digitizer software version NIM_2103
or higher.

CM+9 5170 2692 0
is delivered.
Figure 96


Repair and Service
REQUIRED TIME:
NOTE:
DISASSEMBLY:
(1) Switch the digitizer on.

(2) Enter the service menu.
(3) Select: <Analysis & Repair - Move IP Carrier to Maintenance
Position>
(4) Click on <Move IP Carrier to Maintenance Position> to move the IP
carrier into the respective position.
(7) Disconnect network cable.
(9) Remove the rear cover.
(14) Remove Erasure Unit.


Repair and Service
(15) Open cable clamps (see figure below).

(16) Cut cable ties from cable duct (see figure below).
Figure 97
(17) Remove plug P11 from IP Handling Board.

(18) Remove plug P26 from IP Handling Board.
(19) Remove 2 screws at snaphook drive. See figure below.
IMPORTANT:
Use a long Allen key to unscrew the 2 screws (Tool from digitizer scope
of delivery can be used).
Figure 98


Repair and Service
(20) Remove snaphook drive.

IMPORTANT:
Remove the snaphook drive by pulling it carefully to the left side.
(21) Disconnect light barrier cable from snaphook drive.
(22) Check the tape at the bottom of the buffer.
If the tape is detached, stick the tape back to the buffer.
Figure 99
ASSEMBLY:
(2) Connect the cable to the light barrier.
NOTE:
Shrink-on tube must point at the snaphook drive.
Figure 100


Repair and Service
(3) Guide the light barrier cable and the snaphook drive cable to the back of the
digitizer (see figure below).
Figure 101
(4) Remount the snaphook drive with the captive screws.

NOTE:
Loosely screw on both screws before tighten them completely.
Figure 102


Repair and Service
(5) Fix the light barrier cable with the cable tie and the screw at the rear side of the
digitizer (see in figure below).
Figure 103
(6) Lay the light barrier cable (1) as shown in the figure below and connect it to
the plug P26 on the IP Handling Board.
(7) Lay the Snaphook Drive cable (2) as shown in the figure below and connect it to
the plug P11 on the IP Handling Board.
Figure 104


Repair and Service
(8) Close the cable ducts.

(9) Mount the cable ties.
(10) Remount Erasure Unit.
(11) Remount PMT with light collector.
(12) Remount PMI52 Board carrier.
(13) Close left cover.
(14) Mount front cover.
IMPORTANT:
Do not use the service function
<Preventive Maintenance => Stall Calibration => SM Snaphooks
(M510)> nor use the function <All except M610 & M202> in the same
menu as it includes the snaphook drive. Running these calibration cycles will damage the
snaphook drive.
Background: With the introduction of the light barrier controlled snaphook drive the
calibration of the snaphook stepper motor has become obsolete. However with
NIM_2203 this function is not disabled in the service menu as it should.
All other calibration cycles can be run unaffected.

ID tablet.


Repair and Service
5.5 Linear Transport Belts

CM+9 5170 9880 0
spare part revision at release of this document. When
ordering, the actual revision of the spare part is delivered.
Figure 105
REQUIRED TIME:
NOTE:
 The detailed replacement of the covers is described in section 2 of this
document.
 The spare part contains both belts. It is recommended to replace both belts
together.
DISASSEMBLY:

(7) Remove vacuum pump.


Repair and Service

(12) Remove wire ropes.
(14) Use waterproof pen to mark position of left and right carriage at Igus rails.
(15) Remove Traverse carriage left/right.
(16) Open screw at guide roller left and right approximately 1 turn.
(17) Turn at tensioning screws left and right clockwise a few turns to release
belt tension.
(18) Remove linear transport belts.
ASSEMBLY:

IMPORTANT:
 IP Feeder Wire Ropes must fit into the guidance on the plates.
 The center wire has to be in parallel to rail for
IP Carrier Adapter Plate.
 Be aware, that a spring tenses the ropes.
(3) Perform the stall calibration “Linear Transport".
For instructions refer to chapter 3.6: Adjustments and Calibration


Repair and Service
6 Chassis - IP Carrier Adapter Plate
6.1 Vacuum Plate

CM+9 5170 2380 0
is delivered.
Figure 106
REQUIRED TIME:
NOTE:
DISASSEMBLY:
Position>.
position.


Repair and Service

(11) Open 2 screws of the power supply carrier.
(12) Open the power supply carrier.
(13) Loose four screws of the vacuum valve.
These screws can't be removed.
(18) Pull down traverse with snaphooks.
(19) Remove wire ropes.
(20) Mount each wire rope with a tape at the swivel drive axle and the PMT mounting.
This will keep the tension of the wires.
(21) Remove traverse with snaphooks.
(22) Remove calibration board.
(23) Disconnect cable at the calibration board.
(24) Remove 9 screws from vacuum plate.
ASSEMBLY:
(2) Perform Couple- / uncouple adjustment.
Refer to chapter 3.6: Adjustments and Calibrations for instructions.
(4) Perform the stall calibration “Valve".
(5) Perform the stall calibration “Swivel".


Repair and Service

6.2 Calibration Board

CM+9 5170 2990 1
is delivered.
Figure 107
REQUIRED TIME:
Approximately 30 minutes
NOTE:
CAUTION:
Device can be damaged.
Always switch off the digitizer before disconnecting or connecting any cable.


Repair and Service
DISASSEMBLY:

(9) Remove cable from Calibration board.
(10) Remove screws from calibration.
(11) Remove Calibration board.
ASSEMBLY:
IMPORTANT:
When remounting, mount screws from left to right to reduce tension.

ID tablet.


Repair and Service
6.3 Distribution Board

CM+9 5170 2490 0
is delivered.
Figure 108
REQUIRED TIME:
CAUTION:
Device can be damaged.
Always switch off the digitizer before disconnecting or connecting any cable.
NOTE:
DISASSEMBLY:
(2) Disconnect cables from Distribution board.
(3) Press 3 mounting pins.
(4) Remove Distribution board.


Repair and Service
ASSEMBLY:

ID tablet.
7 Chassis - Scanning and Erasure
7.1 Replacing the Optic Module

The replacement instructions for the Optic
Module, spare part number*
part.
is delivered.
Figure 109


Repair and Service
7.2 Replacing the Photo Multiplier Tube (PMT) with Light Collector

The replacement instructions for the Photo
Multiplier Tube (PMT) with Light Collector are
enclosed to the spare part.
Spare part number*: CM+9 5170 3000 1
is delivered.
Figure 110
7.3 Replacing the PMI52 Board

The replacement instructions for the PMI52
board, spare part number* CM+9 5170 3070 1,
are enclosed to the spare part.
is delivered.
Figure 111


Repair and Service
7.4 Replacing the PMI52 Power Distribution Board

PMI52 power distribution board, spare part
number* CM+9 5170 4120 1, are enclosed to
the spare part.
is delivered.
Figure 112
7.5 Erasure Unit

CM+9 5170 3500 1
is delivered.
Figure 113
REQUIRED TIME:
NOTE:


Repair and Service
DISASSEMBLY:

(6) Disconnect 2 cables.
(7) Loose 4 black screws of the erasure unit (see Figure 114).
Figure 114
(8) Use the metal handle and pull the erasure unit carefully out of the device.
Figure 115


Repair and Service
ASSEMBLY:

(9) Perform shading calibration.
For instructions refer to Chapter 3.6: Adjustments and Calibrations
7.6 Cleaning Brush

CM+9 5170 9160 1
is delivered.
Figure 116
REQUIRED TIME:
NOTE:


Repair and Service
DISASSEMBLY:

(9) Remove Cleaning brush assembly.
(10) Remove Cleaning brush.
ASSEMBLY:
7.7 Replacing the Solid State Disk

Upper left cover with order number*: CM+9 5170 9885 0
REQUIRED TIME:
NOTE:


Repair and Service
DISASSEMBLY:

(5) Remove solid state disk.
Figure 117
ASSEMBLY:
(2) Prepare a USB Memory Stick with the digitizer software.
(3) Switch on the digitizer with inserted USB Memory Stick.
NOTE:
For detailed instructions how to get the software and how to install the
software refer to Chapter 3.2: Tools and auxiliary Means



Repair and Service
8 Buffer Unit – Rear
8.1 Replacing the Cassette Transport Belt

The replacement instructions for the Cassette
Transport Belt, spare part number*
part.
is delivered.
Figure 118
8.2 Buffer complete

CM+9 5170 6000 0
is delivered.
Figure 119
IMPORTANT:
The buffer should be lifted by 2 persons, as it is heavy (approximately 28 kg).
REQUIRED TIME:


Repair and Service
NOTE:
DISASSEMBLY:
Position>.
position. For information regarding Service Client refer to Chapter 3.2:
(17) Open cable holders from the buffer.
Figure 120: View from above the digitizer


Repair and Service
(18) Disconnect 3 cables from Cassette Handling Board.

NOTE:
Every plug is numbered and belongs to one socket. For details refer to
Chapter 4: Reference and circuit diagrams.
(19) Remove 7 Screws at the buffer (see following figures).
Figure 121: View from above the digitizer
Figure 122: View from the right side of the digitizer


Repair and Service
CAUTION:
Risk of injury and damaging the device.
Remove or lift-up the buffer with 2 persons. The buffer is heavy (28 kg).
(20) Remove the complete buffer.
Figure 123
ASSEMBLY:

ID tablet.


Repair and Service
8.3 Cassette Edge Sensor

CM+9 5175 9060 0
is delivered.
Figure 124
REQUIRED TIME:
NOTE:
DISASSEMBLY:

(8) Remove buffer left cover.
(10) Disconnect 3 plugs.
IMPORTANT:
Observe colors and order of the cables.


Repair and Service
(11) Open 2 screws approximately 2 turns.

(12) Remove cassette edge sensor.
ASSEMBLY:
IMPORTANT:
Connect cables in the same colored order, as they were connected
before disassembly.
(2) Perform a cassette edge sensor position adjustment.
For instructions refer to Chapter 3.6: Adjustments and Calibrations

9 Buffer Unit – Front
9.1 Replacing the Cassette Handling Board

The replacement instructions for the Cassette
handling board, spare part number*
part.
is delivered.
Figure 125


Repair and Service
9.2 Rollo Light Seal

CM+9 5170 9896 0
is delivered.
Figure 126
REQUIRED TIME:
NOTE:
DISASSEMBLY:

(9) Turn at spindle of cassette fixation a few turns until screw of rollo is accessible.
(10) Fix a wire at the rollo.
(11) Pull out the defective rollo.
(12) Fix the wire at spare rollo.


Repair and Service
ASSEMBLY:
(2) Perform the stall calibration “Calibrate Fixer".

9.3 Stepper Motor Cassette Fixation

CM+9 5175 8660 1
is delivered.
Figure 127
REQUIRED TIME:


Repair and Service
NOTE:
DISASSEMBLY:

(8) Open cable holders.
(9) Remove plug "P38" at cassette handling board.
(11) Remove Stepper motor cassette fixation.
ASSEMBLY:
(2) Perform the stall calibration “Calibrate Fixer".



Repair and Service
9.4 Stepper Motor Opener

CM+9 5170 5100 0
is delivered.
Figure 128
REQUIRED TIME:
NOTE:
DISASSEMBLY:

(7) Remove buffer right cover.
(8) Remove plug "P35" from Cassette handling board.
(9) Remove 4 screws at motor.
(10) Remove motor.


Repair and Service
ASSEMBLY:

9.5 Z-Sensor

CM+9 5170 5230 1
is delivered.
Figure 129
REQUIRED TIME:


Repair and Service
NOTE:
DISASSEMBLY:

(8) Remove Erasure unit.
(9) Open cable holder.
(12) Remove Z-Sensor.
ASSEMBLY:

ID tablet.


Repair and Service
9.6 Tag Reader

CM+9 0486 1417 0
is delivered.
Figure 130
REQUIRED TIME:
NOTE:
DISASSEMBLY:

(6) Remove Cassette input cover.
(9) Remove TAG-Reader.


Repair and Service
ASSEMBLY:

ID tablet.
9.7 Buffer Adapter Board

CM+9 5160 4750 0
is delivered.
Figure 131
REQUIRED TIME:


Repair and Service
NOTE:
DISASSEMBLY:

(6) Disconnect cables.
(7) Open plastic holders.
(8) Remove buffer adapter board.
ASSEMBLY:

ID tablet.


Repair and Service
9.8 Antistatic Brush

CM+9 5170 5008 0
is delivered.
Figure 132
REQUIRED TIME:
NOTE:
DISASSEMBLY:

(6) Remove cassette input cover.
(7) Remove 3 screws from antistatic brush.
(8) Remove antistatic brush.
ASSEMBLY:
IMPORTANT:
Open the 3 screws of the antistatic brush holder a few turns, to mount the
antistatic brush again. This allows easy mounting of the brush.


Repair and Service

ID tablet.
9.9 Cassette Grabber

CM+9 5170 5270 0
is delivered.
Figure 133
REQUIRED TIME:
NOTE:


Repair and Service
DISASSEMBLY:

(6) Remove 3 mounting screws at cassette
grabber.
(7) Remove 4 screws of cassette grabber
guidance block.
(8) Remove cassette grabber.
ASSEMBLY:
(2) Perform a cassette grabber distance adjustment.
See DX-G / DX-M Service Manual, Chapter 3.6 - Calibrations & Adjustments.

ID tablet.


Repair and Service
10 Replacements at Cassette: Replacing a defective ID-Chip
REQUIRED TOOL:
Small blunt tool (not sharp-edged) for opening
cassettes.
This tool is delivered with the shipped
cassette.
Figure 134
(1) Press the lock mechanism  in cutout 2

of cassette with a blunt tool 2
(not sharp-edged).
(2) Open shutter  carefully with both 3

1
thumbs, so the IP cannot be
scratched by the shutter.
pressure 3 pressure
(3) Take out the IP  very cautiously
and make sure that it is not
scratched by the shutter . even surface even surface
Figure 135
(4) Place the IP flat on the edge of

a table.
Figure 136


Repair and Service
(5) Release the ID-chip with the help of

a pointed tool (e.g. a ball pen).
Figure 137
(6) Insert the new ID-chip.
(7) Note down the IP serial number, starting

with 302.
Figure 138: Example of a IP serial number
(8) Insert IP in cassette and close cassette.
(9) Re-initialize the ID-chip with the

RF Tag Initialization Tool which is
part of the NX Software.
Figure 139: Example of a IP serial number


Chapter 3.6
Imaging Services
Adjustments and Calibrations
DX-M
Type 5170 / 200
DX-G
Type 5170 / 100
This document describes all adjustments and calibrations during installation,

maintenance or after replacement of parts for DX-M and DX-G with Software Version
higher than NIM_2000.

2.2 07-2010 Updated section 3.1 - Shading Calibration
(Figure 19, 3.1.2 Selecting X-Ray Source, AEC Detectors)
Document Title
Chapter 3.2 - Tools and auxiliary Means
Chapter 3.5 - Replacements
Chapter 3.7 - Software Menus and Settings

eq_03-6_adjustments_e_template_v07
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Adjustments and Calibrations
► Manufacturer
Publisher
D - 81539 München
Germany
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
the equipment.
the product.
NOTE:


Repair and Service
LIST OF CONTENTS
1 OVERVIEW OF ADJUSTMENTS AND CALIBRATIONS.........................................................5

1.1 Adjustments ..............................................................................................................................5
1.2 Calibrations ...............................................................................................................................6
2 ADJUSTMENTS .......................................................................................................................7
2.1 Horizontal Traverse Adjustment................................................................................................7
2.1.1 Preparing the Horizontal Traverse Adjustment.........................................................................7
2.1.2 Performing the mechanical Horizontal Traverse Adjustment .................................................10
2.1.3 Verification of Horizontal Traverse Adjustment.......................................................................12
2.2 Cassette Edge Sensor Adjustment.........................................................................................12
2.3 Cassette Grabber Distance Adjustment .................................................................................15
2.4 Couple Position Adjustment....................................................................................................19
2.4.1 Preparing the Couple Position Adjustment .............................................................................20
2.4.2 Performing the Couple Position Adjustment ...........................................................................21
2.5 Verification ..............................................................................................................................23
3 CALIBRATIONS .....................................................................................................................24
3.1 Shading Calibration.................................................................................................................24
3.1.1 Introduction .............................................................................................................................24
3.1.2 Selecting X-Ray Source..........................................................................................................27
3.1.3 Select Detector(s) ...................................................................................................................30
3.1.4 Prepare Detector(s) ................................................................................................................31
3.1.5 Performing the Shading Calibration........................................................................................36
3.1.6 Verifying the successful Shading Calibration..........................................................................43
3.2 Stall Calibration .......................................................................................................................46
4 PERFORMING A BACKUP ....................................................................................................48

5 APPENDIX..............................................................................................................................49
5.1 Changes in Shading Calibration Procedure in case Full Leg/Full Spine (FLFS) Cassette is
used ........................................................................................................................................49
5.2 Troubleshooting of a not successful Shading Calibration.......................................................51


Repair and Service
5.2.1 Underexposed Message .........................................................................................................51
5.2.2 Overexposed Message ...........................................................................................................51
5.2.3 Dust detected Message ..........................................................................................................52
5.2.4 Non-continuous Calibration Message.....................................................................................52


Repair and Service
1 Overview of Adjustments and Calibrations
REQUIRED TOOLS:
Refer to the tools that are listed in the respective sections of Adjustments and
Calibrations.
REFERENCED DOCUMENTS:
• DD+DIS008.10E:
''Photo Multiplier Tube (PMT) with Light Collector Replacement Instructions'',
delivered with the PMT.
• Enclosure DD+DIS007.10E:
''Optic Module Replacement Instructions'', delivered with the optic module.
• DX-G / DX-M Service Manual, Chapter 3.5 - Replacements
• DX-G / DX-M Service Manual, Chapter 09 - Maintenance
1.1 Adjustments
The following table lists the required adjustment tasks:
Adjustment Types Use case Section

Horizontal Traverse Replacement of: 2.1
Adjustment
• Linear Transport Drive or
• Linear Transport Belt
Cassette Grabber Distance Cassette Grabber has been replaced. 2.2
Adjustment
Cassette Edge Detection Cassette Edge Sensor has been replaced. 2.3
Adjustment
Couple- / Uncouple Adjustment Replacement / Removal of: 2.4
• Wagon or
• Traverse with Snaphooks or
• Vacuum Plate or
• IP Carrier Adapter Plate


Repair and Service
1.2 Calibrations
The following table lists the required calibration tasks:
Calibration Types Use case Section

Shading calibration • The Photo Multiplier Tube (PMT) with light 3.1
collector has been replaced.
• The Optic Module has been replaced.
• Whenever stripes in slow scan direction
are visible, which cannot be removed by
cleaning of the light collector with the cleaning
brush.
NOTE:
Shading calibration is not necessary, if the
Optic Module or Photo Multiplier Module is
dismounted and remounted into the same
device again, e.g. during a maintenance.
Stall Calibration After replacements of: 3.2

• IP Handling Board
• Cassette Handling Board
• After replacements of the following assemblies
or parts of it (belts, motors, gears etc.):
o Locking Unit
o Cassette Fixation (as part of Buffer Unit)
o Vacuum Valve
o Connector Drive
o Snaphook Drive
o Swivel Drive
o Linear Transport
o Cassette Transport (in the buffer unit)
o IP Carrier Adapter Plate


Repair and Service
2 Adjustments
2.1 Horizontal Traverse Adjustment
When Perform the horizontal traverse adjustment after replacement of the:

• Linear Transport Drive
• Linear Transport Belt
Purpose Adjust the horizontal traverse to avoid Image Plate transportation problems.
REQUIRED TOOLS:
REQUIRED TIME:
Approximately 1 hour
2.1.1 Preparing the Horizontal Traverse Adjustment
NOTE:
The steps (1) - (4) are described in detail in chapter 3.5.
Required (1) Switch off digitizer.

steps
(2) Disconnect the mains and network cable.
B
(3) Open right cover (A). A
(4) Remove front cover (B).
Figure 1


Repair and Service
CAUTION:
Only disconnect the optic module cable when the digitizer is switched off.
Figure 2
(6) Remove the 4 mounting screws

for the optic module.
Figure 3


Repair and Service
CAUTION:
Optics can be damaged or polluted.
• Handle the optic module very carefully.
• Store it on a safe and clean place.
• Put it the laser emission opening downward to avoid collecting dust.
(7) Use both handles to pull the

optic module from the two
mounting pins of the optic module.
(8) Remove the optic module.
Figure 4
CAUTION:
Risk of injury.
Figure 5


Repair and Service
2.1.2 Performing the mechanical Horizontal Traverse Adjustment
CAUTION:
Light collector can be damaged: Reduced image quality.
Be sure, the swivel drive is in home position before pulling the transport belt.
Figure 6
(1) Pull left transport belt (see Figure 7) carefully downwards, until the traverse
and the L-bracket of the IP carrier adapter plate are on the same level
(see Figure 7).
(2) Check gap between L-bracket and upper stop position (see Figure 7).
Evaluation:
If there is no gap left and right visible: No further actions are required.
If there is a gap on the left and/or right side, continue with step (3).
Figure 7


Repair and Service
(3) Open 3 screws at fixation ring (see Figure 8).

(4) Turn the gear clockwise (traverse goes down) or counterclockwise (traverse goes
up) on the bush, until the gap between L-bracket and upper stop position is
correct. Details for evaluation are described in step (2).
(5) Fasten 3 screws at the fixation ring.
Bush
Fixation Ring
Gear
Position Indicator
Long Hole
Figure 8
(6) Pull left transport belt carefully up and down a few centimeters to check
the gaps again. Details for evaluation are described in step (3).
(7) Repeat steps (2) - (6) if a gap still exists.
(8) Remount optic module.
(9) Remount covers.
(10) Reconnect mains and network cable.
(11) Perform a stall calibration as described in section 3.2.


Repair and Service
2.1.3 Verification of Horizontal Traverse Adjustment

(2) Wait till the digitizer shows the ready screen (takes approximately 3 minutes).
(3) Insert an unexposed detector in the ID tablet.
(4) At the NX workstation select examination type “System diagnosis – Flat field”.
(5) Insert detector in the digitizer. The digitizer starts scanning.
(6) Confirm that the image arrives at the Control PC.
(7) Click <Reject image>.
(8) Repeat steps (3) - (7) for every available detector format at customer site.
Result The Horizontal Traverse Adjustment is performed.
2.2 Cassette Edge Sensor Adjustment
When Perform the detector edge sensor adjustment after replacement of the detector edge
sensor.
Purpose Adjust the switch position: The detector edge sensor should reliably detect whether the
detector is inserted.
REQUIRED TOOLS:
REQUIRED TIME:


Repair and Service
MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT:
(1) Insert a detector in the right way:

Black side to the user and the shutter inside the digitizer
Tube side of
the cassette
Shutter opening and

locking mechanism
Figure 9
(2) Push the detector with one hand to the left side of the digitizer.
The detector edge sensor has to switch and a "click" sound must be audible.
NOTE:
Switching of the detector edge sensor can also be checked
with a multimeter.
Evaluation:
If the sensor switches and a sound is audible: No further action is required.
If the sensor does not switch and no sound is audible:
o Switch off digitizer.

o Open right cover (A). D
B
o Remove front cover (B). A C
o Open left cover (C).

o Remove upper left cover (D).
Figure 10
o Open the screws at the detector edge sensor approximately 2

turns.
o Push the detector edge sensor more to the right side.
o Repeat steps (1) and (2).


Repair and Service
(3) Insert a detector the wrong way (red or gray side to the user).
In this way the position of the Cassette Edge Sensor can be cross checked.
Shutter opening and

locking mechanism
Figure 11
(4) Push the detector to the left.

The detector edge sensor may not switch, then no sound may be audible.
Evaluation:
If the sensor does not switch and a no sound is audible: No further action is
required.
If the sensor switches and a sound is audible:
o Switch off digitizer.
o Open right cover.
o Remove front cover.
o Open left cover.
o Remove upper left cover.
o Open the screws at the detector edge sensor.
o Push the detector edge sensor more to the left side.
o Repeat steps (3) and (4).
(5) Insert a detector again in the right way (black side to the user and the shutter
inside the digitizer).
(6) Check the position of the detector edge sensor with proper inserted detector
again according to step (1) and (2).
(7) Remount the covers.


Repair and Service
Verification (1) Switch on digitizer.

(2) Wait until the digitizer is ready.
(3) Insert a detector in the right way.
(4) The detector should be processed correctly. Otherwise repeat adjustment of the
detector edge sensor.
(5) Insert a detector in the wrong way.
(6) The detector should not be processed and the message "wrong detector"
appears on the digitizer display. Otherwise repeat adjustment of the detector
edge sensor.
Result The cassette edge sensor adjustment is performed.
2.3 Cassette Grabber Distance Adjustment
When Perform the cassette grabber distance adjustment after replacement of the cassette
grabber.
Purpose Adjust the cassette grabber distance, so that it reliably grabs the cassette
in the right way.
REQUIRED TOOLS:
• The Standard Tools are defined in chapter 3.2 of the
• Grabber distance adjustment gauge (part of delivery of the cassette grabber
spare part delivery with order number*: CM+9 5170 5270 0).
REQUIRED TIME:
NOTE:
The cassette grabber position is adjusted with help of an adjustment gauge.
This gauge must be positioned, that the cassette grabber front surface is in line with
the front surface of the gauge.


Repair and Service
MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT:
(1) Remove the Upper Cover, for details refer to chapter 3.5:
Replacements / Repair Procedures
(2) Pull at belt (A) to open cassette

slot (B) completely.
A
Figure 12
(3) Hold the grabber distance

adjustment gauge to the grabber.
IMPORTANT:
Take care that the
gauge does not fall into
the digitizer.
Figure 13


Repair and Service
(4) Check the distance between grabber and grabber distance adjustment gauge.
The hook has to be inline with the gauge.
Evaluation:
If the distance is OK: No further action required.
If the distance is not OK: Continue with step (5).
Grabber distance
Grabber adjustment
distance adjustment gauge gauge
NOT OK
OK
NOT OK
Figure 14


Repair and Service
(5) Open the mounting screws of the cassette grabber.
Figure 15
(6) Move cassette grabber forward or backward, until position is OK.

See Figure 14.
(7) Fasten cassette grabber mounting screws.

(2) Wait till the digitizer shows the ready screen (takes approximately 3 minutes).
(3) Insert an unexposed 35 x 43 cm detector in the ID tablet.
(4) Identify detector and insert in digitizer.
(5) Confirm that the image arrives at the Control PC.
Result The cassette grabber distance adjustment is performed.


Repair and Service
2.4 Couple Position Adjustment
When Perform the couple position adjustment after the replacement of:
• Vacuum Plate
• Traverse Carriage
• Traverse with snaphooks
Purpose Check and adjust the IP Carrier to ensure that coupling/uncoupling of traverse and
wagon works as defined by default.
REQUIRED TIME:
Approximately 45 minutes (including removal of Optic Module and Photomultiplier
Module)
REQUIRED TOOLS:
IMPORTANT:
The mechanical adjustment will be initialized via the service software. There is no
manual mechanical adjustment necessary.


Repair and Service
2.4.1 Preparing the Couple Position Adjustment
NOTE:
For detailed instructions refer to DX-G / DX-M Service Manual,
Chapter 3.5 "Replacements" and previous sections in this document.

Leave mains cable and network cable connected.
(5) Disconnect cable from optic module.
(7) Disconnect cables from PMI52 board and PMI52 Power distribution board.
(9) Remove Photomultiplier Module.
(10) Check, that:
• The traverse is in front of the vacuum plate.
• The vacuum plate is in back position.
IMPORTANT:
Move the traverse manually in front of the vacuum plate, if these
conditions are not fulfilled.
(11) Remount PMI52 board carrier.
NOTE:
PMI52 board and PMI52 Power distribution must be mounted so that
device can be switched on.


Repair and Service
2.4.2 Performing the Couple Position Adjustment
IMPORTANT:
The mechanical adjustment will be initialized via the service software.
Make sure, that device is completely assembled except of Optic Module, and
Photomultiplier Module with light collector.

Digitizer will start in a service mode, which allows accessing the service menu
with removed optic module.
(3) Confirm the error code message with <OK>.
The digitizer starts with error code 14857, because the optic module is not
mounted.
(4) Start the service menu in the local display of the digitizer.
For more information concerning the service software and how to access the
service menu refer to DX-G / DX-M Service Documentation Chapter 3.7
(5) Select <Analysis & Repair – Couple Position > in the service menu.
Service Menu > Analysis & Repair > Couple Position
Adjust Couple Position by selecting replaced module:
Check couple position visually:
Drive Traverse Carriage in/out
This adjustment takes approx. 5 minutes.

Performing Stall Calibration
Checking distance Y
Adjustment finished.
Figure 16
(6) Select replaced part.

(7) Wait approximately 4 minutes till the adjustment has finished.


Repair and Service
Verification (1) Select <Drive Traverse Carriage in/out> in the service menu to
check the adjustment visually. The wagon uncouples and drives down and
back to the traverse. The wagon couples again.
(2) Check that:
• Couple procedure runs smoothly.
• Wagon connects completely into the traverse.
• Traverse makes a slightly move back and forward when coupling.
This should be a very smooth movement.
Figure 17
(3) If the check is not satisfying, repeat the adjustment.

(4) Select <Cancel> to go back to the main menu.
(5) Switch off the digitizer.
(7) Remount Photomultiplier Module.
(8) Remount PMI52 board carrier and connect all cables to the PMI52 board.
(9) Remount Optic Module.
(10) Close the digitizer.
Result The couple/uncouple adjustment is performed.


Repair and Service
2.5 Verification

(2) Wait till the status indicator lamp on the
digitizer is green (= ready).
This takes approximately 3 minutes. Status Indicator
ID tablet.
(4) At the processing station select
examination type “System diagnosis – Flat
field”.
(5) Repeat steps (3) and (4) for all cassette
formats the customer is using.
Figure 18
Result The couple/uncouple adjustment is performed.


Repair and Service
3 Calibrations
3.1 Shading Calibration
3.1.1 Introduction
NOTE:
The digitizer has been calibrated in the factory using a GenRad modality for NIP
(Needle IP) and PIP (Powder IP) detectors with format 35 x 43 cm. This also covers the
calibrations for Mammo NIP and Mammo PIP.
When Perform in the following cases:

• After replacement of the PMT with light collector
• After replacement of the optic module
• Whenever stripes in slow scan direction are visible, which cannot be removed
by cleaning of the light collector with the cleaning brush.
• Mammography NIP detector(s) will be used instead of Mammography PIP and
vice versa (if applicable).
• Scope of application changes from Mammography Only Use to Mixed Use
(Mammography and General Radiology use) and vice versa.
Purpose Remove signal inhomogeneities along the scan line.
3.1.1.1 Workflow of Shading Calibration
ACTION:
Perform the shading calibration by following steps in Figure 15 on the next page.


Repair and Service
Workflow for shading calibration procedure
Digitizer is used for:
1
GenRad or Mixed Use
Mammography only
(GenRad and Mammography)
Use GenRad Use Mammography

X-Ray Source X-Ray Source
Select largest available GenRad NIP2 Select Mammography detectors with

and GenRad PIP3 detector(s), size 24x30 cm and 18x24 cm.
preferably 35x43 cm. Use only one type of IP4, NIP or PIP!
Prepare GenRad detector(s): Prepare Mammography detector(s):

- Clean and Check Image Plate. - Clean and Check Image Plate.
- Erase detector(s). - Erase detector(s).
- Expose detector(s). - Expose detector(s).
Check which IP Type is set in the

digitizer settings:
Mammo PIP or Mammo NIP
Perform shading calibration procedure

with Mammography detector
with GenRad PIP (if available).
with size 24x30 cm.

with Mammography detector
with GenRad NIP (if available).
with size 18x24 cm.
Mammography IP Type Mammography IP Type

and GenRad IP Type and GenRad IP Type
are the same are different
(e.g. GenRad PIP and (e.g. GenRad PIP and
Mammo PIP). Mammo NIP).
Verify shading calibration procedure.
1 GenRad: General Radiology

2 NIP: Needle Image Plate
3 PIP: Powder Image Plate
4 IP: Image Plate
Figure 19: Workflow for shading calibration procedure


Repair and Service
IMPORTANT:
Some Steps of the shading calibration are only applicable for Mammography Use.
See workflow chart on page 24 for an overview.
Main steps to perform a shading calibration:
# Task Section
1 Selecting X-Ray Source 3.1.2
2 Selecting Detector(s) 3.1.3
For GenRad and Mixed Use 3.1.3.1
For Mammography Only Use 3.1.3.2
3 Preparing Detector(s) 3.1.4
Cleaning and Checking the Image Plate 3.1.4.1
Erasing the Cassette 3.1.4.2
Exposing the Cassette 3.1.4.3
4 Performing the Shading Calibration 3.1.5
For GenRad and Mixed Use 3.1.5.1
For Mammography Only Use 3.1.5.2
5 Verifying the Shading Calibration 3.1.6


Repair and Service
3.1.1.2 Required Tools
REQUIRED TOOLS FOR GENRAD AND MIXED USE:

• 1,5 mm Cu Filter with order number*: CM+9 5155 1015 2
• CR Screen Cleaner with order number*: 10+9 9999 1197 0 or
ABC-Code: EQP6D
• Lint free cloth

• Largest PIP and NIP detector(s) that are available at site
(recommended: 35 x 43 cm).
REQUIRED TOOLS FOR MAMMOGRAPHY ONLY USE:

• 2,0 mm AL Filter with order number*: CM+9 5148 1090 0
• Prosat Wipes with order number*: 10+9 9999 1219 0 or ABC-Code: ETRTM
for Mammo PIP
• Polynit Wipes with order number*: 10+9 9999 1273 0 or ABC-Code: 5PCZF for
Mammography NIP
• Lint free cloth

• Mammography PIP or Mammography NIP detector with format 24 x 30 cm
• Mammography PIP or Mammography NIP detector with format 18 x 24 cm
(must be same image plate type than the 24 x 30 cm detector)
3.1.2 Selecting X-Ray Source
ACTION:
Select the X-Ray Source A or B:
A) For GenRad or Mixed Use (GenRad and Mammography):
Use GenRad Modality.


Repair and Service
IMPORTANT:
Do not perform a shading calibration with the CR HD5.0 AEC General
Detectors.
NOTE:
In Mixed Use it is possible that an additional “Mammography only”
shading calibration is necessary (refer to table below).
If a “Mammography only” calibration is necessary, follow the selection
procedure on the next page.
The following table shows the required shading calibrations for the different
Image Plate types and Modalities in Mixed Use.
The symbol “ ” means, that a shading calibration is required.
The symbol “ ” means, that no shading calibration is required.
Type of Image Plates Required Shading Calibration Procedure

used at site
GenRad GenRad Mammography
PIP NIP only
GenRad PIP and GenRad NIP, 1,2
Mammo NIP and Mammo PIP
GenRad PIP and GenRad NIP, 2
Mammo NIP
GenRad PIP and GenRad NIP, 1
Mammo PIP
1
GenRad PIP, Mammo PIP
2
GenRad NIP, Mammo NIP
GenRad PIP, Mammo NIP
GenRad NIP, Mammo PIP
1
GenRad PIP shading calibration is automatically generating a shading calibration for
Mammo PIP (both sizes).
2
GenRad NIP shading calibration is automatically generating a shading calibration for
Mammo NIP (both sizes).
NOTE:
In case only full leg full spine (FLFS) cassettes are available, refer to
appendix of this document. If a large GenRad cassette is available,
always use this one for shading calibration.


Repair and Service
B) For Mammography Only:
Use Mammography Modality.
IMPORTANT:
Follow this selection procedure for "Mammography Only" modality:
(1) Check, which type of Mammography modalities the customer
has in use.
(2) Choose the Mammography modality, which should be used for
the next sections, after the following selection process:
1. If Siemens Mammomat modality is available,
always use Siemens Mammomat modality.
2. If GE DMR is available and no Siemens is available,
use GE DMR.
3. If Instrumentarium is available and no Siemens Mammomat
modality and no GE DMR is available,
use Instrumentarium modality.
4. If no Siemens Mammomat modality, no GE DMR and no
Instrumentarium Modality is available,
use other Mammography modalities.


Repair and Service
3.1.3 Select Detector(s)
3.1.3.1 GenRad or Mixed Use
NOTE:
Perform the Shading Calibration for GenRad or Mixed Use with the largest available
detectors:
• If NIP (Needle-structured Image Plate) and PIP (Powder-structured Image Plate)
are in use, always perform the shading calibration for both types.
• If GenRad and FLFS (Full leg full spine) detectors in size 35 x 43 cm are
available, use GenRad Cassette.
• If IP types of used GenRad and Mammography Image Plates differ, always
perform a Mammography only shading calibration additionally.
ACTION:
Select the largest available PIP (red cover) or NIP (gray cover) detector.
NOTE:
If a shading calibration for GenRad application is needed use a large
GenRad detector. If there is no large GenRad detector available use the
FLFS detector. Refer to the appendix, section 5.1 for more details.
3.1.3.2 Mammography Only Use
IMPORTANT:
The DX-M only performs one type of Mammography image plates simultaneously.
Mammo NIP and Mammo PIP detectors cannot be used together.
(1) Select the Mammo NIP or Mammo PIP detector with format 24 x 30 cm
(if used on site).
(2) Select Mammo detector with format 18 x 24 cm (if used on site).
NOTE:
This detector must be the same IP type that was chosen in step (1).


Repair and Service
3.1.4 Prepare Detector(s)
3.1.4.1 Cleaning and Checking of the Image Plate
(1) Open the detector with the dedicated key

or a pen.
Figure 20
(2) Fix the shutter 1 with both thumbs and

let the image plate slide out carefully onto 1
a table 2 . 2
Figure 21
(3) Put the image plate onto the detector.

The image plate has little hooks (see
Figure 22) to fix the Image Plate.
Put the Image Plate on the detector so
that the hooks are hanging over the
border of the detector. With this procedure
a bending of the Image Plate is avoided.
Figure 22
(4) Check the image plate for scratches and pollution:

If scratches are visible, take another detector.
Inform the customer about the detection of scratches.


Repair and Service
(5) Clean the image plate according to image plate type:

• For GenRad NIP and GenRad PIP clean the image plate
(white phosphor side) by wiping gently with CR Screen Cleaner
(order number* 10+9 9999 1197 0 or ABC-Code: EQP6D) over the whole
surface using a lint free cloth.
• For Mammo NIP use the polynit wipes (order number* 10+9 9999 1273 0
or ABC-Code 5PCZF) and CR Screen Cleaner.
• For Mammo PIP use the prosat wipes (order number* 10+9 9999 1219 0
or ABC-Code ETRTM).
1
White phosphor
White phosphor side side
2 Black tube
Black tube side side
of the cassette
Of the cassette
Figure 23
IMPORTANT:
Do not put the CR Screen
Cleaner directly on the image
plate.
Always put the CR Screen
Cleaner on the lint free cloth
or the polynit wipe.
Figure 24
(6) Wait approximately 5 minutes until the surface is dry.

(7) Verify that the white phosphor side is oriented to the black tube side of the
detector.
(8) Put the image plate back into the detector so that the shutter does not scratch
over the image plate.
(9) Insert the key (or pen) into the detector.
(10) Close the shutter.
(11) Remove the key.


Repair and Service
3.1.4.2 Erasing the Cassette
(1) Press the Erase button on the touch panel

at the front side of the digitizer.
The digitizer switches to erase mode.
The status indicator lamp on the left side
of the device is continuously lighting up in
blue.
Erase Button
Erase
Figure 25: Digitizer touch panel
(2) Put the detector in the detector buffer of

Tube side of
the digitizer. the cassette
• As a result, the digitizer starts erasing
the image plate and the status indicator Shutter opening and
is blinking blue. locking mechanism
• After erasing, the detector is moved to

the detector output buffer.
• The digitizer is remaining in “Erase
mode” for 10 seconds staying constantly
blue. Figure 26
This allows processing more detectors
in a row.
• The digitizer automatically switches to
constant green if no additional detector
is entered meanwhile.
(3) Remove the detector with the erased image plate from the
detector output buffer.


Repair and Service
3.1.4.3 Exposing the Cassette
(1) Mount the filter at the modality:

• For GenRad and Mixed Use mount the Cu Filter at the GenRad modality.
• For Mammography Use mount the Al Filter at the Mammography modality.
IMPORTANT:
Use the Cu Filter only at the GenRad modality and use the Al Filter
only at the Mammography modality. Never use it vice versa!
(2) Expose the prepared detector(s) according to table on the next page.
NOTE:
There is an over- and underexposure tolerance.
The digitizer automatically checks for under- or overexposure and
prompts an error respectively:
• If no error was shown, the exposure is in a valid dose range.
• If an error was shown, refer to the appendix of this document.
IMPORTANT:
For exposure place the long side of the detector parallel to the
anode axis.
Anode
axis
OK Not OK
Figure 27
Exposed area
NOTE:
The entire image plate must
Image Plate Image Plate
be fully exposed! The
collimated field must be
larger than the image plate!
OK Not OK
Figure 28


Repair and Service
X-Ray Source Exposure conditions per detector

GenRad It is recommended to expose the detector two times with 10 µGy
X-Ray Source to achieve a good evenness.
(1) Expose the detector with following typically values:
• 12 mAs
• 75 kVp
• 1.3 m distance
• Large focus
• 1.5 mm copper filter (Cu)
(2) Turn the detector 180° and expose it again.
Mammography Only 1 exposure is necessary. The detector should not be rotated.

X-Ray Source
(1) Remove the compression paddle before the exposure.
(2) Tape the Al Filter at the tube exit.
NOTE:
The adhesive tape must not be in the X Ray beam.
(3) Expose the detector with the typically values:

• 200 mAs
• 28 kV
• Molybdenium source / Molybdenium filter (Mo/Mo)
• Large focus
• 2.0 mm aluminium filter
NOTE:
• If the image is overexposed select next possible
lower mAs setting on the Mammography modality.
• If the dose has to be decreased due to
overexposure, the settings must not fall below
50 mAs and 0.5 seconds.
• The setting will lead to a detector dose of
approximately 350 µGy or 40 mR.


Repair and Service
3.1.5 Performing the Shading Calibration
3.1.5.1 GenRad and Mixed Use

(2) Start the service menu. For more information concerning the service software
and how to access the service menu refer to DX-G / DX-M Service
Documentation Chapter 3.7 "Software menus and settings".
(3) Select <Preventive Maintenance – Calibration> in the service menu.
(4) Select <Genrad X-Ray Modality available>.
Service Menu > Preventive Maintenance > Shading Calibration
Genrad X-Ray Modality available
Mammo X-Ray Modality available only
Figure 29: Shading Calibration Start Screen
(5) Confirm with <OK>.

NOTE:
The next screen that will be displayed is an information screen with
exposure instructions. For more information concerning exposure
conditions refer to the previous sections of this document.


Repair and Service
Service Menu > Preventive Maintenance > Shading Calibration at

Genrad X-Ray Modality
- Select largest available Genrad NIP / PIP cassette (35 x 43 cm).

- Check image plate(s).
- Using the 1,5 mm CU-filter expose cassette(s) as follows:

- Dose 20 µG in 2 fractions of 10 µG (rotate 180 °)
- Do not identify cassette(s).

- Do not use FLFS cassette.
- Insert exposed cassette in input slot.
Figure 30: Shading Calibration short instructions on the local

display of the digitizer
(6) Insert the exposed GenRad PIP detector with format 35 x 43 cm into the
digitizer. The Image Plate will be scanned and erased automatically.
A shading calibration status screen appears in the display.
IMPORTANT:
Watch the information screen for status messages. If an error occurs
or a user action is necessary it will displayed here. In case of an
error refer to the appendix of this document.
Display messages here, e.g. waiting for cassette input,

Scanning image plate, processing data, shading calibration
successful etc.
Figure 31: Information Screen during shading calibration


Repair and Service
(7) Wait till the digitizer has finished scan and erase cycle.
Shading Calibration result will be displayed on the screen.
Service Menu: Preventive Maintenance > Shading Calibration at

Genrad X-Ray Modality
Shading Calibration Result:

Genrad PIP
18 x 24 cm Mammo PIP
24 x 30 cm Mammo PIP
Figure 32: Result Screen after shading calibration with PIP

(10) Repeat steps (3) to (8), if GenRad NIP detectors are available.
(11) When the digitizer is finished, exit the service menu.
(12) Remove the filter from the modality.
IMPORTANT:
If GenRad and Mammography IP types differ, a Mammography only shading
calibration has to be performed additionally. Follow instructions in next section.


Repair and Service
3.1.5.2 Mammography Only

and how to access refer to DX-G / DX-M Service Documentation Chapter 3.7
(4) Select <Mammo X-Ray Modality only>.
Figure 33: Shading Calibration Start Screen

NOTE:
The next screens that will be displayed are information screens with
exposure instructions and shading calibration information.
For more details refer to the previous sections.
Service Menu > Preventive Maintenance > Shading Calibration at Service Menu: Preventive Maintenance > Shading Calibration at
Mammo X-Ray Modality Mammo X-Ray Modality
- T wo shading calibrations are required: - Select 24 x 30 cm and 18 x 24 cm Mammo Cassette.

- One with a 24 x 30 cm cassette - Check image plates.
- One with a 18 x 24 cm cassette - Erase cassettes.
- Using the 2 mm Al-Filter expose cassettes as follows:
- If multiple Mammo X-Ray modalities are available select preferred - Typical settings: 200 mAs, 28 kVp, Mo Source / Mo Filter
modality from preference list. See digitizer Service Manual - No compression paddle
chapter 3.6, Calibrations and Adjustments - Do not identify cassettes.
- Insert first exposed cassette in input slot.
- Repeat Shading Calibration with second Cassette.
Figure 34: Shading Calibration short Figure 35: Shading Calibration exposure
instructions on the local display information on the local display
(6) Confirm the information screens with <OK>.


Repair and Service
(7) Answer the question, if multiple Mammography X-Ray Sources are available.
• If no, continue with step (8).
• If yes, choose the modality from the preference list in section 3.1.2.
(8) Insert the Mammography detector with format 24 x 30 cm into the input buffer
of the digitizer.
IMPORTANT:
or a user action is necessary it will displayed here. In case of an error
refer to the appendix of this document.
NOTE:
The Mammography detector must be exposed at Mammography X-
Ray Source.

successful etc.
Figure 36: Information Screen during

shading calibration
(9) Follow the instructions on the display of the digitizer.

(10) When the digitizer is finished, confirm with <OK>.
NOTE:
A second shading calibration must be done. Follow next steps.
Use cassettes with format 18 x 24 cm for second shading calibration.


Repair and Service

(12) Select <Mammo X-Ray Modality only>.
Figure 37: Shading Calibration

Start Screen

NOTE:
The next screen that will be displayed is an information screen with
exposure instructions. For more information concerning exposure
conditions refer to the previous sections of this document.
Service Menu > Preventive Maintenance > Shading Calibration at Service Menu: Preventive Maintenance > Shading Calibration at
Mammo X-Ray Modality Mammo X-Ray Modality
- Two shading calibrations are required: - Select 24 x 30 cm and 18 x 24 cm Mammo Cassette.

- One with a 24 x 30 cm cassette - Check image plates.
- One with a 18 x 24 cm cassette - Erase cassettes.
- Using the 2 mm Al-Filter expose cassettes as follows:
- If multiple Mammo X-Ray modalities are available select preferred - Typical settings: 200 mAs, 28 kVp, Mo Source / Mo Filter
modality from preference list. See digitizer Service Manual - No compression paddle
chapter 3.6, Calibrations and Adjustments - Do not identify cassettes.
- Insert first exposed cassette in input slot.
- Repeat Shading Calibration with second Cassette.
Figure 38: Shading Calibration Figure 39: Shading Calibration

short instructions on the local display exposure information on the local display
(14) Confirm the information screens with <OK>.

(15) Answer the question, if multiple Mammography X-Ray Sources are available.
• If no, continue with step (16).
• If yes, choose the modality from the preference list in section 3.1.2.


Repair and Service
(16) Insert the Mammography detector with format 18 x 24 cm into the input buffer
of the digitizer.
IMPORTANT:
or a user action is necessary it will displayed here. In case of an
error refer to the appendix of this document.
NOTE:
The Mammography detector must be exposed at Mammography X-
Ray Source.

successful etc.
Figure 40: Information Screen during shading calibration.
(17) Follow the instructions on the display of the digitizer.

(18) When the digitizer is finished, confirm with <OK>.
(20) When the digitizer is finished, exit the service menu.
(21) Remove the filter from the modality.
(22) Remove remaining adhesive from the modality.
NOTE:
• The digitizer records 6 shading calibration lines: Gain 1 to Gain 6,
one shading calibration line for each facet of the polygon mirror
• The calibration file is stored in the memory of the Photo Multiplier Module
(PMM).
• The calibration file is overwritten by the new one, if the shading calibration
was successful.


Repair and Service
3.1.6 Verifying the successful Shading Calibration
The verification of the shading calibration is divided in 3 steps:
# Task Section
1 Creating flat field image(s) 3.1.6.1
2 Checking the image quality 3.1.6.2
3 Only if image quality is not OK: Enclosure delivered with
Compare the flat field with the test patterns. limit pattern set
3.1.6.1 Creating Flat field Image(s)
(1) Expose a flat field:

• For GenRad and Mixed Use:
Expose a flat field with the largest available PIP or NIP detector (if
available): Use the same exposure parameters like for the exposure of the
shading calibration detector. See section 3.1.4.3.
• For Mammography Use:
Expose a flat field with 24 x 30 cm and 18 x 24 cm detectors.
Use the same exposure parameters like for the exposure of the shading
calibration detector. See section 3.1.4.3.
(2) At the NX workstation select examination type “System diagnosis – Flat field”.
(3) Identify the detector.
(4) Insert exposed detector in the digitizer.
(5) Wait till the digitizer has finished scan process.
(6) Print the image(s) or send it to the archive (depending on what is available).
For hardcopy the window should be approximately: 1.2


Repair and Service
3.1.6.2 Checking the Images at the Light box or Viewing Station
NOTE:
Checking the images and comparing to the limit patterns may only happen on light
boxes and viewing stations that comply with the specified installation and
configuration conditions for diagnostic reading. For details please refer to the
respective instructions of the viewing stations / light boxes.
IMPORTANT:
The settings of window and level may not be changed after import of the
limit pattern set.
NOTE:
The slow scan direction is always parallel to the short side of the image plate (except
35 x 35 cm detectors). Due to the hanging protocol the appearance of the saved flat
field might differ from the physical orientation of the detector as it has entered the
digitizer.
43 cm 30 cm 30 cm 24 cm
15 cm 18 cm
24 cm
Slow scan 35 cm
direction
5170enc01.cdr
Figure 41: Image Plate sizes and Slow scan directions
ACTION:
Check the image quality of the flat field for the following aberrations:
• Stripes in fast scan or slow scan direction
• Large area inhomogeneities
• Unacceptable number of white dots
Evaluation:
(1) If the scanned flat field does not show one of the aberrations,
If the scanned flat field shows one of the aberrations,
continue with step (2).


Repair and Service
• Limit Pattern Set for verification of shading calibration GenRad:
• Limit Pattern Set, for verification of Mixed Use and Mammo Only use:

IMPORTANT:
specialist.
NOTE:
See table below for an overview of use cases of modalities, consumables and
verification methods.
General Radiology Mammography

Detectors
GenRad GenRad Mammo Mammo

PIP NIP PIP NIP
35 x 43 35 x 43 24 x 30 18 x 24 24 x 30 18 x 24
General Radiology Cu Cu
X-Ray Modality
- - - -
(GenRad only) 1 1
Mixed use Cu Cu Cu* Cu* Cu* Cu*
(GenRad and Mammo) 1 1 2 2 2 2
Mammography Al Al Al Al
- -
(Mammo only) 2 2 2 2
* = The GenRad shading calibration also covers the calibrations for Mammo PIP and Mammo NIP.
Cu = Use Cu-Filter and GenRad consumables.
Al = Use Al-Filter and Mammography Consumables.
1 = Verification with GenRad Limit Pattern Set for Banding and Calibration
2 = Verification with Mammography Limit Pattern Set for Banding and Calibration
- = Not applicable


Repair and Service
3.2 Stall Calibration
NOTE:
When to perform which stall calibration is described in the replacement instructions of
each spare part.
When Perform the stall calibration after replacement of:

• IP Handling Board
• Cassette Handling Board
• After replacements of following assemblies or parts of it
(belts, motors, gears etc.):
o Locking unit
o Cassette fixation (as part of Buffer unit)
o Vacuum valve
o Connector drive
o Snaphook drive
o Swivel drive
o Linear transport
o Cassette transport (in the buffer unit)
o IP Carrier Adapter Plate
Purpose Determine the optimum motor current for stall detection.

Compensate the differences (e.g. friction, stepper motor properties, motor controller)
of an assembly in series production.
NOTE:
The motor drives several times toward its stopper (detected via stall detection) always
with different motor currents. The optimum current value for the motor will be
automatically defined after evaluation of stopper detection quality.
REQUIRED TOOLS:
Largest available detector
REQUIRED TIME:
Approximately 1 minute per stall calibration


Repair and Service
IMPORTANT:
The IP Carrier Adapter (SM Carrier Drive, M610) may not be calibrated during PMV
(Preventive Maintenance Visit).
Only calibrate IP Carrier Adapter Plate if:

• Problems during idle run of the digitizer occur.
• IP Handling Board was replaced.
• IP Carrier Adapter Plate was replaced.
Required (1) Switch on the digitizer.

steps
and how to access the service menu refer to DX-G / DX-M Service
Documentation Chapter 3.7 Software menus and settings.
(3) Select <Preventive Maintenance – Stall Calibration> in the
service menu.
Service Menu > Preventive Maintenance > Stall Calibration
ALL except M610 & M202 SM Locking (M203)
SM Cassette Fixation (M204) SM Vacuum Valve (M624)
SM Connector (M626) SM Snaphooks (M510)
SM Swivel Drive (M625) SM Linear Transport (M514)
SM Carrier Drive (M610) SM Cassette Transport (M202)
Calibrate SM Locking
Stall Calibration finished:
iRun Cal = X
Figure 42


Repair and Service
(4) Select the required stall calibration as instructed in replacement or

maintenance instructions.
Select "Calibrate all Motors" to calibrate all motors automatically, one after
another.
IMPORTANT:
• The stall calibration for cassette fixation must always be
performed before stall calibration of cassette transport, if
both calibration are necessary.
• “Calibrate All Motors” does not calibrate SM Carrier
Drive and SM Cassette Transport.
(5) Wait till the stall calibration is finished.

This takes approximately 1 minute per motor.
NOTE:
It is possible to use the stall calibration of a single motor for troubleshooting the
mechanics: When repeating the stall calibration three times for the same motor, all
three values have to be in the limit of +/- 3 digits (e.g. 57, 60, 63). If the 3 values are
not within the limit of +/- 3 digits, check the mechanics (e.g belt tension, proper
mounting of mechanical parts etc.).
Result The stall calibration is successfully performed.
4 Performing a Backup
After any adjustment or calibration it is recommended to perform a backup.

The backup procedure will be executed automatically by the digitizer.
To create a backup manually refer to DX-G / DX-M Service Manual,
Chapter 3.7 "Software Menus and Settings".


Repair and Service
5 Appendix
5.1 Changes in Shading Calibration Procedure in case Full Leg/Full Spine

(FLFS) Cassette is used
NOTE:
This section describes the changes in the shading calibration procedure, if a FLFS
detector is used. See section 3.1.
IMPORTANT:
Use FLFS detectors for shading calibration, if no large GenRad detectors are
available! If a large GenRad detector is available use it for shading calibration.
(1) Put 2 detectors underneath the FLFS detector if you use a FLFS detector for
shading calibration.
NOTE:
This covers the area where the detector has no backscatter protection.
Only this area has to be covered, which is used by the digitizer to
determine the shading calibration curves.
FLFS cassette
Area used by
Area used by shading calibration
shading calibration
Put a cassette underneath this area.

This prevents, that the missing
backscatter protection falsifies the
shading calibration result.
Figure 43: Exposure 1 Figure 44: Exposure 2


Repair and Service
(2) Observe important note when evaluating the flat field (see section 3.1.6.2).
IMPORTANT:
If you use a FLFS detector for flat field exposure, the image will be
slightly darker in the upper and lower image area where the
backscatter protection is removed (approximately 1 cm each).
These darker zones also have to be used for image quality
evaluation in slow scan and fast scan direction to verify a
successful shading calibration.
Flatfield with General Radiology Cassette Flatfield with FLFS Cassette
Effect exaggerated
Figure 45
NOTE:
• If GenRad shading calibration has been done with FLFS detectors, the
Mammography shading calibration needs to be done subsequently.
This helps to avoid the appearance of zones with reduced bad scatter
protection in Mammography images.
• The Mammography shading calibration creates a new shading calibration file.
It does not overwrite the shading calibration file of the same image plate type
created by the GenRad calibration.


Repair and Service
5.2 Troubleshooting of a not successful Shading Calibration
This section lists possible error messages.
5.2.1 Underexposed Message
Symptom Following message pops up in the shading calibration client:

Underexposed (too low pixel values for normalization).
Maximum detected scan value is xxxxx*, maximum allowed value is
yyyy*. Please increase the exposure dose and try again.
* This is only an example. In the real message the xxxxx and the yyyy are replaced by values.
Cause Underexposed: Scan Average Level PVI(log) < 2532
Solution (1) Increase the exposure dose with one step and redo the calibration.
(2) Check the exposure conditions, preferably with a dosimeter.
(3) Repeat the shading calibration.
NOTE:
The Genrad shading calibration procedure accepts an X-ray dose
between 8 and 50 µG.
5.2.2 Overexposed Message
Symptom Following message pops up in the shading calibration client:

Overexposed. Please reduce the exposure dose and try again.
Cause Overexposed: Scan Average Level PVI(log) > 63310
Solution (1) Reduce the exposure dose by one step and redo the calibration.
(2) Check whether the Cu filter is mounted.
NOTE:
For shading calibration on a mammography modality the exposure may never be lower
than 50 mAs and 0.5 seconds.


Repair and Service
5.2.3 Dust detected Message
Symptom Following failure message pops up in the shading calibration client:

Dust detected at pixel position xxxx of yyyy.
Please clean light collector and try again.
* This is only an example. In the real message the xxxxx and the yyyy are replaced by values.
Cause
Shading calibration curve with a strong, steep slope
Solution (1) Check if the exposure was really a flat field.

(2) Check the image plate for scratches in slow-scan direction and for dust.
Expose another image plate which is dry and clean.
(3) Clean the light collector with the built-in brush.
5.2.4 Non-continuous Calibration Message
Symptom Following failure message pops up in the shading calibration client:

The calibration line is non-continuous.
Please check collimation and optics.
Cause Shading calibration curve with too strong deviations between highest
and lowest level.
Shading calibration values at the edges are at the borderline.
Solution (1) Check if the exposure was really a flat field:

(2) Check the collimation, exchange the image plate (dry and clean) and redo the
calibration.
(3) Make sure that the image plate was exposed without collimation.
(4) Check the image plate for scratches in slow-scan direction.
IMPORTANT:
Redo the calibration on another X-Ray source if:
• None of the above named actions show success.
• Multiple X-Ray sources are available.


Chapter 3.7
Imaging Services
Software Menus, Settings
DX-M
Type 5170 / 200
DX-G
Type 5170 / 100
This document describes the software menus for operation and service available
via user interface for the DX-G (Type 5170 / 100) and DX-M (Type 5170 / 200)
digitizers as of software version NIM_2000.

Revision Date
Document Title

eq_03-7_menus-setting_e_template_v07
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Software Menus, Settings
► Manufacturer
Publisher
D - 81539 München
Germany
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
the equipment.
the product.
NOTE:


Repair and Service
LIST OF CONTENTS
1 DIGITIZER INTERFACES ........................................................................................................5

1.1 LED Status Indicator .................................................................................................................6
1.2 Touch Panel ..............................................................................................................................7
1.2.1 Erasure Button ..........................................................................................................................7
1.2.2 Configuration Button .................................................................................................................8
1.2.3 Information Button...................................................................................................................10
1.3 Service Mode Button...............................................................................................................10
2 SERVICE MENU ....................................................................................................................11

2.1 Access to the Service Menu ...................................................................................................11
2.1.1 Access to the Service Menu via Local Display .......................................................................11
2.1.2 Access the Service Menu via Web Client ...............................................................................12
2.2 Service Menu Buttons in the Local Display ............................................................................12
2.3 Structure of the Service Menu ................................................................................................13
2.4 Device Info ..............................................................................................................................15
2.4.1 Main Device Info .....................................................................................................................15
2.4.2 Network Info ............................................................................................................................16
2.4.3 Info Counter ............................................................................................................................18
2.4.4 E-Labels ..................................................................................................................................19
2.5 Reporting.................................................................................................................................20
2.5.1 Service Activity Log.................................................................................................................20
2.5.2 Error Statistics.........................................................................................................................21
2.5.3 HOT Report (Hand-over Test Report) ....................................................................................22
2.6 Modification .............................................................................................................................23
2.6.1 Software Installation................................................................................................................23
2.7 Analysis & Repair....................................................................................................................25
2.7.1 Explain Error Code..................................................................................................................25
2.7.2 Calibration Board Position ......................................................................................................26
2.7.3 Couple Position .......................................................................................................................27


Repair and Service
2.7.4 IP Carrier to Park Position ......................................................................................................28
2.7.5 Diagnose Cycle .......................................................................................................................29
2.7.6 Endurance Run Cycle .............................................................................................................31
2.7.7 Clear Relative Counters..........................................................................................................32
2.8 Preventive Maintenance .........................................................................................................33
2.8.1 Shading Calibration.................................................................................................................33
2.8.2 Stall Calibration .......................................................................................................................34
2.8.3 IP Carrier Maintenance Position .............................................................................................35
2.8.4 Maintenance Indicator.............................................................................................................36
2.9 Configuration...........................................................................................................................37
2.9.1 Site Specific Data....................................................................................................................37
2.9.2 Digitizer Settings .....................................................................................................................39
2.9.3 Exchanged Components.........................................................................................................43
2.9.4 Switch on/off HV on PMM .......................................................................................................44
2.9.5 Protection Mechanism ............................................................................................................45
2.9.6 Backup & Restore ...................................................................................................................46


Repair and Service
1 Digitizer Interfaces
The digitizer offers following user interfaces:

• Status indicator: Refer to section 1.1, LED Status Indicator.
• Touch panel which enables access to all functions (including service menu):
Refer to section 1.2, Touch Panel.
Overview of interfaces:
• LED Status Indicator c 2
• Touch panel d 1
• Ethernet connection
(located at the rear side) e
• On/Off switch (main switch) f
3
Figure 1


Repair and Service
1.1 LED Status Indicator
The LED status indicator informs by light signals about the status of the digitizer
as shown in table below.
Description of the status indicator lamp:

Constant
cycle. for erasing.
Blue
Flashing
cycle. buffer.
Constant
and image plate
• Service mode
Constant Or:
Or:
• Fatal error
Red Engineer.
• Warm up / Self-test Check Digitizer touch panel and
• Processing workstation display for further
Software down
• Error


Repair and Service
1.2 Touch Panel
If the self-test is completed successfully,

the digitizer enters the operator mode and
the status indicator is continuously lighting
up in green.
The Standby screen with following buttons is

shown:
• Erasure Button
• Configuration Button
• Information Button Figure 2
• Service Mode Button
1.2.1 Erasure Button
Erasing an image plate has to be done in

following cases:
• If the image plate has not been used for
more than 48 hours.
In this case, the image plate may have
been exposed to scattered radiation.
• If an image plate has been exposed to
an exceptionally high X-ray dose.
In this case, deep layers of the image
plate may still retain a latent image after
Figure 3
standard erasure.
Leave the image plate to rest at least one
day before re-erasing it.


Repair and Service
1.2.2 Configuration Button
Purpose of the configuration button is:

• To re-route images.
• To turn the volume of digitizer
signals and beeps on or off.
• To change the brightness of
the touch panel on the digitizer.
Figure 4
After touching the configuration button an

T
overview of the currently processed images Chest123
Leg456
VAM111
MORL222
PREVIEWSTAT
appears (see Figure 5). Foot789
Figure 5
The configuration screen information mean:

Chest123 VAM111 T
1: Image User ID Leg456
Foot789
MORL222
PREVIEWSTAT
2: Workstation
3: Status
1 2 3
Figure 6
Following different statuses are possible:

• T (Transmitting) means, that the digitizer is transmitting the image.
• W (Warning) means, that the image transmission has failed and manual
re-transmission to a new workstation necessary.
• Q (Queued) means, that the image is in the transmission queue and a
manual transmission to another workstation is possible.


Repair and Service
(1) Click the button to turn

the volume off.
Or
Click the button to turn
the volume on.
Figure 7
(2) Click the button to reduce the

brightness.
Or
Click the button to increase
the brightness.
(3) Click the button to confirm

your settings.


Repair and Service
1.2.3 Information Button
The information button displays following

information of the digitizer:
• IP Address
• Digitizer Name
• Software version
• Name of the primary Control PC
(1) Click the information button to display

the information screen. Figure 8
(2) Click the button to exit the digitizer

information screen.
Figure 9
1.3 Service Mode Button
The service mode button allows access to the

service menu for service activities.
For more information concerning service menu
refer to section 2.
Figure 10


Repair and Service
2 Service Menu
The service menu allows the field service engineer to access the service software
of the digitizer.
The service menu is locked by the standard Agfa service password. It is also possible
to lock the service menu via protection mechanism (customized password). For more
information concerning the protection mechanism refer to section 2.9.5.
2.1 Access to the Service Menu
2.1.1 Access to the Service Menu via Local Display

(2) Wait till the digitizer is booted-up, i.e. till the status indicator is green.
(3) Click on the service mode button in
the local display of the digitizer.
Figure 11
(4) Enter requested data.

Service menu will be displayed in the local display, see figure below.
NOTE:
Navigate through the service menu by touching on the several menu
buttons or options with a finger, see Figure 13.
Service Menu > Login Service Menu
Device Info
User: Reporting
Modification
Passwort:
Analysis & Repair
Configuration
Backup / Restore
Figure 12: Service Menu Login Figure 13: Service Menu Main Screen


Repair and Service
2.1.2 Access the Service Menu via Web Client

(2) Wait till the digitizer is booted-up, i.e. till the status indicator is green.
(3) Start the Service PC.
(4) Open a web browser or the windows explorer.
(5) Enter IP address of the digitizer (to get IP refer to section 1.2.3).
(6) Enter requested data.
Service menu will be displayed in the web browser.
NOTE:
Navigate through the service menu by clicking on the several menu
buttons or options.
2.2 Service Menu Buttons in the Local Display
The navigation and confirmation in the service menu is implemented via touch
buttons. The following table shows an overview of the different buttons and states.
Button Example image from Purpose

service menu
Menu-Button To show a selectable
Modification
(selectable) menu-entry. Touching
this menu-button opens
a submenu.
Menu-Button (not To show a selected
Modification
selectable) menu.
Action-Button To select an action via
(selectable) touch.
Action-Button To show a selected
(not selectable) action.
Pull-down menu 1
To select different
choices.
2
OK-Button To confirm an action.


Repair and Service
Button Example image from Purpose

service menu
Cancel-Button To cancel an action.
Down-Button To scroll down on a

page.
Up-Button To scroll up on a page.
Next-Button To switch to the next

page in the menu.
Edit-Button To edit or add text in the
service menu.
IP Address 192.192.192.192
Virtual Keyboard To enter serial numbers,
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
digitizer data or anything
Gateyway else into the service
AE-Title DXM192 menu.
Hostname dxm192 The keyboard appears,
if an editable field was
selected and input is
required.
2.3 Structure of the Service Menu
NOTE:
This service software structure is only applicable for DX-G (Type 5170 / 100) and
DX-M (Type 5170 / 200) with service software as of software version NIM_2000.
All menus are available via local display of the digitizer and also via web interface.
All screenshots in this section are based on the local display.
Web client access to the service software might differ from screenshots.
Refer to next page to see an overview of the service software structure.


Repair and Service
Menu See Section

Device Info
Main Device Info 2.4.1
Network Info 2.4.2
Info Counter 2.4.3
E-Label 2.4.4
Reporting
Service Activity Log 2.5.1
Error Statistics 2.5.2
HOT Report 2.5.3
Modification
Software Installation 2.6.1
Analysis & Repair
Explain Error Code 2.7.1
Cal. Board Position 2.7.2
Couple Position 2.7.3
IP Carrier to park position 2.7.4
Diagnose Cycle* 2.7.5
Endurance Run Cycle* 2.7.6
Clear Relative Counters 2.7.7
Shading Calibration 2.8.1
Stall Calibration 2.8.2
IP Carrier Maintenance Position 2.8.3
Maintenance Indicator 2.8.4
Configuration
Site specific Data 2.9.1
Digitizer Settings 2.9.2
Exchanged Components 2.9.3
Switch on/off HV on PMM 2.9.5
Protection Mechanism 2.9.5
Backup & Restore 2.9.6
* When accessing this menu via web client, a confirmation on the local
display is necessary.


Repair and Service
2.4 Device Info
2.4.1 Main Device Info
Purpose Show the device specific data configured in production.
Usage (1) Select: <Device Info – Main Device Info>

Device specific data will be displayed.
NOTE:
The Device specific Data are “read-only” and just for identification of
the device.
Service Menu > Device Info > Main Device Info
Type Number: 5170

Subtype Number: 100
Serial Number: 12345
Manufacturer Date: 28 Jan 2010
Software Version: NIM 2010

Number of IP Cycles: 23456
Figure 14
(2) Select <Cancel> to go back to the menu.


Repair and Service
2.4.2 Network Info
Purpose Show the network settings of the digitizer and the hospital network with connected
devices.
Usage (1) Select: <Device Info – Network Info>

Network Info will be displayed.
(2) Select <Ping Destination> to perform a ping test.
NOTE:
The ping test tries to send data to the selected destination in the network
to verify an established connection.
Service Menu > Device Info > Network Info
Digitizer Information:
Hostname: Dxm22
AE-Title: DXM22
Netmask: 255.255.255.0
Default Router: 192.168.2.1
Destinations IP Address Information:

Workstation 1: 192.168.2.21
Workstation 2: 192.168.2.22
Figure 15


Repair and Service
(3) Select a destination to perform the ping test.

(4) Select <Ping> to perform the ping test.
Evaluation:
• If the message “Reply from…” appears, the test was successful.
• If the message “Request timed out…” appears, the test failed.
In that case, check:
o Network settings of the digitizer
o The configuration of the workstation in the digitizer
o The status of the workstation (ping destination)
Service Menu > Device Info > Network Info
Select destination to ping:
Workstation 1 – 192.168.2.20
Result:
Reply from 192.168.2.20: bytes=32 time=1 ms TTL=64
Figure 16


Repair and Service
2.4.3 Info Counter
Purpose Check device-specific information like:

• Hardware components
• Software components
• Modification history (installation, repair, maintenance)
• History of occurred errors, warnings and retries
• Used image plates, cassettes
Recognize failures and reduce the repair times in the field or in the repair center.
Usage (1) Select: <Device Info - Info Counter>
Service Menu > Device Info > Info Counter
Parameter Value (absolute) Value (relative)
1. Site and System Info
1.1 Device Info

Product Name: DX-M
Type-No: 5170
Serial-No: 1234
Manufacture Date: 2010-01-09
Installation Date: 2010-01-19
Figure 17
(2) Use the up and down scroll buttons on the right side to scroll through
the info counter data.
Service Menu > Device Info > Info Counter
Parameter Value (absolute) Value (relative)
Retry 10270 17 5
5.4 Incorrect User Handling
Figure 18


Repair and Service
2.4.4 E-Labels
Purpose Analyze the 'E-labels' to get information about module specific data like module
serial number, last error codes or module specific parameters. This helps to avoid
adjustments and loading of hardware modification medium at replacements.
E-Labels allow automatic tracking of module exchanges (automatic info counter
entries). The returned, defective module has all required data in the E-Label
to make fault investigations.
Usage (1) Select: <Device Info - E-Labels>

(2) Select the desired E-Label node.
The information concerning the E-Label is shown automatically.
(3) Use the up and down scroll buttons on the right side to scroll
through the data.
Service Menu > Device Info > E-Labels
IP Handling
Name of the module

Hardware version of the module
Module order number (ABC code)
Module part number
Serial number of the module
Date of first use in device
Date of last use in device
Module operating hours
Figure 19


Repair and Service
2.5 Reporting
2.5.1 Service Activity Log
Purpose Analyze the logfile of all actions carried out by the service staff.
Usage (1) Select: <Reporting - Service Activity Log>
(2) Use the up and down scroll buttons on the right side to scroll through the data.
Service Menu > Reporting > Service Activity Log
Timestamp – Text
Timestamp – Text
Timestamp – Text
Timestamp – Text
Timestamp – Text
Timestamp – Text
Timestamp – Text
Timestamp – Text
Timestamp – Text
Timestamp – Text
Timestamp – Text
Timestamp – Text
Timestamp – Text
Timestamp – Text
Figure 20: Example log-file
NOTE:
All “ServiceActivity.log” files are part of a backup.
When the logfile exceeds 1 MB, a new empty <ServiceActivity.log> file is
created. The previous one is automatically renamed to “ServiceActivity1.log” on the
backup medium.


Repair and Service
2.5.2 Error Statistics
Purpose Check recorded error statistics. This is used for troubleshooting.
Usage (1) Select <Reporting - Error Statistics>.
(2) Use the up and down scroll buttons on the right side to scroll through the data.
NOTE:
For the explanation of the error codes use the module “explain error
code”. For more information refer to section 2.7.1.
Service Menu > Reporting > Error Statistics
Error Name Relative Count
8704 TEST_MODULE_FAILED 6
10248 CLEAN_UP_RETURN_IP_FAILED 4
10267 FIND_REFERENCE_SNAP_HOOKS_FAILED 2
Figure 21: Example screen of error statistics


Repair and Service
2.5.3 HOT Report (Hand-over Test Report)
Purpose Check the last cassette cycle. The most important events that happened in the digitizer
during this cycle are reported here. When the HOT is performed successfully, the
technical installation (communication and image transmission) is basically working.
It is overwritten with each new scan cycle. Typically it stops with the last successful
action performed, hence it can be used for troubleshooting as well.
Usage (1) Select: <Reporting - HOT Report>

(2) Use the up and down scroll buttons on the right side to scroll through
the data.
Service Menu > Reporting > HOT Report
Date:
Time:
Address:
Serial Number:
Created by:
Journal of Hand-over Test:

Timestamp – Digitizer Action
Figure 22


Repair and Service
2.6 Modification
2.6.1 Software Installation
Purpose Show installed software or install the digitizer software on the digitizer.
NOTE:
Detailed installation steps for a software update of the digitizer are described in
a document which is part of the software delivery (readme or enclosure document).
IMPORTANT:
For software installation a USB stick (checked to be virus-free) is required. One USB
Memory stick is scope of delivery of the digitizer. The USB port of the digitizer does not
accept all types of USB sticks.
The USB Memory Stick delivered with the digitizer is recommended. The USB Stick
can also be ordered via order number*: CM+ 9 5170 0860 1
Check (1) Select: <Modification – Software Installation>

Software Installed software version is shown in the local display.
Version
To install new software follow the instructions on the display or see instructions
below.
Service Menu > Modification > Software Installation
Installed Software:
Board Software Version
PMI Board NIM_2007
IP Handling Board NIM_2007
Cassette Handling Board NIM_2007
Installing Software NIM_2106
Instructions for Software Upload: Please wait!
1. Switch off the Digitizer.
2. Insert USB Stick with prepared Software.
3. Switch Digitizer on to install Software.
4. Wait until the Digitizer shows the READY screen.
5. Switch Digitizer off and remove USB stick.
Figure 23 Figure 24


Repair and Service
Install new (1) Download the latest software from Mednet GSO Library, path:
Software Computed Radiography => CR Digitizers => DX-M => Software
(2) Copy the folder NIM_XXXX* and its contents to the USB Memory Stick.
If the file is zipped it must be unzipped before copying.
(3) Navigate to \NIM_XXXX* on the USB Memory Stick.
*XXXX = software version
(4) Double click on <Prepare_Installation.cmd>.

If the solid state hard disk of the digitizer should be formatted additionally,
double click on <Prepare_Formatting.cmd> instead.
(5) Release the USB Memory Stick from Service PC.
(7) Open front cover.
(8) Plug the USB Memory Stick into the USB slot of the digitizer.
(9) Close digitizer.
(11) Wait until digitizer has booted automatically with the new software.
IMPORTANT:
Do not remove the USB stick until the READY-screen is displayed
on the local display.
(12) Remove USB Memory Stick from digitizer.


Repair and Service
2.7 Analysis & Repair
2.7.1 Explain Error Code
Purpose Check the error codes which are reported by the error viewer.
Usage (1) Select: <Analysis & Repair - Explain error code>

(2) Touch the field “Error Code”.
Service Menu > Analysis & Repair > Explain Error Code
Error Code:
Name:
Display Name:
Short Description:
Description:
Figure 25
(3) Enter the error code by using the virtual keyboard on the local display.
(4) Confirm with: <Enter>
Service Menu > Analysis & Repair > Explain Error Code
Error Code 10267

Name:
Display Name:
Short Description:
Description:
Figure 26: Example


Repair and Service
2.7.2 Calibration Board Position
Purpose Test the position of the calibration board and to readjust the calibration board
if necessary.
Usage (1) Select: <Analysis & Repair – Cal Board Position>

(2) Select <Test Calibration Board Position> to check the position
of the calibration board.
(3) Select <Readjust Calibration Board Position> to readjust
the calibration board with new values compared the test result.
(4) Select <Save new Calibration Board Position> to save
the adjustment values.
Service Menu > Analysis & Repair > Cal. Board Position
Messages:
Sensors missing: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
Figure 27


Repair and Service
2.7.3 Couple Position
Purpose Adjust the couple position after the replacement of Wagon, Traverse with Snaphooks,
Vacuum Plate or IP Carrier Adapter Plate.
Pre- The IP Carrier Adapter Plate with the Vacuum Plate always has to be moved to the
condition very rear position and the Traverse with Snaphooks has to be positioned in front of the
Vacuum Plate to start the couple position adjustments. The Traverse with Snaphooks
may never lay on the supporting protrusions of the Vacuum Plate, else the adjustment
will not be performed successfully.
This adjustment can be performed with PMT with Lightcollector and Optic Module
removed from the device. In that condition the visibility of the couple / uncouple action
is better. Confirm and ignore the error 14857 popping up in that condition (Optic
module and PMT removed) during boot.
Usage (1) Select: <Analysis & Repair – Couple Position>

(2) Select replaced part.
(3) Select <Drive Traverse Carriage in/out> to check the adjustment
visually.
Service Menu > Analysis & Repair > Couple Position
Adjust Couple Position by selecting replaced module:
Check couple position visually:
Drive Traverse Carriage in/out
This adjustment takes approx. 5 minutes.

Performing Stall Calibration
Checking distance Y
Adjustment finished.
Figure 28


Repair and Service
2.7.4 IP Carrier to Park Position
Purpose Move IP carrier in park position.
NOTE:
Park Position (Transport Position) means, that IP Carrier adapter plate
is in lowest possible position.
Usage (1) Select: <Analysis & Repair - Move IP Carrier to Park Position>
Service Menu > Analysis & Repair > IP Carrier to Park Position
Digitizer is ready to be switched off.
Figure 29
(2) Click on <Cancel> to go back to the service client menu.


Repair and Service
2.7.5 Diagnose Cycle
Purpose Run the “Diagnose Cycle” to start partial actions of the device step by step. This helps
to troubleshoot mechanical problems.
Usage (1) Select <Analysis & Repair - Diagnose Cycle>.

The Service Client switches to start screen of diagnose cycle (see Figure 30).
NOTE:
Description of the colored rectangles shown in the diagnose cycle
overview:
• A green displayed rectangle shows the current status:
• A gray displayed rectangle shows the next possible action.
• An orange displayed rectangle shows other statuses of the

complete cassette cycle:
Description of the terms:

• EOS: End of Scan
• BOE: Begin of Erasure
• EOE: End of Erasure


Repair and Service
(2) Put a cassette into the digitizer.

(3) Activate one of the grey displayed actions.
The digitizer performs the activated action.
NOTE:
A confirmation at the local display of the digitizer is necessary wehe
activating the diagnose cycle via web interface.
Service Menu > Analysis & Repair > Diagnose Cycle
Cassette
unclamped
Cassette Unlock IP
cover closed
Open cover
Figure 30
(4) Activate every requested action till the diagnose cycle is finished.
(5) Click on <Cancel> when finished the diagnose cycle.


Repair and Service
2.7.6 Endurance Run Cycle
Purpose Run amount of cassette cycles:
• With scanning
• Without scanning and without erasure
• With erasure and with scanning
• with or without cassette buffer cycle
This can be helpful when investigating sporadic image plate handling failures.
Usage (1) Select: <Analysis & Repair - Endurance run Cycle>

(2) Put a cassette into the digitizer.
(3) Select the number of total cycles by clicking on the pull down menu.
The number must be between 1 and 300.
(4) Select <Incl. Cassette Buffer Cycle> and/or <Scanning> and/or
<Erasure> if required.
(5) Select: <Start>
NOTE:
A confirmation at the local display of the digitizer is necessary when
activating the endurance run cycle via web interface.
Service Menu > Analysis & Repair > Endurance Run Cycle
Total cycles: 1
Incl. Cassette Buffer Cycle yes
Scanning: yes
Erasure: yes
Cycle done: 0
Digitizer Status: idle
Figure 31


Repair and Service
(6) Select <Stop> to finish the endurance run cycles.
NOTE:
The digitizer will finish the current cycle and will move the detector
back to the output buffer.
2.7.7 Clear Relative Counters
Purpose Clear the relative counter that log the operating hours and finished cycles since last
reset of relative counter.
Usage (1) Select: <Analysis & Repair – Clear Releative Counters>
Service Menu > Analysis & Repair > Clear relative Counter
Press OK to clear relative info counters.
Figure 32


Repair and Service
2.8 Preventive Maintenance
2.8.1 Shading Calibration
Purpose Perform shading calibration.

This needs to be done in the following cases:
• After replacement of the PMT with light collector

• After replacement of the optic module
• Whenever stripes in slow scan direction are visible, which cannot be removed
by cleaning of the light collection path with the cleaning brush.
Usage (1) Select <Preventive Maintenance – Calibration>.

The calibration menu opens.
IMPORTANT:
For more information regarding shading calibration and the shading
calibration menu refer to chapter 3.6, Adjustments and Calibrations.
Figure 33


Repair and Service
2.8.2 Stall Calibration
Purpose Perform a stall calibration for a single motor or all motors.
Usage (1) Select: <Preventive Maintenance – Stall Calibration>
(2) Select the required motor (see Figure 34).

(3) Wait till the stall calibration is finished.
It takes approximately 1 minute per motor. For details see also chapter 3.6,
Adjustments and Calibrations. Following calibrations require a chronological
order, if performed separately: First do the SM Cassette Fixation (M204),
then the SM Cassette Transport (M202).
Service Menu > Preventive Maintenance > Stall Calibration
ALL except M610 & M202 SM Locking (M203)
SM Cassette Fixation (M204) SM Vacuum Valve (M624)
SM Connector (M626) SM Snaphooks (M510)
SM Swivel Drive (M625) SM Linear Transport (M514)
SM Carrier Drive (M610) SM Cassette Transport (M202)
Calibrate SM Locking
Stall Calibration finished:
iRun Cal = X
Figure 34
NOTE:
For troubleshooting of a module the final message parameter “iRunCal”
can be used:
If executed three consecutive times, the displayed “iRunCal” value may vary ± 2 digits
only (e.g. iRunCal values 56, 58, 60). Larger deviations show mechanical problems in
the mechanics of the respective drive.


Repair and Service
2.8.3 IP Carrier Maintenance Position
Purpose Move IP carrier in maintenance position.

NOTE:
Maintenance Position means, that IP Carrier adapter plate is in a medium
position. This allows access to the snaphooks, to the connector drive and
to the vacuum plate (for cleaning).
This is also the position that allows access to the screws fixing the slowscan
coupling to the spindle and the slowscan gear box.
Usage (1) Select: <Analysis & Repair - Move IP Carrier to Maintenance

Position>
position.
Service Menu > Preventive Maintenance > IP Carrier Maint. Pos.
Messages:
IP Carrier has been moved to Maintenance Position.
Digitizer is ready to be switched off.
Figure 35


Repair and Service
2.8.4 Maintenance Indicator
Purpose Enable or disable the maintenance indicator.

With this menu it is possible to:
• Reset the maintenance indicator counter.
• Configure whether the screen "Preventive Maintenance required" shall pop-up
if 25.000 IP cycles or 1 year are over since the last reset of the maintenance
indicator. The operator is reminded (whatever comes first):
• Either 6 weeks before the timeframe of 1 year or
• 3.125 cycles before 25.000 cycles
Usage (1) Select: <Maintenance Indicator>

(2) Select <Reset Maintenance Indicator> to reset the time/cycle counter.
(3) Choose <Yes> in the pull-down menu <Display Maintenance Reminder>
to configure and enable the maintenance reminder.
Switch off/on (No/Yes) the maintenance reminder
(Default configuration: <Yes>):
• "Yes" means: The customer will be reminded with "Preventive Maintenance

required" message daily.
• "No" means: No display to the customer is shown.
(4) Configure maintenance indicator individually.
Service Menu > Preventive Maintenance > Maintenance Indicator
Display Maintenance Reminder yes
Operating Hours Operating Cycles
Current: 562 Current: 2114
Target: 8640 Target: 25000
(5) Click on <OK> to save the data.


Repair and Service
2.9 Configuration
2.9.1 Site Specific Data
Purpose Define the site specific data for exact identification of the digitizer installation site.
The data are part of the info counter and the E-labels.
Usage (1) Select: <Configuration - Site specific data>
Service Menu > Configuration > Site specific Data
Site Name
Department
City
Address
Country
Phone
Figure 37
(2) Select field where data should be added. The virtual keyboard will pop up.
(3) Enter the required specific data.
Site Name _
Site Name Agfa München
Department
City
Address
Country
Phone


Repair and Service
(4) Select <Enter> to confirm the entered data.
(5) Click on or to scroll through the pages.
Installation Date: DD.MM.YYYY 01.01.2010
Comment
Figure 39
(6) Click on <OK> to save the data and go back to the menu.
(7) Click on <Cancel> to go back to the menu.


Repair and Service
2.9.2 Digitizer Settings
Purpose Modify digitizer settings.
Usage (1) Select: <Configuration - Digitizer Settings>

Settings of the digitizer will be shown.
Date: DD.MM.YYYY 01.01.2010
Time: hh.mm 12.00
User Interface Language: EN
Installation site located higher than 2000 m / 6562 ft. No
Number of Logfiles 10
Mammography Image Plate Types NIP
Network Settings see next page.
Figure 40
(2) Enter or enable/disable settings.
IMPORTANT:
When switching Mammography Image Plate type from NIP to PIP or
vice versa, a shading calibration is necessary!
For more information regarding shading calibration and the shading
calibration menu refer to chapter 3.6, Adjustments and Calibrations.
(3) Click on <OK> to save the data and go to the next screen (network data).
IMPORTANT:
After confirming with <OK> the backup will be refreshed automatically. This
can lead to little delays before the software continues with the next page.


Repair and Service
(4) Insert USB Memory Stick (if applicable) into USB Port of the digitizer.
NOTE:
The USB port of the digitizer does not accept all types of USB stick.
USB Port
Figure 41
(5) Select <Load Data from USB Stick> to load digitizer settings from storage
medium. If no USB Stick is available, the settings must be configured manually.
Configure Network Data:
Select „Load Data from USB Stick“ to load ADC.CPF from USB Stick
OR
manually.
Load Data from USB Stick
Figure 42


Repair and Service
(6) Click on to continue with next screen (network settings).

Network settings of the digitizer will be shown (see Figure 43).
Digitizer IP Address 192.192.192.192
Digitizer Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
Gateway IP Address
Digitizer AE-Title DXM192
Digitizer Hostname dxm192
NOTE:
Steps (7) to (13) are only necessary in case that the configuration with the CPF-File on the
USB Memory stick was not done before.
(7) Enter settings:

• IP address
• Subnet mask and gateway IP address
• Digitizer AE Title and Digitizer Hostname
NOTE:
For a network without router use Subnet Mask "255.255.255.0".
Digitizer Hostname and title indicate the digitizer in the hospital network.


Repair and Service
(8) Click on <OK> to save the data and go to the next screen.
(9) Configure the destination workstation, see Figure 44.
Destination Network Settings:
Destination IP Address 192.192.192.193
Destination Name nx193
AE-Title (Image) NX193 Port 104
AE-Title (Fast Preview) NX193PREV Port 3035
Figure 44
(10) Click on <OK> to save the data and go to the next screen.
(11) Click on <View network settings> to go back to the network settings.
(12) Click on <OK> to add another destination.
(13) Click on <Cancel> to go back to the menu.
Press OK to add another destination.

Press Cancel to finish and leave the digitizer settings
View Network Settings
Figure 45


Repair and Service
2.9.3 Exchanged Components
Purpose Confirm whether the exchanged component is a module (e.g. buffer) or a printed circuit
board e.g. cassette handling board).
Usage (1) Select: <Configuration – Exchanged Components>

Service Menu > Configuration > Exchanged Components
New Module detected.

- Select „Board“ if only a „Printed Circuit Board“ has been exchanged.
- Select „Module“ if a „Printed Circuit Board“ together with a
mechanical assembly has been exchanged.
New Module Name: Exchange Type:
IP Handling Board Board
Previous component SN: New Component SN:
1234 3456
Figure 46
(2) Select Board or Module according to following table.
Exchanged component Spare Part number* Type of Exchange
Buffer CM+9 5170 6000 0 Module

Cassette handling board CM+9 5170 5990 0 Board
IP handling board CM+9 5170 2150 0 Board
Optic module CM+9 5170 2750 0 Module
PMT with light collector CM+9 5170 3001 0 Module
PMI52 board CM+9 5170 3070 1 Board
* The last digit in the spare part number indicates the spare part revision at release of
this document. When ordering, the actual revision of the spare part is delivered.
NOTE:
Selecting Board or Module defines the writing (=replication) direction
of the module specific data between solid state disk and E-Labels:
• Board: Data are written from solid state disk to the E-Label.
• Module: Data are written from E-Label to the solid state disk.
(3) Click <OK> so save the settings and return to the main menu.


Repair and Service
2.9.4 Switch on/off HV on PMM
Purpose Switch the HV (high voltage) on the PMM (Photo Multiplier Module) off to use the
device with open covers. This is necessary for troubleshooting to find possible
problems during scan cycle.
Usage (1) Select: <Configuration - Switch on/off HV on PMM>

(2) Select High Voltage on Photomultiplier Module OFF
to switch the HV off.
IMPORTANT:
Always switch the HV on after investigation.
Service Menu > Configuration > Switch on/off HV on PMM
High Voltage on Photomultiplier Module ON
High Voltage on Photomultiplier Module OFF
NOTE: With a RESET of the Digitizer this setting is set back to

default (High Voltage on Photomultiplier Module = ON)
Messages:
HV on PMM has been switch on.
Figure 47
NOTE:
By a reset of the digitizer (switch off / on) the HV for the PMM will always be switched
on again.


Repair and Service
2.9.5 Protection Mechanism
Purpose Enable or Disable the protecting mechanism for the service menu.
By default the protection mechanism is disabled.
Usage (1) Select: <Configuration – Protection Mechanism>
(2) Enter access code and license code via the virtual keyboard popping up.
When the protection mechanism is not enabled, the service menu is

only protected through standard service password from Agfa.
Service Menu > Configuration > Protection Mechanism

Enter a valid License Code and Access Code to enable the
Protection Mechanism:
Access Code: *****
License Code: abcdefgABCDEFG123456789
NOTE: Please renew your backup after enabling

the Protection Mechanism.
Figure 48
NOTE:
Obtain the access code and license code for your individual device from the Local Agfa
Service Organization:
• Access code and license code have an expiration date configured by Local Agfa
Service Organization.
• Once the protection mechanism is activated, enter access code and your code
only (not for the license code any more).
• When entered the service menu, you will not be asked for login to the service
menu for the next 16 hours.
• If the expiration date is reached, login with the access code one more time only
and get access for the next 16 hours. After that time the device will block itself
asking for new access and license code.
IMPORTANT:
Logout from service menu after service intervention!
Otherwise the service menu is accessible for the customer.


Repair and Service
2.9.6 Backup & Restore
Purpose Backup and restore device specific settings and information.
NOTE:
The device specific data of the digitizer are stored in a database in the solid state disk
of the digitizer and in the E-labels of the digitizer.
The internal backup will be executed by the digitizer automatically upon changing
digitizer specific data. There is a notification to store the backup manually on a storage
medium.
Restoring of a Backup is required in case the solid state disk has been replaced by
a new one. If the Backup is not restored, the digitizer specific data on the elables will
be copied onto the solid state disk after next reboot. This ensures functionality of the
device, but the device history records (e.g. info counter) will be lost.
Service Menu > Backup / Restore > Backup
Complete Backup Backup single Files only
Select single files (active if „Backup single Files only“ selected):
Infocounter Logfiles
Calibration Files HOT Report
Service Activity Log
Creating ZIP.
Writing to USB stick.
Backup finished.
Remove USB stick.
Figure 49
Usage To create a complete external backup:

Complete
backup (1) Select: <Backup & Restore>
(2) Choose option: <Complete Backup>
(3) Insert USB Memory Stick into digitizer.
(4) Select <Save to USB> to perform the complete backup.
(5) Wait till the digitizer displays: <Remove USB Stick>


Repair and Service
Usage To create backup of single files:

Backup of
single files (1) Select: <Backup & Restore>
(2) Choose option: <Backup Single Files Only>
(3) Select files.
(5) Select <Save to USB> to perform the backup.
(6) Wait till the digitizer displays: <Remove USB Stick>.
Usage Restore a complete backup:

(1) Select: <Restore from USB>
(3) Wait till the digitizer displays “Remove USB Stick”.
NOTE:
It is only possible to restore the backup that was created on this device.
Service Menu > Backup / Restore > Restore
Messages:
Copying ZIP File.
Unzipping.
Restore finished. Remove USB stick.
Figure 50


Chapter 3.8
Imaging Services
Software Releases and Patches
DX-M
Type 5170 / 200
DX-G
Type 5170 / 100
This document describes the released software versions with their features and
limitations.

Revision Date compared to previous version 2.5
2.6 07-2015 Added Software Releases NIM_2407 and NIM_2502
Document ID Title
42271208 Service Bulletin No. 22 -
Announcement of Digitizer Software NIM_2407
50069109 Service Bulletin No. 28 -
Announcement of Digitizer Software NIM_2502

eq_03-8_release-patch_e_template_v08
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Software Releases and Patches
f Manufacturer
Published by
D - 81539 München
Germany
affiliates.
infringement.
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
the product.
IMPORTANT:

Edition 2, Revision 6 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 3.8 / Page 2 of 28

Repair and Service
LIST OF CONTENTS
1 SOFTWARE RELEASE NIM_2014 ..........................................................................................5

1.1 Supported Functions.................................................................................................................5
1.2 Limitations .................................................................................................................................5

2.2 Limitations .................................................................................................................................6
2.3 Solved software issues with Version NIM_2015 compared to NIM_2014 ................................6

3.2 Limitations .................................................................................................................................7
3.3 Solved software issues with Version NIM_2103 compared to NIM_2015 ................................8
4 SOFTWARE RELEASE NIM_2203 ........................................................................................10

4.1 Supported Functions...............................................................................................................10
4.2 Limitations ...............................................................................................................................10
4.3 Solved software issues with Version NIM_2203 compared to NIM_2204 ..............................11

5.2 Limitations ...............................................................................................................................12

6.2 Limitations ...............................................................................................................................13

7.2 Limitations ...............................................................................................................................15


Repair and Service

8.2 Limitations ...............................................................................................................................21

9.1 New features of software NIM_2407 compared to software NIM_2405 .................................24
9.2 Limitations ...............................................................................................................................25
9.4 Solution of PR1304190006 and PR1307220006....................................................................25

10.1 New features of software NIM_2502 compared to NIM_2407................................................26
10.2 Limitations ...............................................................................................................................27
10.3 Solved software issues with software NIM_2502 compared to NIM_2407 ............................27
10.4 Solution of PR1409220001 .....................................................................................................28


Repair and Service
1 Software Release NIM_2014
Type of new Software 1st release

Release Date 04/2010
Digitizer SNs As of 10001
Availability The software release NIM_2014 has been part of device
delivery. Since successor NIM_2015 was released short
after, NIM_2015 has not been published on MedNet GSO
Library.
Prerequisites Service PC
1.1 Supported Functions
The Digitizer software controls and initiates every function of the Digitizer.
For supported functions refer to:
• DX-G / DX-M Service Documentation,
Chapter 3.1 “Safety Guidelines / General Repair Instruction”
Chapter 3.7 “Software Menus and Settings”
1.2 Limitations
There are no limitations.


Repair and Service
Type of new Software 2nd release

Digitizer SNs As of 10003
Availability The latest version of the Digitizer software
(approximately 12 MB) is available for download in Agfa
HealthCare Library, path:
<GSO Library – Computed Radiography –
CR Digitizers – DX-M/DX-G as of NIM_2000>
2.2 Limitations
2.3 Solved software issues with Version NIM_2015 compared to NIM_2014
The following Issues / problems are solved with software version NIM_2015:
1. It is not possible to enter the menu “Queue Management” when the Digitizer starts
scanning an identified cassette. Trying to enter the menu “Queue Management”
might lead to an error.
2. The menu “Queue Management” list 10 buffered images, but stores only 5.
3. Re-routing of images does not work properly, routing destination cannot be
updated afterwards.
4. After confirmation of error messages like “unknown format” the Digitizer hangs.


Repair and Service
Type of new Software 3rd release
Release Date • DX-G Type 5170/100: 08/2010

• DX-M Type 5170/200: 07/2010
Digitizer SNs • DX-G Type 5170/100 as of SN 1250
• DX-M Type 5170/200 as of as of 10023
Availability The latest version of the Digitizer software (approximately 12
MB) is available for download in Agfa HealthCare Library,
path:
<Computed Radiography – CR Digitizers –
DX-M/DX-G as of NIM_2000>
3.2 Limitations


Repair and Service
The following list shows Issues and problems that are solved since
Digitizer software version NIM_2015.
1. The display may flicker due to an insufficient refresh rate.
2. A stripe may occur next to the button on the local GUI (graphical user interface).
3. Drag functionality of scroll bar is not available.
4. Sometimes the icon in the upper left corner may be distorted and a black square
(1 cm by 1 cm) appears in the upper left corner.
5. The Digitizer hangs sporadically during start-up and displays the "Digitizer
Information" screen.
6. The infocounter is not structured along the modules (e.g. entire device etc.).
7. The screen "Main Device Info" is partly not available.
8. The functionality to clear relative counters is implemented in the menu tree
"Modifications" instead of "Analysis and Repair".
9. Operating hours and operating cycles is standing on "0" and not increased.
10. The "target" values are wrong (should be: operating cycles: 25000, operating
hours: 8760).
11. The arrow buttons in the re-routing screen work as scroll page up/down.
12. The error history is not available in the infocounter. Errors are recorded, but have
to be looked up at "Cycles between Failures".
13. If a cassette is inserted wrong in the buffer (e.g. upside down), the device retries
correct positioning. If a 15 x 30 cm is inserted wrong and only one other small
cassette (18 x 24 cm or 24 x 30 cm) is behind, the movement of the reposition-
cycle on the 15 x 30 cm format is that strong that the cassette may fall out of the
input buffer.
14. Sometimes the Digitizer shows "fatal error" message, when the destination is
pinged.
15. The first character entered via the local GUI is not displayed. It appears, when the
second character is entered.
16. The calibration modus is still active after leaving the calibration modus via
<Cancel>. A restart of the Digitizer is required to leave the calibration modus.
17. If more than 1 PCB is exchanged at a time, only one is listed in the dialogue of
"exchanged components" for selection by the FSE.
18. Red and blue colours of user interface screens are mixed up.
19. The result screen of the calibrations is not showing all valid calibrations, but acts
like a list of calibrations to be done (kind of task list).


Repair and Service
20. There is no message on the local GUI on duration of long lasting actions during
the endurance run.
21. Result screen does not reflect the Digitizer settings for Mammo PIP / NIP.
22. Result screen of shading calibration does not display 24 x 30 cm Mammo NIP.
23. Installation date cannot be set.
24. Counter for image plate type does not increment.
25. Scroll bar in infocounter screen not working properly.
26. After stall calibration (option "All except M610 & M202") the cassette shaft remains
opened. When the Digitizer is restarted, it does not complete the selftest
successfully due to light incidence.
27. Result of Stall calibration of stepper motor cassette transport is not displayed.
28. Maintenance indicator: “Operating hours” and “Cycles” are empty.
29. No feedback message to FSE upon activation / deactivation of protection
mechanism.
30. Sometimes the Digitizer does not indicate the Service Mode in the status indicator.
31. No meaningful description in error 10245.
32. Beep on local display doesn't correspond to take over of entry.
33. Implementation of arrows in rerouting screen not according to specifications.
34. Navigating in the Service GUI the buttons are displayed without text.
35. If an IP without 2D-calibration is entered, the Digitizer is going into “fatal error”
message.
36. User is not recorded in service activity log.
37. Some buttons in the diagnose cycle are missing on the local GUI.
38. After 10 scanned images the error message "Image queue full. Please wait." pops
up (e.g. if Ethernet is disconnected). After reconnection a “fatal error” message
occurs during image transmission.
39. Device log files are not included in the backup.
40. When a “fatal error” message is displayed the main menu screen keeps partly
visible which is very confusing.
41. When the HOT report is selected for a backup to be copied to USB stick, the HOT
report is not copied to the stick.
42. After an unsuccessful shading calibration due to overexposure, the retry is aborted
with the message "Cassette not identified. Indentify the cassette".
43. After saving the calibration board position, the Digitizer does not ask to refresh the
external backup.


Repair and Service
Type of new Software 4th release

Digitizer SNs • DX-G Type 5170 / 100 with SN 1306
• DX-G Type 5170 / 100 as of SN 1308
• DX-M Type 5170 / 200 with SN 10091, 10094, 10096
• DX-M Type 5170 / 200 as of SN 10101
Availability The latest version of the Digitizer software (approximately 12
MB) is available for download in Agfa HealthCare Library,
path:
<GSO Library – Computed Radiography –
4.2 Limitations


Repair and Service
1. The first image after rerouting does not have fast preview on NX station.
2. If images are queued in the Digitizer (e.g. destination is not available) and Digitizer
is rebooted, the destination of all images is empty after reboot and instead of the
Cassette ID "abcdef" is shown.
3. Missing erasure dose calibrations on the PMM do not lead to an error code, but
the device is standing with status indicator red.
4. MTF-edges of AutoQC2 images are not smooth.
5. The function "Laser Beam Adjustment" in the service client does not work as
intended. Error Code 10767 appears and Digitizer stops working.
6. Wrong scan resolution for CR Mammography System Diagnosis: All images in this
examgroup are scanned in 100 micron instead of 50 micron. For more information
refer to Agfa HealthCare Library, Path:
<Computed Radiography => CR Mammography Systems =>
CR Mammo Solution (DX-M) => Service Bulletin =>
CR Mammography Solution DX-M - Service Bulletin No. 04 - System Diagnosis
Mammo Images are scanned in 100 µm Mode - Install modified Exam Tree >


Repair and Service
Release Date Software NIM_2204 was only used for internal use.
Since successor NIM_2205 was released short after,
NIM_2204 has not been published on MedNet GSO Library.
Digitizer SNs Software NIM_2204 was only used for internal use.
Since successor NIM_2205 was released short after,
NIM_2204 has not been installed on delivered Digitizers.
(approximately 12 MB) is available for download in the Agfa
<Computed Radiography –
NOTE:
The software NIM_2205 adds the snaphook adjustment functionality to the
software. For more information refer to the DX-M SB No. 11 “Announcement of
Digitizer Software NIM_2205 and Snaphook Adjustment“.
5.2 Limitations
There are no issues and problems that are solved since



Repair and Service

Digitizer SNs • DX-G Type 5170 / 100 with SN 1448 and as of SN 1451
• DX-M Type 5170 / 200 as of SN 10199
HealthCare Library Library, path:
6.2 Limitations


Repair and Service
1. Device halts without error message during endurance run, see HQ_1010270001.
2. Status indicator remains green constant and no error message is displayed, when
the Ethernet is disconnect during the display of the preview.
3. USB flash drive not readable by Digitizer due to bad partitioning by the USB stick
vendor. Workaround: Format USB flash drive in the Digitizer.
4. Cure of error code 1072 is mentioning "IP handling board", but correct is "Cassette
handling board”.


Repair and Service

Digitizer SNs • DX-G Type 5170 / 100 with SN 1581
• DX-M Type 5170 / 200 as of SN 10405
7.2 Limitations


Repair and Service
1. Screen "Reporting/Error Statistics" not available.

Workaround: Infocounter has to be consulted.
2. If the cassette in input buffer is inserted wrong, a message is displayed after failing
repositioning. After removal of cassette and click on confirm on the appearing
message, the Digitizer is going in standby, status indicator is green constant and
the next cassette is not scanned. Workaround: Reboot the Digitizer.
3. After switching the language successfully from English to German, the text on the
buttons date, time stamp and error number "Error xxx" are still in English.
4. The detector format is listed wrong in the HOT report.
5. The button to jump to "Error explanation" directly from within the error message on
the local GUI is not working.
6. The reset of relative infocounters is not logged in the Service Activity Log.
7. More than 10 log files may exist although only 10 log files are configured in the
Digitizer settings to be kept.
8. The error message popping up upon an exchanged component, hints to "Service
Client" which does not exist anymore.
9. Instead of an error message which reflects the self test of the linear transport, a
message "The self test light barrier traverse locked on carriage failed" is displayed.
10. During shading calibration, the error message with respect to vignetting is not
displayed.
11. The sequence of the login screens is not according to the specifications.
12. Maintenance indicator: Target set by default to 12.000 cycles instead of 25.000
cycles.
13. CPF file from USB stick is taken over, but new settings not displayed. Values are
updated after reboot. Reboot should be demanded by display to the FSE.
14. Upon entries in the Digitizer settings the device is reacting slowly. This is not a real
bug, but due to the automatic update of the backup internally.
15. Squares at the end of line of messages on the local GUI.
16. Site specific data are not taken over.
17. Infocounter: MCBM should be 25.000 instead of 30.000.
18. Line break in local display is wrong. This is a technical limitation of display width.
Display on web GUI is OK”.
19. Drop down list for E-Labels is very small.


Repair and Service
20. Scroll bar in service activity log not working properly.

21. HOT report file cannot be saved directly. It is only generated on USB stick via
Backup / Single files.
22. Clear relative counters are now in "Preventive Maintenance", should be in
"Analysis and repair".
23. Button size of scroll bar sometimes smaller than specified.
24. The log level cannot be set.
25. If a wrongly inserted cassette (i.e. upside down) is detected at start-up, the
message "Empty cassette found at start-up. Remove cassette." is displayed.
26. Ethernet disconnected during scan: No corresponding error message.
27. If the cover for closing of the cassette slot is not closed when the device is booting,
an error 10752 is reported. The device is not booting since the light incidence is
tested before starting the mechanical initialization.
Workaround: Close cover manually.
28. Text on Digitizer local display is too wide in some lines, may only be visible
partially.
29. 2 equal error messages <Image plate calibration not available. Possible reduced
image quality. Please contact service.> with 2 different error codes are shown
(Error 22600 and Error 22568) if 2D-calibration is missing on the cassette.
30. When switching between Mammo NIP and Mammo PIP, the Digitizer Software
may crash
31. No entry in "Reporting -> Error Statistics" is available.
32. Sending ping commands to configured destinations via the Service GUI ("Device
Info" -> "Network Info", button "Ping Destination") results in a “fatal error”
message.
33. After the installation there is no actual backup file saved to the Digitizer's compact
flash card.
34. Error message 10766 "Image Plate factor out of range": No reason, no meaning
and no cure I available in the Digitizer software.
35. When the Digitizer is switched off during writing into the infocounter, the
infocounter file gets corrupted. This causes a System Error.
Workaround: Infocounter file (icn.txt and icn.dat) must be deleted manually.
36. In the maintenance indicator screen "current cycles" the absolute counters are
displayed instead of the relative ones.
37. Service menu is accessible despite of refused access code (in case that protection
mechanism is activated).
38. After unsuccessful retries to fix the IP at the stage no user message with confirm
button is displayed in order to release the cassette, but the device remains with
status indicator red constant. Reboot necessary.


Repair and Service
39. In several screens the confirm button may not be visible. The Digitizer "hangs".
A reboot is necessary.
40. Error 8717 may appear, when cassette opener is in the open position during
machine boot-up. A reboot is necessary.
41. Stall calibrations are not accessible within the service menu, if the Digitizer is in an
error condition.
42. Although the fixer doesn't find a stop, the device is booting and going into status
idle (status indicator green).
43. Error 16915 appears and is misleading. The root cause is the connector, that
doesn't find its stop.
44. Error 8714 appears and is misleading. Root cause is a broken welding of the
snaphook drive in this case.
45. Cure of error 8717 mentions the IP Handling Board should be Cassette Handling
Board instead.
46. Sporadically error 10240 appears during endurance run and is not reproducible.
47. If the control light barriers for the snaphooks don't detect the successful
engagement of the snaphooks with the IP after 2 retries (holes get uncovered), the
device doesn't go into error condition. With NIM_2311 or higher this check is
omitted.
48. Although the locker doesn't find a stop, the device is booting and going into status
idle (status indicator green).
49. Error Code 1072 "Cannot execute command 'getFirmwareVersion' on the
TagReader." wrongly names IP-Handling Board as possible root cause, should be
the Cassette Handling Board instead.
50. Error texts with a length > 511 digits are shortened displayed. This appears with
following error code texts: 10256, 10316, 10317, 10318, 10761, 12322, 14857
Workaround: Use the file "Errors.csv" to lookup the error codes.
51. The Service Web Interface is only partly implemented.
52. If the error code 10243 pops up "ERASURE_UNIT_NOT_OPERATIONAL", the
error text should also mention the power supply number 2 as possible root cause.
53. Error Code 10768 does not come up and blocks the Digitizer, although parameters
for afterglow correction are missing.
54. Stall calibration of snaphook drive is possible although light barrier version of the
snaphook drive is used. This may even damage the snaphook drive! Do not use
this function, nor use "calibrate all motors". Perform stall calibration separately.
55. Nimbus password is not working for login.
The portex password has to be used instead.
56. The DX-G is unable to boot, error code 22016 pops up. Due to wrong data format
used, the Digitizer cannot deal with umlauts (e.g. entered via webinterface in the
site specific data).


Repair and Service
57. Sporadically not the complete user messages is displayed, but some letters are
cut off.
58. Adding a destination via the Web Interface, the Digitizer goes into Fatal System
Error upon clicking the "OK" button. Workaround: Use the CPF file to configure the
destinations.
59. After the stall of "All except M610 & M202" the Digitizer must be restarted, also to
continue with further stall calibrations like stall calibration of "M610".
60. Unsuccessful calibration lines are stored. Warning message on reduced image
quality doesn't come up.
61. Maintenance indicator: although configured to display message to the customer,
no message pops up that maintenance is due or overdue.
62. Error Code 16994 appears, if FLFS images have been scanned and Image Plates
smaller than 35x43cm should be erased subsequently.
Workaround: Restart Digitizer.
63. Sporadically the connector bolts may be still connected to the buffer unit during
scanning: Potentially this can lead to image distortions.
64. When calibrating with a Mammography x-ray source, which is vignetting, the
message "dust detected" occurs instead of "modality is vignetting".
65. Depending on the line break the last word in some messages may not appear in
the display.
66. Instruction on solution for error code 8717 is partly incorrect.
"Cure 1: Redo stall calibration 3 times. Check values for consistency (+/- 2 digits)."
makes no sense as the drive is controlled by light barriers.
67. Calibration board position: During test "Check Cal Sensors" the message "Missing
Sensor: 18" may appear depending on mechanical tolerances. The IP carrier
adapter plate with the calibration board is not in driven in its intended position
towards the optic modul during the test.
68. Replacement of PMI52 Board requires configuration on network settings.
Workaround: Restore backup with network settings or upload CPF file.
69. A shading calibration, generated with 35cm x 35cm is not accepted for smaller
formats as this format is the only one with different left border ("Phosphor-to-scan
border").
70. The snaphook position adjustment is only possible via the web-interface.
71. The calibration lines for the shading calibration and the erasure dose calibration
are stored on the PMM. The shading calibration lines are redundantly stored on
the PMI52 with its CF card. Upon inconsistency the data on the PMM gets lost and
the calibration lines from the PMI52 with its CF card are re-written to the PMM.
As there are no erasure dose calibration lines stored, they are missing after the
re-write process. Errors 2106 or 21504 may appear. Workaround: Replace PMM.


Repair and Service
72. Sporadically the stall calibration "SM Cassette Transport (M202)” fails.
Workaround: Repeat calibration while pushing the cassette on the upper right
corner towards the buffer.
73. Cure of error 10290 mentions instructs to repeat the stall calibration.
The slow scan drive is not controlled via stall calibration.
74. When an empty cassette is detected, the appearing text for the user is truncated.
75. For long patient names, the queue status of the Digitizer is not readable (the
column with the characters T(ransmitting), W(aiting) or Q(ueing) is not visible
anymore).
76. Service menu locks up, when locking up error code 10317.
77. Corrupted infocounter file causes the device to crash during boot.
78. Locker movement “unlockIP” does not run with new screw.
79. Image “abcdef” in image queue is not transferred after restart.
80. Touchscreen does not work after pushing the “configuration button”
81. Error Code 13924: The calibration of the fixer failed.
82. Backup does not contain logfiles.


Repair and Service

Digitizer SNs • DX-G Type 5170 / 100 as of SN 2086

• DX-M Type 5170 / 200 as of SN 10940
<Computed Radiography => CR Digitizers =>
DX-M/DX-G as of NIM_2000 => Software>
Alternatively download the software directly from the global
secure FTP server using an FTP client. For details see
Service Information Bulletin “Global Secure FTP Server-
Imaging Services Software Download”, DD+DIS114.12E.
The Digitizer Software NIM_2405 is also available on USB
flash drive, combined with “Limit Pattern” and “Logfile-
Collector”, order number*: CM+9 5170 0760 7
* The last digit in the spare part number indicates the spare part revision at release of this document.
When ordering, the current revision of the spare part is delivered.
8.2 Limitations


Repair and Service
The following list shows issues and problems that are solved since
1. If an IP is found during startup the error code 16934 (“Empty cassette found”)
appears although the IP is in the cassette.
2. Line break in local display is wrong.
3. Sporadically the cassette is released although the IP is not transported into the
cassette and fixed there.
4. Device halts without error message during endurance run.
5. Cure of error code 1072 is mentioning "IP Handling Board", but correct is
"Cassette Handling Board".
6. Web interface: Entering umlauts in the site specific data results in a not readable
site name within the infocounter.
7. Sporadically the Digitizer stops with error code 10773 caused by a wrong offset
measurement.
Workaround: Reboot Digitizer to see if the error persists.
8. For DX-M Mobile only:
The <Lorry> button for mobile application overlaps partially with the <CANCEL>
button in the view showing the images for rerouting.
9. Content of elabels are not recorded in the infocounter.
10. The result of the stall calibration "linear transport" is displayed incompletely on the
local display.
11. The user name is not recorded in the HOT report.
12. Installation wizard is not working with web interface.
13. Installation wizard is not using default IP address 192.192.192.192 upon selection
to work with default values. Instead it uses the existing IP address that the
Digitizer was working with before starting the installation wizard.
14. Function "Analysis and repair / couple position" is not implemented in the web
interface.
15. Function "Preventive Maintenance / IP Carrier to Maintenance Position" is not
implemented in the web interface.
16. Although DX-G is a GenRad device only, menu point "Mammography image plate
type" is displayed. Selection box is not available.
17. HV must be switched off manually before running a diagnose cycle via the local
display with front cover taken off. This is not necessary when the diagnose cycle is
started via the web interface.


Repair and Service
18. Stall calibration linear transport sporadically detects 2nd ball bearing as end
position. This might lead to error 1253 "The feeder / wagon could not be moved
correctly to the stage."
19. Using telnet and "shell" during scan might lead to a warning error code 21558 and
a subsequent error code 10774.
20. Serial number of photomultiplier tube is registered as “mod.serno” in the elabel of
the photomultiplier module.
21. Software does not response an error during failing stall calibration Swivel drive
(e.g. belt broken, sprocket slipping). Same error condition during bootup is
detected and error 10280 appears.
22. Software does not detect, if a non Mammo capable PMM is assembled to DX-M.


Repair and Service

Digitizer SNs • DX-G Type 5170 / 100 as of SN 22413
ex factory
• DX-M Type 5170 / 200
with SN 11711 and as of SN 11715
Computed Radiography > CR Digitizers >
DX-M/DX-G as of NIM_2000 > Software
Collector”, order number*: CM+9 5170 0760 9
9.1 New features of software NIM_2407 compared to software NIM_2405
The new software modifies the following service functionalities:

• Detection of end of Erasure position is optimized.
• The consistency check of the shading calibration line has been optimized to limit the
appearance of error 22686.
• The date of installation is now set correctly after performing the installation wizard and
displayed in the international date format in the Service User Interface.


Repair and Service
9.2 Limitations
• The installation of software NIM_2407 is only possible with USB flash drive.
Web interface installation is not supported.
• Always create a backup of the info counter file before installing the new software.
• It is not possible to update the Software from NIM_1009 (and below) to
NIM_2407 (and higher) just by installing the new software.Contact AGFA Support
if an update from NIM_1009 is needed.
Refer to section 9.4 for solved PR cases.
9.4 Solution of PR1304190006 and PR1307220006
Case PR1304190006
Symptom • Error Code 10243 in logging DX-G Digitizer stalls at 67%
• Error Code 10242 after reboot
• SW loophole may lead to complete Digitizer lockup or error 10243.
• During the lockup the erasure lamp remains switched on. Thermal damages of IPs
are reported.
Cased PR1307220006
Symptom Error Code: 21558, image transmission problems


Repair and Service

Digitizer SNs • DX-G Type 5170 / 100: Digitizer is out of production

ex factory
• DX-M Type 5170 / 200
with SN 11925 and as of SN 11927
Computed Radiography > CR Digitizers >
DX-M/DX-G as of NIM_2000 > Software>
Collector”, order number*: CM+6130501
10.1 New features of software NIM_2502 compared to NIM_2407
Software NIM_2502 provides following new features:

• Support for scanning in 50μ mode with GenRad NIP (Extremities) cassettes
• Support of larger images and multiple instances per series


Repair and Service
10.2 Limitations
• An upgrade via web interface is not possible from NIM_20xx, NIM_21xx.

NIM_22xx and NIM_2311. When upgrading from one of these versions install via
USB Flash Drive.
• Always create a backup of the info counter file before installing the new software.
• It is not possible to update the Software from NIM_1009 (and below) to
NIM_2502 (and higher) just by installing the new software. Contact AGFA
Support if an update from NIM_1009 is needed.
10.3 Solved software issues with software NIM_2502 compared to NIM_2407
The following list shows issues that are solved since

1. Improved indication of the Digitizer installation date:

The displays of the Digitizers installation date in the Infocounter, section "Device
Info", and in the Service Mode, menu "Main device info" are now using the same
source of data and may not differ anymore.
2. Improvements and new data entries in the Infocounter:
If the "protection mechanism" is activated, the respective license key and expiry
date are now shown in section 1.7 License Info of the Infocounter.
3. The explanation (meaning, reason, cure) of the error code 10761 has been
improved.
4. If the "protection mechanism" is not activated, the software will automatically exit
(logout) the Service Mode after 15 minutes of inactivity.
5. If the service menu Shading Calibration is started via Browser (Service mode of
the Digitizer is accessed via Browser) and the Service Mode via local display is
used simultaneously, a message "Another service activity is running. Please retry
later." is now displayed.
6. The Shading Calibration can now also be performed via the Service Mode on the
local display.
7. In the service menu "Main Device Info" on the local display the correct software
version is now displayed.
8. Error log files, which may be part of the backup file, are no longer restored via the
service menu "Restore". Thus current error logfiles of the Digitizer will no longer
be overwritten by former error log files during the restore of a Digitizer backup.


Repair and Service
9. Improved restore procedure for Service Mode on the local display.

If a backup file from a different Digitizer is detected during the restore via the local
keypad, the message "Serial number of backup file does not match with Digitizer
serial number. Remove USB Stick, copy correct ZIP file on USB stick and try
again." is displayed. This proceeding is now the same between the service menus
"Restore" at the local display and at the Browser (Service mode of the Digitizer is
accessed via Browser).
10. The data integrity of the infocounter file has been improved.
The infocounter is now safe against formatting of the CF card.
11. Error handling of wrong initialized cassettes has been improved.
If a wrong initialized cassette is detected by the Digitizer, the error code 16940 is
displayed together with the user message "Error occurred. Cassette is not
correctly initialized. Remove the cassette and press the confirm button. Please
contact service to fix the problem. Do not use the cassette again before an
inspection".
12. Improved error handling of the slow scan drive. If the slow scan drive does not
reach the home position after last scan cycle, while a new cassette is taken from
buffer, the new error code 17002 is displayed.
10.4 Solution of PR1409220001
Symptom • Error Code “21558” was displayed.

• Image loss during transmission.
Cause Overflow of an internal 32 Bit timer, which causes after 49 days a timing issue in the
software.
Solution • Temporary workaround:

Power off/on the Digitizer within 49 days. A restart will avoid the overflow of the timer.
• Permanent solution (recommended):
Install Software NIM_2502. Refer to section 3 of this document.


Imaging Services Reference and Circuit Diagrams

DX-M
Type 5170 / 200
DX-G
Type 5170 / 100
This document contains:

 An alphanumeric reference list
 Circuit diagrams of printed circuit boards
It supports the identification of plug connections, electrical components and signal
flows in case of repair activities.
Edition. Release Changes compared to previous Version 2.0*

Revision Date
2.1 08-2011  Updated all Circuit Diagrams
 Added General Schematic Component View 1 and 2,
Page 14 and 15
Document Title
Not applicable

08-2011 Printed in Germany Document Node ID: 29342671
eq_04_diagrams_e_template_v08
DD+DIS001.10E Reference and Circuit Diagrams
► Manufacturer
Published by
D - 81539 München
Germany
Agfa and the Agfa rhombus are trademarks of Agfa-Gevaert N.V., Belgium,
or its affiliates.
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
(see Agfa HealthCare Library > General Info > Agfa HealthCare > Publications >
the equipment.
the product.
IMPORTANT:
by qualified personnel who are employed by Agfa HealthCare or one of its affiliates
or who are otherwise authorized by Agfa HealthCare or one of its affiliates to provide
such services.
NOTE:
To verify the latest version of a chapter of the Service Manual refer to the “Checklist for
Completeness” in the Agfa HealthCare Library.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 4 / Page 2 of 6

LIST OF CONTENTS
1 REFERENCE LISTS.................................................................................................................4
1.1 Sensors and Switches ..............................................................................................................4
1.2 Motors .......................................................................................................................................5
1.3 Printed Circuit Boards ...............................................................................................................5
2 CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS ...............................................................................................................6


1 Reference Lists
NOTE:
The reference lists include in an alphanumeric listing all electrical components with
reference to the corresponding circuit diagram for supporting the identification of all
components.
1.1 Sensors and Switches
Number Component Refer to Circuit Diagram

B201 Opener Control Sensor Page 8
B203 Cover Opener Home Position Sensor Page 8
B204 Z - Sensor Page 8
B206 Cassette Transport Home Position Page 8
Sensor
B208 Cassette Pusher Home Position Sensor Page 8
B210 Locking Cassette Contact Sensor Page 8
B211 TAG Reader Page 8
B212 Cassette Output Buffer Transmitter Page 8
B213 Cassette Output Buffer Receiver Page 8
Sensor
B214 Cassette Input Buffer Receiver Sensor Page 8
B215 Cassette Input Buffer Transmitter Page 8
B216 Snaphook Grip Right Transmitter Page 8
B217 Snaphook Grip Right Receiver Sensor Page 8
B218 Snaphook Grip Left Transmitter Page 8
B219 Snaphook Grip Left Receiver Sensor Page 8
B422 Photo Multiplier Tube (PMT) Page 10
B512 Linear Transport Home Position Sensor Page 11
B519 Slow Scan Reference Sensor Page 11
B612 Carrier Drive Home Position Coarse S Page 12
B615 Carrier Drive Home Position Fine S Page 12
B625 Traverse Locked On Carriage Sensor Page 12
B626 Traverse On IP-Carrier Sensor Page 12
B630 Snaphook Sensor Page 11
B631 Stage Sensor (only for mobile kit) Page 11



S203 Main switch Page 7
S206 Overheat Protection Page 13
S207 Overheat Protection Page 13
S208 Interlock Switch Page 7
S209 Cassette Edge Sensor Page 8
1.2 Motors

M101 Main Fan Page 7
M201 Stepper motor (SM) Opener Page 8
M202 Stepper motor (SM) Cassette Transport Page 8
M203 Stepper motor (SM) Locking Page 8
M204 Stepper motor (SM) Cassette Fixation Page 8
M205 Stepper motor (SM) Pusher Page 8
M510 Stepper motor (SM) Snaphooks Page 11
M514 Stepper motor (SM) Linear Transport Page 11
M515 Stepper motor (SM) Slow Scan Page 11
M610 Stepper motor (SM) Carrier Drive Page 12
M617 Vacuum Pump Page 7
M624 Stepper motor (SM) Vacuum Valve Page 12
M625 Stepper motor (SM) Swivel Drive Page 11
M626 Stepper motor (SM) Connector Page 11
1.3 Printed Circuit Boards

B202 Cassette Handling Board Page 8
B411 PMI52 Power distribution Board Page 10
B510 IP-Handling Board Page 11
B610 Calibration Board Page 12
B613 Erasure LED Control Board Page 13
B614 Erasure LED Board Page 13
B619 PMI52-Board Page 10



B623 IP-Carrier Distribution Board Page 12
B624 Display Control Board Page 7
2 Circuit Diagrams
NOTE:
Circuit diagrams can be used for:
 Identify and locate electrical components.

 Follow connections between printed circuit boards.
 Follow up the signal flow.
It is recommended to use a colored printout of this document to support the better

visual understanding of the circuit diagrams.
The latest version of this document is available in the Agfa HealthCare Library under:
< Computed Radiography - CR Digitizers - DX-M>
Designation Refer to Circuit Diagram

Mounting Rack and Housing Page 7
Buffer Cassette Unit Page 8
Optic Module Page 9
Standard Detector Page 10
Scanner Frame Page 11
IP Carrier Page 12
Erasure Unit Page 13
General Schematic Component View 1 Page 14
General Schematic Component View 2 Page 15


A B C D E F
F7.0477.1109.
Supply
tolerance limit +-5%
1 = +28V
From IP-HANDLING BOARD 3 = GND F8.5170.4450.
F8.5170.4016. Display control -P2 -P41 -P42 -P8 BU9D-SUB-IND First
-M101 *33/33 *33/33 *33/33 2 Circuit
Kabelbaum -BU94 -ST12 RD VCC+ RD board
RD 1/4 1/4 *33/33
Sheet7 /2F F8.5170.1480.
BN 2/4 2/4 BK GND BK -P3
M
Sheet7 /2F *4/4
5 4 3 2 1
BK 3/4 3/4 Signal YE -B624 VBEST

Sheet7 /2F YE
4/4 4/4 Touch 9 8 7 6
1 -P4 -P43 1
MAIN FAN -F1 *4/4 *4/4 Touch
Last
1AT +5V KYOCERA/AUO Circuit
-P5
*2/2 VBEST
F8.5170.4250. -BU430 -P1
X #39 #39/40 -P6
Sheet6 /2F -LS1 Backlight *6/6 KYOCERA
*39/39
-P7 -P45
FROM PMI-BOARD *6/6 *6/6 Backlight
F8.5158.4650. AUO
Display
AUO F7.0486.1430.
Sheet6 /1F X can be KYOCERA
VBEST -B628
MAIN SWITCH INTERLOCK SWITCH

F8.5170.4016. F8.5170.4016.
-S203 -S208
2 F8.5170.4022. 2
7A 8A 1/1 -BU346 #2 X
Sheet9 /2A
-43 -BU340 -ST52 -BU3417B
-BU311 -BU351 -48 ACL
+28VDC 1/1 RD 1/9 1/9 1/1 8B 1/1 -BU345 RD,RD X
Sheet7 /2A
11
BK
12
L1 L -BU274 Power Supply 1/1 3A 4A 1/1 -BU347 OG,OG X
+28VDC Sheet6 /1A
#2 -49
1
WH ACN
-BU342 3B
PE
4B 1/1 -BU348 OG,OG X
PE1 -BU278 Sheet4 /2B
-BU309
21
22
-BU350
#2 -50 PE
F8.5170.4022.
-56 -BU340 -ST52
N1 N -BU276 WH
GND 1/1 BK 2/9 2/9 BK,BK X
Sheet4 /2B
-ST39
-45 -BU340 -ST52
-B616 GND 1/1 BK 3/9 3/9 BK,BK X
GNYE GNYE,GNYE Sheet7 /2A
-7
-55 -BU340 -ST52
BK 5/9 5/9 BK,BK X
-28 Sheet6 /1A
GNYE
-46 -BU340 -ST52
+28VDC 1/1 6/9 6/9 X
BK -51 ACL BK #2 Sheet9 /2A
3 Power Supply 3
Base Base -BU340 -ST52
2
+28VDC 4/9 4/9
plate plate -52
WH ACN RD RD,RD X
Sheet9 /2A
Power supply
-BU340 -ST52
RD 7/9 7/9 #2 X
carrier -53 PE Sheet9 /2A
-47 -BU340 -ST52
GND 1/1 BK 8/9 8/9 BK,BK X
Sheet9 /2A
-BU340 -ST52
-B617 GND BK 9/9 9/9 BK,BK X
Sheet9 /2A DISPLAY DISPLAY CONTROL
Mate-N-Lok BOARD
From IP-HANDLING BOARD

See component view
F8.5170.4420. F8.5170.4290.
VACUUM PUMP on sheet 1
We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa-
-ST76 -BU505
tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure
X RD
VDE/UL/CSA Sheet7 /2F 1/6
X BK 1/6 RD
4
to third parties without express authority is strictly
- part - Sheet7 /2F UB

4 2/6 2/6 BK
changes
only with Sheet7 /2F
X
X
GN
WH 3/6 3/6 WH
GND
A
M 01 ECN7000943 20.05.2011 AGHFR DATE NAME
approval
of
Sheet7 /2F
X RD 4/6 4/6 GY
B
NIMBUS Project
Sheet7 /2F 5/6 5/6 GN 0E 41340 16.07.2010 AGHFR USER 25.06.2008 AGBAH
FT-LPS Sheet7 /2F
X BK
6/6 6/6 BU
n-des
General Schematic 5170
X GY n-act -M617 0D 40948 15.01.2010 AGHFR APPR.
Sheet7 /2F
X
Sheet7 /2F BU
0C 40633 16.06.2009 AGHFR NORM Sheet name: MOUNTING_RACK&HOUSING /X
Sheet 3
D1047893.01
0B 40570 05.05.2009 AGHFR
forbidden.
© AGFA
0A 40516 05.03.2009 AGHFR of 9 SH

A B C IDX Change-NR DATE NAME Replacement for F1.5170.4003.
F1.5170.4003. Node ID: 29342671 Chapter 4 Page 7 of 15
A B C D E F G H
SM CASS.-TRANSPORT
BU9D-SUB-IND First BK
CASS. OUTPUT CASS. OUTPUT
2 Circuit
SM FIXER WHBK M -M202 PUSHER CASS.-TRANSPORT
BUFFER TRANSMITTER
F8.9499.4620.
BUFFER RECEIVER S.
F8.9499.4640.
XXXXXXXXXXX
TAG READER -M204 WHGN
5 4 3 2 1 HOME-POSITION S. HOME-POSITION S. -B212 -B213 Socket used in RDE / Production;
F7.0486.1417. YE GN connector open for standard deliveries;
1 F8.9499.5880. F8.9499.5880. 1
-B211 9 8 7 6
( initially F8.5175.8680.0 )
WHYE -B208 -B206
-ST1
-ST1
-ST1
WHRD
WHBU
-ST1
WHRD
*4/4
*4/4
*4/4
*4/4
F8.5170.4460.
Last CAN-BUS-Stecker
RD
BU
max. 250mA Circuit RD
-BU1
*6/6
Supply
-BU188
*4/4
-BU189
*4/4
WHGN
-BU32
*4/4
-BU18
*4/4
WHBK
Supply
GN
BK
-ST16
*6/6
Supply 3 = GND
3 = GND 4 = +5V
tolerance limit +-5% 4 = +5V
3 = GND
4 = +5V #4
1/8 BK
-BU204
#4
F8.5170.4011. #4
CAN-BUS
2/8
3/8
4/8
5/8
6/8
7/8
8/8
X #9 #4
Sheet7 /2A
F8.5175.8660.
-ST19
cassette output buffer LS2

F8.5170.5950.
F8.5170.4330.
Sheet3 /3D #2
1/8
2/8
3/8
4/8
5/8
6/8
7/8
8/8
F8.5170.5962.
X BU
WH F8.5170.4340.
Power Supply 28V #2
Sheet3 /2F X
BK
YE
F8.5170.4016. SM PUSHER
E-Label Service
F8.5170.5955.
extern E-Label
2 Kabelbaum BK 2
#6 Supply
tolerance limit +-5% -M205
M
-BU325
1,2,3,4 = +28V
-BU203
-BU298
-BU445
-BU446
WHBK
-BU436
-BU447
5,6,7,8 = GND ( initially F8.5175.8680.0 ) WHGN
#9/10
#4/8
#4/8
*4/4
*4/4
9-16
1/8
2/8
3/8
4/8
5/8
6/8
7/8
8/8
1/8
6/8
3/8
8/8
5-8
1-4
SM LOCKING F8.5170.5931. GN
-P46
-P49
*4/4
-BU1#16
-P41
*4/4
-P44
F8.5170.5963.
-P14
*4/4
*4/4
-BU202
WHOG
-ST17
WHRD
-P48 -BU121
Shield
#4/8
#4/8
#9/11
#2/11
-P38
1/8
2/8
3/8
4/8
5/8
6/8
7/8
8/8
-P36
1/8
6/8
3/8
8/8
-P43
#4/16
-P43
#4/16
-P43
#8/16
M
RD
-ST15 1/8 1/8
RD
1/8 1/8 BK BK
OG
-P24
MC op. mode select

-M203 *6/6 6/8 6/8 BU 2/8 2/8 WHBK
DIL-SWITCH
WH *6/6 3/8 3/8 RD
Power On
-F1#13
-F1#18
-S1
F8.5175.8670.
Watchdog
-F1#3
4/8 4/8 WHRD
-F16
-F14
OFF
YE BU -BU205 -P37 5/8 5/8 WHGN
1/4 1/4 6/8 6/8 GN
-LD6
-LD5
2/4 2/4 RD 7/8 7/8 WHYE
250mAT Stat. Ind.
1AT 5V Tag Reader
1AT 5V Board
5AT +28V main

3/8 3/8
2AT Booster
3/4 3/4 8/8 8/8 YE 8/8 8/8 YE
4/4 4/4
CASSETTE HANDLING BOARD -P51
*3/3 stall detection LS reserved
-BU114 -P33 F8.5170.5990.
1/1 -S209 -BU5 BN 1/3 1/3
Reset
1 4 -B202 -P20 -BU110 F8.5170.5951. -BU16 -ST1
-S4
3 -BU4 2/3 2/3 *4/4 *4/4
3
-BU437 BU *4/4 *4/4
2 1/1 3/3 3/3
GND
-ST1#1
BK -P21 -BU112
*10/10
OPENER HOME-POS S.
-P50
-P40
-P42
-P42
-P35
Supply
#4/8
#4/8
*4/4 *4/4
*4/4
*4/4
1/8
2/8
3/8
4/8
5/8
6/8
7/8
8/8
CASSETTE-EDGE S. tolerance limit +-5% F8.9499.6540.
3 = GND -B203
PCB - GND connection 4 = +5V
F8.5170.4260.0 -BU116
M32 boot load

-BU472
*4/4
*4/4
-BU190
-BU109
1/8
2/8
3/8
4/8
5/8
6/8
7/8
YE 8/8
1-4
5-8
F8.5170.5952.
Cassette-edge-switch
BK
F8.5170.5954.
F8.5160.4517.
F8.5170.4320. -BU30 -ST1
#4 #4 *4/4 *4/4
-BU192
*4/4
OPENER-CONTROL S.
#4
Supply
LED status indicator tolerance limit +-5% F8.9499.6540.
F8.5170.1460. 3 = GND -B201
-P1 -BU473
-ST1 4 = +5V
*4/4
-B627 *4/4 *4/4 -B214
#4
F8.9499.4640.
1 +28V CASS. INPUT
4 4
2 LED BLUE
3 LED RED
BUFFER RECEIVER S.
4 LED GREEN
LOCKING CASS-CONTACT S.
F8.9499.5880.
WHOG
RD
WHRD
OG
-B210 -ST1 -BU22 F8.5170.5953.
*4/4 *4/4 #4
SNAPHOOK GRIP LEFT SNAPHOOK GRIP LEFT
TRANSMITTER RECEIVER S.
GN F8.9499.4620. F8.9499.4640.
Supply -ST1
tolerance limit +-5% *4/4 *4/4 WHGN -B218 -B219
3 = GND
4 = +5V
-BU191
CASS. INPUT
BUFFER TRANSMITTER
WHBK
BK
M
SNAPHOOK GRIP RIGHT
#2/4
-ST1
SNAPHOOK GRIP RIGHT F8.9499.4620.
2/4
1/4
-ST1
*4/4
TRANSMITTER RECEIVER S. -B215 -M201
F8.9499.4620. F8.9499.4640.
-BU197
-B217 -BU199
*4/4
2/4
1/4
-B216
SM-OPENER F8.5170.5957.
-ST1
-ST1
#2/4
*4/4
2/4
1/4
CASSETTE-IP ADAPTER Z-SENSOR

5
F8.9499.6540. 5
-BU198 -ST2 F8.5160.4750.
#4 1-4 #4/12 #4/12 -B204
2/4
1/4
-BU201
-BU200
*4/4
GY 9/12 9/12 -B220

GY 10/12 10/12
5-8 #4/12 #4/12
-ST1
#4
*4/4
GY 11/12 11/12
GY 12/12 12/12
-BU11
*4/4
F8.5170.4012. -BU196 -ST1
#20 *20/20 *20/20 Supply
Sheet7 /2F X tolerance limit +-5%
3 = GND
From IP-HANDLING BOARD 4 = +5V
-BU195 -ST3
*4/4
F8.5170.5958.
*4/4
#4
See component view on sheet 1

6
6
01 ECN7000943 20.05.2011 AGHFR DATE NAME
NIMBUS Project
41340 0E 16.07.2010 AGHFR USER 25.06.2008 AGBAH
0D 40948 15.01.2010 AGHFR APPR.
0C 40633 16.06.2009 AGHFR NORM Sheet name: BUFFER_CASSETTE_UNIT /X
Sheet 4
D1047893.01
forbidden.
0B 40570 05.05.2009 AGHFR

© AGFA
0A 40516 05.03.2009 AGHFR of 9 SH

A B C D E F IDX Change-NR DATE NAME Replacement for F1.5170.4003.
A B C D E F
Mirror
Supply
1 = +12V
F8.5170.4390.
X
2 = GND
Sheet6 /1F 3 = -12V
4 = GND
5 = -OUT
6 = +OUT
1 1
BOL-SENSOR EOL-SENSOR
-ST1 F8.5170.2980. F8.5170.2980. -ST1 -BU206
*8/8 *8/8 *8/8 *8/8
-B318 -B315
-BU209 F8.5170.2920.
Supply
1 = +12V
2 = GND #25 Supply
3 = -12V tolerance limit +-5%
4 = GND
5 = -OUT 1, 14 = GND (+24V)
6 = +OUT 2 = +24V
12, 25 = GND
Laserdiode 13 = +12V
24 = -12V
2 2
#8
Supply
-LED1
LD-Current control 1, 2 = GND
-BU207
-BU52
#25/26
3, 4 = +5V (+-2%)
*8/8
Optical lense 5, 6 = -5V (+-2%)
-D12 12 = +10V (+-1%)
Variant
13 1
S/26
-ST1
#25/26
-ST4
*8/8
-ST1 -BU50 -BU51 -ST2
*16/16 *16/16 *16/16 *16/16
F8.5175.2920.
LD - MODULATOR
+5V
BU25-D-SUB-IND
F8.5170.2910.
25
Optical lense -ST3 -5V
*12/12
-B320
Adjustment
POWER BOARD OPTICS

+10V
F8.5170.2930.
-BU1
3 *4/4 3
-B317
Service E-Label
-BU211 -ST6
Polygon 1-3
4-6
#3/8
#3/8
7-8 #2/8
F8.5170.2875.
EOL-SENSOR
-BU212
-J1 2/2 2/2 #3 -BU210 -ST7
1/2 1/2 #3 #10/12 #10/12
#2/12
LINCOLN
-ST5
-ST3
#8/10
#2/10
-J5 -P19 F8.5170.2865. 11-12
*8/8
LINCOLN *10/10 *10/10 #10
or
-BU55
COPAL -CN1 -BU54 COPAL F8.5170.2870.
9-10
-BU208
*8/8
1-8
*8/8 *8/8 #8
Polygon PCB
F8.5170.2922.
-B319
4
4
Supply
tolerance limit +-5% NIMBUS Project
1 = +24V 0E 41340 16.07.2010 AGHFR USER 25.06.2008 AGBAH
POWER-BOARD-OPTICS 2, 5 = GND 0D 40948 15.01.2010 AGHFR APPR.
BOL-SENSOR
Polygon with 0C 40633 16.06.2009 AGHFR NORM Sheet name: OPTIC_MODULE /X
PCB LD-MODULATOR Sheet 5
D1047893.01
0B 40570 05.05.2009 AGHFR
forbidden.
© AGFA
0A 40516 05.03.2009 AGHFR of 9 SH

A B C D E F
To POWER BOARD OPTICS

-P2#14 F8.5170.4390.
F8.5170.4016. -BU431 Supply #25/26 -ST75 X
-P3 Sheet5 /1A
-P3
#4/8
X #2/8 #2/8 tolerance limit +-5% #25/26
Sheet3 /2F
-U112 4,7 = +12V_OPT
-BU431 -P3 BOARD TEMPERATURE 6,10 = -12V_OPT
Sheet3 /3D
X #2/8 #2/8 12 = DGND_SENSE ETH -P1#4 -ST70 F8.5158.4650.
SOFTWARE- RESET
HARDWARE-RESET
-S1#12
-S1#2
*8/8 X
14 = +20V_PMT Interface Sheet3 /2A
-F1 -F23 16 = -10V_PMT *8/8
2.5AT 1AT 19 = GND_ANALOG
27,2V_IN U110 27,2V_IN U89
+12V OPT_OK
+8V ANALOG_OK
+12V CAN_PWR_OK
+12V CAL_OK
PMT_OK
+12V HD_OK
24.0V_POL
5.0VD
3.3VD
1.2VD
-LD1#17
-LD2#17
-LD3#17
-LD4#17
-LD5#17
-LD6#17
-LD7#17
-LD8#17
-LD9#17
-LD10#17
Supply 20 = +8V_ANALOG
tolerance limit +-5% -F15 -F24 24 = +12V_PWR_CAN
1 5_1.5VD 3.5AT 1AT 1
2,3,4 = +28V 27,2V_IN U101 25 = GND_CAN -P33
5, 6,7 = GND 32,34,36 = 5_1,5VD MP5200 serial debug
-F16 -F25 -LD12 *10/10
5_3.3VD 3.5AT 7AF 33,35,37,39,41,43,
27,2V_IN -LD1#16 FPGA,/CONF_DONE
45,47,49 = DGND
5.0VD_PMT
-F17 -F27 PWR_Polyg. 38,40,42,44 = 5_3,3VD -LD13
1AT 2AT 46 = 5,0VD_SENSE USB/CAN/SLED0 -P1#2
27,2_IN U60 Motor -LD5#12 Flash boot board interface
48,50 = 5,0VD 2.5VD *64/64
-F18 -F28 -LD14
1AT 2,5AT CF/I2C/SWAP
27,2V_IN U59 27,2V_IN -LD4#12
1.5VD
-F19 -F29
BU9D-SUB-IND First 1AT 1AT -LD1#5 PMI52-BOARD -LD15
TIMER 1s SLED2 -BU1#9
2 Circuit 27,2V_IN U58 27,2V_IN U114 USB_PWR externe E-Labels
-F1#1 -LD16 *4/4
F8.5170.4110.
2.5AT -LD1#4 FAIL/JAVA/SLED3
5 4 3 2 1
27,2V_IN IC1#1 ETH_REC -B619
-LD1#3
9 8 7 6
PMI52_POWER- -P5 -BU177 -BU178 -P1#17 -LD5#2 ACCESS-CF-FLASH CARD
*50/50 *50/50 *50/50 *50/50 1V5_MOD_PLL#2
DISTRIBUTION-BOARD
BATTERY REAL TIME CLOCK CR2032

Last
2AT 24V PWR_Polygon

Circuit -LD4#2
F8.5170.4120. CAL -P1#14 F8.5170.4014.
1V5_MOD#2 -ST69
1AT PMT_Interface
1AT USB_Interface
-B411 Polygon Motor F8.5170.4380. Interface Sheet7 /1F
2 First ST9-D-SUB-IND -LD3#2 *9/9 #9/10 X 2
BOARD TEMPERATURE
1AT 1,2V PWR
5AT 3,3V PWR

Circuit 2 Power Supply 2V5_MOD#2
-LD2#2 F8.5170.4250.
Display -P1 -BU429
-F1#16
-F1#17
-F2#17
-F3#17
1 2 3 4 5
-P23 FL_nCS_OFF
JTAG Interface Interface Sheet3 /1A
-F1
*40/40 *40/40 X
6 7 8 9 *10/10 -LD1#2
FL_nCS_ON
-U16#2
Last -P1#11
-B1#6
Circuit #2/11 F8.5170.4011.
CAN-BUS #9/11 -BU435
Sheet7 /2A
#9/10 X
-P1#3
CAN-Terminating
*50/50
-P18 -P2#16
-P1#5
*16/16
resistor 121 Ohm
*4/4
PMI_POWER- PMI52 BOARD
*16/16
USB 1.1 Interface

-BU504
DISTRIBUTION-BOARD F8.5170.4270.
*50/50
-BU15
#16/17
CF-CARD
-ST6
*16/16
3 -B629 3
-ST68
-BU3
9pol. DSUB
PMT
F8.5170.3041.
X -B422 F8.5170.4280.
X
Solid State Disc
Auto_Cal_LED
Light collector
4
4
NIMBUS Project
0E 41340 16.07.2010 AGHFR USER 25.06.2008 AGBAH
0D 40948 15.01.2010 AGHFR APPR.
0C 40633 16.06.2009 AGHFR NORM Sheet name: STANDARD_DETECTOR /X
Sheet 6
D1047893.01
0B 40570 05.05.2009 AGHFR
forbidden.
© AGFA
0A 40516 05.03.2009 AGHFR of 9 SH

A B C D E F
(only for Mobile Kit)

(optional) CALIBRATION BOARD Sheet8 /2B
-BU384 -ST58 F8.5170.4210. Sheet8 /2B
Sheet8 /2B
*10/10 *10/10
Sheet8 /2B
X
Sheet8 /2B
Sheet8 /2B
F8.5170.4014. Sheet8 /3B
IP-TRANSPORT Stage Sensor SNAP HOOK SENSOR
#9 X
REF POSITION F8.9499.6770. F8.9499.6540. Sheet6 /2F
F8.9499.6540. -B630 Sheet8 /2B
-ST1
-BU365 -ST1
-ST1
*4/4
*4/4
-B512 -B631
*4/4
DISTRIBUTION_BOARD Sheet8 /2B
traverse #6 X Sheet8 /2B
Supply on Sensors Sheet8 /3B
*4/4
-BU8
-BU366
*4/4
*4/4
F8.5170.4470.
1 ON IP-CARRIER S. Sheet8 /3B
1 Sheet8 /2B 1
(only for Mobile Kit)

carrier drive DISTRIBUTION_BOARD Sheet8 /2B
F8.5170.2154.
2 GND Sheet8 /3B
F8.5170.4490.
tolerance limit +-5% #4 #4 3 +5V 1 home coarse p. #5 X
Sheet8 /2B
(A601711.)
4 LOCKED ON
E-LABEL SERVICE
3 = GND 2 GND
SLOW SCAN REF. Sheet8 /3B
E-LABEL INTERN
M32 BOOT LOAD

CARRIAGE S.
(Indicator)
#4
4 = +5V 3 +5V
Sheet8 /3B
(Mobile)
SENSOR 5 GND
BRUSH DRIVE
4 home fine pos
6 +5V F8.5170.4210.
F8.9499.6540. -ST1 *4/4
5 GND
CLEANING
-B519 WH 2 IN 6 +5V F8.5170.4230. LED-CTRL-BOARD
Accubox
*4/4 -BU361 F8.5170.2155.
DEBUG
3 GND
-BU417
-BU368
X
-BU401
Sheet9 /1A
-BU364
-BU364
4 +5V
-BU497
1/12
2/12
3/12
4/12
*6/6
*4/4
-BU9
#4/12
#4/12
2/4
3/4
*6/6
*4/4
BU9D-SUB-IND First F8.5170.4016.
2 Circuit -P19 -BU237 To MAIN FAN
#4
*10/10
-P2
-P20
*4/4
-BU1#3
*4/4
-ST1#1
*10/10
-P3
*4/4
-P24
*8/8
-P26
*4/4
-P30 1/3 1/3
Sheet3 /1A
-P31
#4/12
#4/12
1/12
2/12
3/12
4/12
-P21
1/4
2/4
3/4
4/4
-P27
*6/6
-P29
*6/6
-P25
*4/4
#4/8 2/3 2/3
Sheet3 /1A
M32 mode switch

5 4 3 2 1
3/3 3/3
U16 Sheet3 /1A
DIL-SWITCH
-BU358 -P30 -BU235
vacuum sensor -P10 F8.5170.4012.
Reset
9 8 7 6
-S2
-S1
#4/8 #4/8 -F1#4
+5V o.k.
*20/20 *20/20 X
Option
vacuum plate 1AT +5V PWR Sheet4 /6A
Error
OFF
Last F8.5170.4011. -F1#16 1 shield 5 WH-A-> To Cass.-IP Adapter
Circuit 5AT +39V Slowscan
BOARD TEMPERATURE
2 RD-28V 6 shield
-BU376 -P1#2 vacuum sensor
-LD1
-LD2
-LD3
3 BK-GND 7 RD-28V
X #9 #9/10 #9/11 -P23
Sheet4 /2B vacuum pump -F1#17 4 GN-ndes 8 BK-GND
To VACCUM PUMP
#2/11 U17 5AT +39V Linear Transport 1/10 9 GY-B-> 10 BU-nact
2 CAN-BUS 2/10 2/10 2
Sheet6 /2F X
#9
IP-HANDLING BOARD 5AT +28V PWR
-F7
3/10 3/10
RD
BK
Sheet3 /4B
Sheet3 /4B
-BU375 -P1 F8.5170.2150. -F8 4/10 4/10 GN
X
1,2 = +28V #4/8 #4/8 Sheet3 /4B
Sheet3 /2F 7AF +28V Vacc. Pump 5/10 5/10 WH
Sheet3 /4B
-U21
-B510 6/10
-BU375 -P1 7/10 7/10 RD
X
5, 6 = GND #4/8 #4/8 Sheet3 /4B
Sheet3 /3D 8/10 8/10 BK
Sheet3 /4B
9/10 9/10 GY
Sheet3 /4B
-P28
10/10 10/10
-P11
-P14
BU
-P4
-P6
-P7
F8.5170.4016. Sheet3 /4B
1/8
2/8
3/8
4/8
5/8
6/8
7/8
8/8
1/8
2/8
3/8
4/8
5/8
6/8
7/8
8/8
1/4
2/4
3/4
4/4
1/4
2/4
3/4
4/4
1/4
2/4
3/4
4/4
8/8
7/8
6/8
5/8
4/8
3/8
2/8
1/8
BU377 F8.5170.4420.
-BU453
-BU225
-BU224
-BU282
-BU227
-BU355
SM_VACUUM_VALVE
1/8
2/8
3/8
4/8
5/8
6/8
7/8
8/8
1/8
2/8
3/8
4/8
5/8
6/8
7/8
8/8
1/4
2/4
3/4
4/4
1/4
2/4
3/4
4/4
1/4
2/4
3/4
4/4
8/8
7/8
6/8
5/8
4/8
3/8
2/8
1/8
PCB - GND connection YE SM-CARRIER_DRIVE
BK
YE SM3B_COS2
YE
Sheet8 /1B
F8.5170.4016.
BK
Kabelbaum
YE
YE
BU SM3B_COS1
Sheet8 /1B
BK
YE
PK SM3A_COS2
Sheet8 /1B
F8.5170.4030.
RDBU SM3A_COS1
F8.5170.4030.
SLOW-SCAN
Sheet8 /1B
F8.5160.4516.
RD SM3B_SIN2
F8.5160.4516.
WH SM3B_SIN1 Sheet8 /1B
BK SM3A_SIN2 Sheet8 /1B
WHGY SM3A_SIN1 Sheet8 /1B
Sheet8 /1B
3 3
-ST53
1/4
2/4
3/4
4/4
F8.5170.4010.
-BU354
1/4
2/4
3/4
4/4
WHOG
OG
RD
WHRD
WHOG
OG
RD
WHRD
F8.5160.4516.
BU YE BU YE This connection is important for the grounding concept !!!
WH
RD
GN GN Connection between scanner frame and mounting rack !!!
WHGN -MA500
WHGN
WHBK
M WHBK
M
WH
M
WH
M -5 1/1
F8.5160.4350.
braided 1/1 -6
M
BU
BK BK RD RD -MA502
YE
F8.5160.4350.
-M515 1/1 -3
-M514 -M626 -M510 -M625 -4 1/1 braided
SM-SLOWSCAN SM-LINEAR SM-SNAPHOOKS -MA504

F8.5160.4350.
1/1 -2
TRANSPORT SM-CONNECTOR -1 1/1 braided
SM-SWIVEL-DRIVE
4
4
NIMBUS Project
See component view on sheet 2 0E
0D
41340
40948
16.07.2010
15.01.2010
AGHFR USER
AGHFR APPR.
25.06.2008 AGBAH
0C 40633 16.06.2009 AGHFR NORM Sheet name: SCANNER_FRAME /X
Sheet 7
D1047893.01
0B 40570 05.05.2009 AGHFR
forbidden.
© AGFA
0A 40516 05.03.2009 AGHFR of 9 SH

A B C IDX Change-NR DATE NAME Replacement for F1.5170.4003. Node ID: 29342671 Chapter 4 Page 11 of 15
F1.5170.4003.
A B C D E F
( initially F8.5160.4521. )
F8.5170.4212.
-ST59 -BU328
1/4 1/4 RD
WH
2/4 2/4
RD
WH
3/4 3/4 YE
4/4 4/4 BU
-M624
F8.5170.4010. SM_VACUUM_VALVE
M
BU
SM3B_SIN2 RD
Sheet7 /3F
YE
SM3B_SIN1 WH
Sheet7 /3F
1 SM3B_COS2 YE 1
Sheet7 /3F
Sheet7 /3F
SM3B_COS1 BU -ST64 -BU327 F8.5170.4214. -M610
From IP-HANDLING BOARD Sheet7 /3F
SM3A_SIN2 BK 1/8 1/8 BK
SM3A_SIN1 WHGY 2/8 2/8 WHBK BK
M
Sheet7 /3F
SM3A_COS2 PK 3/8 3/8 RD
Sheet7 /3F WHBK
Sheet7 /3F
SM3A_COS1 RDBU 4/8 4/8 WHRD
WHGN
SM-CARRIER_DRIVE
BK 5/8 5/8 WHGN
GY 6/8 6/8 GN GN
RD 7/8 7/8 WHYE
WHOG
WHRD
BU 8/8 8/8 YE
OG
RD
F8.5170.4210.
-BU470 -ST7
X GYBN 1/8 1/8 F8.5170.4019.
Sheet7 /1F
X WHYE 2/8 2/8
Sheet7 /1F
X GY 3/8 3/8
Sheet7 /1F
2 Sheet7 /1F
X YE 4/8 4/8 -ST6 -BU394 -BU395 -ST1 CARRIER_DRIVE 2
From IP-HANDLING BOARD X BK 5/8 5/8 *4/4 *4/4 #4 *4/4 HOME POS. COARSE S.
Sheet7 /1E
X VT 6/8 6/8 *4/4
Sheet7 /1E
X GYPK 7/8 7/8 Supply
Sheet7 /1E
X PK 8/8 8/8 tolerance limit +-5%
Sheet7 /1F
3 = GND
-BU471 -ST3 4 = +5V F8.9499.6540.
X RDBU 1/10 1/10 -B612
Sheet7 /1F
Sheet7 /1F
X YEBN 2/10 2/10 IP-Carrier
X WHGN 3/10 3/10 Distribution F8.5170.4020.
Sheet7 /1F
X WHGY 4/10 4/10 Board
Sheet7 /1F
X BNGN 5/10 5/10
Sheet7 /1F
From IP-HANDLING BOARD X WH 6/10 6/10 F8.5170.2490. -ST2 -ST1 CARRIER_DRIVE
Sheet7 /1F *4/4 -BU396 -BU397
Sheet7 /1F
X BN 7/10 7/10 -B623
#4 HOME POS. FINE S.
X GN 8/10 8/10 *4/4 *4/4 *4/4
Sheet7 /1F
X BU 9/10 9/10
Sheet7 /1E
X RD 10/10 10/10
Sheet7 /1E
-ST4
-ST1
-ST5
*4/4
*8/8
*4/4
F8.9499.6540.
-B615
-BU441
*4/4
-BU443
*4/4
-BU418
*8/8
3 3
TRAVERSE LOCKED
ON CARRIAGE S. F8.5170.4021.
TRAVERSE ON
#4
-BU444 hochflex IP-CARRIER S.
*4/4 F8.5170.4310. -BU442 -ST1
-ST1 #4 *4/4
*4/4 F8.5170.4300. Supply
#8
*4/4
F8.9499.6540. tolerance limit +-5%
-B625 1 = +12V
3 = -12V F8.9499.6540.
-BU419
4 = GND -B626
*8/8
CALIBRATION BOARD
-P1
*8/8
-B610 F8.5170.2990.
See component view on sheet 2

4
4
NIMBUS Project
0D 40948 15.01.2010 AGHFR APPR.
0C 40633 16.06.2009 AGHFR NORM Sheet name: IP_CARRIER /X
Sheet 8
D1047893.01
0B 40570 05.05.2009 AGHFR
forbidden.
© AGFA
0A 40516 05.03.2009 AGHFR of 9 SH

A B C D E F
ERASURE LED BOARD
1 ERASURE LED BOARD 1
F8.5170.3560.
-B614
F8.5170.4230. red LD1 ...... LD120

X
Sheet7 /1F
F8.5170.4016.
green LD121 ...... LD180
X #2
Sheet3 /3D
*10/10
X
-P1
-P2
*8/8
Sheet3 /3D #2
-ST77
*10/10
-ST79
*8/8
X #2
Sheet3 /3D
#10
#8
X #2
2 Sheet3 /3D 2
#4
X #2
Sheet3 /2F F8.5170.3555. F8.5170.3550.
X #2
Sheet3 /3D
Supply
-BU322
1 = LED_ON
-BU388
-BU388
2 = STATUS
*4/4
#2/16
#2/16
#2/16
#2/16
#2/16
#2/16
#2/16
#2/16
-ST78
-ST80
3,4 = GND
*10/10 *10/10
*8/8
-P10
-P1
*8/8
-P6
*4/4
-P5
#2/16
#2/16
-P5
#2/16
#2/16
-P5
#2/16
#2/16
-P5
#2/16
#2/16
1 - 6 = +28V
9 - 16 = GND 11,12 5,6 1,2 3,4 9,10 13,14 15,16 7,8
ERASURE LED-CTRL-BOARD
A800426.
-B613
3 3
-F1
5AT
-F2
5AT
-F3
5AT
-P4
-P7
-P8
1/2
2/2
1/2
2/2
1/2
2/2
-BU294
-BU293
-BU305
1/2
2/2
1/2
2/2
1/2
2/2
BK
BK
BK
F8.5175.3520.
F8.5175.3520.
F8.5175.3520.
ERASURE LED-CTRL-BOARD
-BU295
-BU292
-BU306
1/2
OVERHEAT
1/2
OVERHEAT
1/2
OVERHEAT BK1
PROTECTION
BK1 BK1 PROTECTION
PROTECTION
V V -S207 V
-S206 -S4 3x OVERHEAT PROTECTION
BK
BK
BK2
BK
BK2 BK2
-BU306
2/2
4
-BU295
2/2
-BU292
2/2
4
NIMBUS Project
0D 40948 15.01.2010 AGHFR APPR.
0C 40633 16.06.2009 AGHFR NORM Sheet name: ERASURE_UNIT /X
Sheet 9
D1047893.01
0B 40570 05.05.2009 AGHFR
forbidden.
© AGFA
0A 40516 05.03.2009 AGHFR of 9 SH

A B C D E F
refer to sheet 4 refer to sheet 3

CASS. INPUT BUFFER
TAG READER TRANSMITTER
Front view PMI52-POWER-
1 Rear view PMI52 BOARD

DISTRIBUTION-
BOARD 1
LOCKING
CASSETTE
CONTACT S.
CASSETTE INTERLOCK
EDGE S. SWITCH
2 2
CASSETTE-IP ADAPTER CASS: INPUT BUFFER CASSETTE HANDLING OPENER HOME- SM-OPENER
RECEIVER BOARD POSITION S.
CASS: OUTPUT BUFFER MAIN
OPENER-CONTROL S. TRANSMITTER FAN
CASS-TRANSPORT
PUSHER HOME-POSITION S. HOME-POSITION S.
NETWORK
Rear view POWER

INPUT
SM-BUFFER PUSHER 1 2
3 3
MAIN
SWITCH
SM-CASS.-TRANSPORT SM-FIXER
CASS. OUTPUT BUFFER SM-LOCKING
RECEIVER
VACUUM POWER
SNAPHOOK GRIP RIGHT SNAPHOOK GRIP LEFT PUMP SUPPLIES
RECEIVER RECEIVER
Z-SENSOR
4
4
Bottom view 01 ECN7000943 20.05.2011 AGHFR DATE NAME
NIMBUS Project
0D 40948 15.01.2010 AGHFR APPR.
0C 40633 16.06.2009 AGHFR NORM Sheet name: Component-View-1 /X
SNAPHOOK GRIP RIGHT SNAPHOOK GRIP LEFT Sheet 1
D1047893.01
0B 40570 05.05.2009 AGHFR
forbidden.
TRANSMITTER TRANSMITTER
© AGFA
0A 40516 05.03.2009 AGHFR of 9 SH

A B C IDX Change-NR DATE NAME Replacement for F1.5170.4003. Node ID: 29342671 Chapter 4 Page 14 of 15
A B C D E F
refer to sheet 7 refer to sheet 8
SM-CONNECTOR
IP-HANDLING BOARD
Front view
Front view SM-SNAPHOOKS SLOW SCAN REF. SENSOR
1 1
CALIBRATION BOARD
Rear view CARRIER_DRIVE

HOME POS. COARSE S.
SM_VACUUM_VALVE
2 2
SM-CARRIER
_DRIVE
IP-CARRIER
DISTRIBUTION BOARD
3 3
TRAVERSE LOCKED
ON CARRIAGE S.
CARRIER_DRIVE
HOME POS. FINE S.
TRAVERSE ON
IP-CARRIER S.
4
4
SM-SWIVEL-DRIVE 01 ECN7000943 20.05.2011 AGHFR DATE NAME
SM-LINEAR TRANSPORT SM-SLOWSCAN NIMBUS Project
IP-TRANSPORT REF POSITION
0D 40948 15.01.2010 AGHFR APPR.
0C 40633 16.06.2009 AGHFR NORM Sheet name: Component-View-2 /X
Sheet 2
D1047893.01
0B 40570 05.05.2009 AGHFR
forbidden.
© AGFA
0A 40516 05.03.2009 AGHFR of 9 SH

Spare Parts List
Document No: DD+DIS004.10M
DX-M / DX-G
Type 5170/200/100
Edition 2, Revision 2 Document Node ID: 29511704

07-2014 Printed in Germany spare_parts_e_template_v11
DD+DIS004.10M Spare Parts List
Manufacturer
Agfa HealthCare N.V
Published by
D - 81539 München
Germany
AGFA and the Agfa-Rhombus are trademarks of Agfa HealthCare N.V., Belgium,
or its affiliates.
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
(see Agfa HealthCare Library > General Info > Agfa HealthCare > Publications >
the equipment.
the product.
WARNING:
Hazards may be introduced because of component failure or improper

operation.
INSTRUCTION:
• Replace defective parts with Agfa HealthCare original spare parts.
• Use only tools and measuring instruments which are suitable for the procedure.
• Only approved Agfa HealthCare accessories must be used. For a list of
compatible accessories contact your local Agfa HealthCare organization or
www.agfa.com.
NOTE:
To verify the latest version of a chapter of the Service Manuals refer to the
"List of Service Documents" in the Agfa HealthCare Library.

Edition 2, Revision 2 DX-M / DX-G Chapter 5 / Page 2 of 32

Document History
Edition, Release Changes compared to previous Version 2.1
Revision Date
2.2 07-2014 Index of Spare Parts Numbers updated.
Spare Parts added.
Repaired Parts (Prefix RF+) added
DISCLAIMER:
Actual delivered spare parts may differ (in appearance) from the images shown and/or
ordered spare parts.
The codes of the ordered spare parts can vary from the code of the delivered spare parts.
Agfa HealthCare warrants that the delivered spare parts have at least the same functionalities.
Agfa HealthCare reserves the right to deliver compatible or alternative spare parts.
Prices may differ from the original order as these spare parts will be invoiced at current prices.
NOTE:
Repaired Spare Parts are indicated with Prefix RF+.
NOTE:
Recycling of the electronic and electrical waste equipment will ensure safety of the human
health and the environment.
For information about electronic and electrical waste equipment disposal, recovery and
collection points, please contact your local waste disposal service or the producer / distributor
of this equipment.
If your equipment contains removable batteries or accumulators please dispose of these
separately according to local regulations.
Contact
Spare Parts ordering Worldwide: spareparts@agfa.com
Spare Parts returns Worldwide: returnsspareparts@agfa.com


Contents
BUFFER UNIT - FRONT BUFFER UNIT - REAR

PAGES 20 - 21 PAGES 18 - 19
PANELING
PAGES 06 - 07
CHASSIS - CONNECTOR AND
SWIVEL DRIVE
PAGES 10 - 11
CHASSIS - SCANNING AND

ERASURE
PAGES 16 - 17
CHASSIS - IP CARRIER
ADAPTER PLATE
PAGES 14 - 15
ACCESSORIES
PAGES 22 - 23
CASSETTE - NIP GENRAD HD5.0

PAGES 24 - 25
FRAME AND VACUUM UNIT
CASSETTE - NIP MAMMO HM5.0 PAGES 08 - 09
PAGES 26 - 27
CASSETTE - PIP GENRAD MD4.0R

PAGES 28 - 29
CHASSIS - IP TRANSPORT
CASSETTE - PIP MAMMO MM3.0R PAGES 12 - 13
PAGES 30 - 31


How to navigate the Spare Parts List online with the

Acrobat Reader
(1) Open Bookmarks.
(2) Click on "CONTENTS".
(3) See overview of the modules.

(4) Click on requested module.
(5) Appropriate page opens.
(6) Click on green arrow to

navigate back to the overview
of the modules.


01*
04*
03
(B627)
15* 06*
05*
07
17
(B624)
08* 02*
09*
10*
16
11
(M101)
12
13*
14*
5170_chap05_01_m.cdr
PANELING


Pos. Nr. Teile-Nr. Benennung
Item No. Part No. Description
Pos. no. Nr. de Ref. Denomination
1 CM+6051730 * BUFFER ABDECKUNG HINTEN (KUNSTSTOFF) Type 5170/100 FROM SN1883,
BUFFER REAR COVER (PLASTIC MATERIAL)
Type 5170/200 SN10787 AND FROM SN10789
COUVERCLE DU BUFFER FACE ARRIÈRE (PLASTIQUE)
1 CM+9517014102 BUFFER ABDECKUNG HINTEN Type 5170/100 UP TO SN1882,
BUFFER REAR COVER
Type 5170/200 UP TO SN10786 AND SN10788
COUVERCLE DU BUFFER FACE ARRIÈRE
2 CM+9517098301 * RÜCKWAND
REAR COVER
COUVERCLE FACE ARRIÈRE
3 CM+9517014600 LED STATUS INDICATOR BOARD (B627)
LED STATUS INDICATOR BOARD (B627)
LED STATUS INDICATOR BOARD (B627)
4 CM+9517014551 * VERKLEIDUNG OBEN LINKS
UPPER LEFT COVER
REVÊTEMENT SUPERIEUR À GAUCHE
5 CM+9517014792 * VERKLEIDUNG KASSETTENABLAGE
UPPER COVER
REVÊTEMENT EN HAUT
6 CM+9517014210 * VERKLEIDUNG OBEN RECHTS
UPPER RIGHT COVER
REVÊTEMENT SUPERIEUR À DROITE
7 CM+9517014454 DISPLAY BOARD MIT TOUCH PANEL (B624)
DISPLAY BOARD WITH TOUCH PANEL (B624)
CARTE D`AFFICHAGE AVEC CLAVIER (B624)
8 CM+9517014301 * BUFFER ABDECKUNG RECHTS
BUFFER RIGHT COVER
COUVERCLE DU BUFFER À DROITE
9 CM+9517098450 * BUFFER ABDECKUNG UNTEN
LOWER BUFFER COVER
COUVERCLE DU BUFFER EN BAS
10 CM+9517014401 * SEITENWAND RECHTS
RIGHT COVER
REVÊTEMENT À DROITE
11 CM+9517044500 LÜFTER (M101)
FAN (M101)
VENTILATEUR (M101)
12 CM+9517098550 LUFTFILTER
AIR FILTER
FILTRE À AIR
13 CM+9517098880 * VERKLEIDUNG FRONT - TYPE 5170/200
FRONT COVER - TYPE 5170/200
REVÊTEMENT À L'AVANT - TYPE 5170/200
14 CM+9517014752 * VERKLEIDUNG FRONT - TYPE 5170/100
FRONT COVER - TYPE 5170/100
REVÊTEMENT À L'AVANT - TYPE 5170/100
15 CM+9517014501 * SEITENWAND LINKS
LEFT COVER
REVÊTEMENT À GAUCHE
16 CM+6060790 SCHNELLVERSCHLUSS
QUICK FASTENER
FERMETURE RAPIDE
17 CM+6060780 SCHNELLVERSCHLUSS
QUICK FASTENER
FERMETURE RAPIDE
= Assembly
* = Spare Part standardly is not kept in stock, extended delivery time is possible.
99 = Spare Part is not shown in Exploded Views.
PANELING


07
04
06
(M617)
05*
02
(S208)
01
01
09
03 08
(S203)


1 CM+9517098055 NETZTEIL (1 STÜCK) (B616, B617)
POWER SUPPLY (1 PIECE) (B616, B617)
ALIMENTATION (1 PIECE) (B616, B617)
2 CM+9042663040 TÜR, DECKELSCHALTER (S208)
SAFETY SWITCH (S208)
PORTE, INTERRUPTEUR DE COUVERCLE (S208)
3 CM+9045231730 ÜBERSTROMSCHUTZSCHALTER 14A (S203)
OVERCURRENT PROTECTION 14A (S203)
DISJONCTEUR DE SURCHARGE 14A (S203)
4 CM+9517098940 VAKUUMSCHLAUCH FEST
FIXED VACUUM HOSE
TUYAU À VIDE FIXE
5 CM+9517098951 * ABSORBERSCHLAUCH
VAC. PUMP SOUND ABSORBER HOSE
TUYAU D'ABSORBER
6 CM+9517042903 VAKUUMPUMPE INKLUSIVE SICHERUNG (M617)
VACUUM PUMP FUSE INCLUDED (M617)
POMPE À VIDE FUSIBLE COMPRIS (M617)
7 CM+9517098930 VAKUUMSCHLAUCH FLEXIBEL
MOVABLE VACUUM HOSE WITH WIRE
TUYAU D'ASPIRATION
8 CM+9517098890 VERKLEIDUNG NETZEINGANG
HOUSING
BOÎTIER
9 CM+9517018270 ABDECKUNG
COVER PLATE
TÔLE DE RECOUVREMENT
= Assembly


02
(M626)
01
01
06*
03
04
07 05
(B510) (M625)
08
09
CHASSIS - CONNECTOR AND SWIVEL DRIVE


1 CM+9517021900 ARRETIERUNG MONT. (1 STÜCK)
CONNECTOR BOLT (1 PIECE)
VERROUILLAGE (1 PIECE)
2 CM+9517021850 VERRIEGELUNGSMOTOR MIT RIEMENRAD (M626)
STEPPER MOTOR LOCKING (M626)
MOTEUR DE VERROUILLAGE (M626)
3 CM+9517025850 LS SLOWSCAN KOMPLETT
SLOW SCAN SENSOR
CELLULE
4 CM+9517021200 SWIVELEINHEIT KOMPLETT
SWIVEL DRIVE
COMMANDE PIVOTANT
5 CM+9517021220 SCHRITTMOTOR SWIVELANTRIEB MIT RIEMENRAD (M625)
STEPPER MOTOR SWIVEL DRIVE WITH PULLEY (M625)
SM SWIVEL DRIVE WITH PULLEY (M625)
6 CM+9517098900 * SCHMIERMITTELKAMMER (2-TEILIG)
LUBRICATION CHAMBERS (SET OF 2)
CHAMBRE DE LUBRIFICATION (JEU DE 2)
7 CM+9517021503 IP HANDLING BOARD (B510)
IP HANDLING BOARD (B510)
CARTE IP HANDLING (B510)
7 RF+9517021503 IP HANDLING BOARD (B510)
IP HANDLING BOARD (B510)
CARTE IP HANDLING (B510)
8 CM+9517025100 SLOW SCAN SPINDLE
SLOW SCAN SPINDLE
SLOW SCAN SPINDLE
9 CM+6066520 LUBRICATING GREASE FOR SLOW SCAN SPINDLE
LUBRICATING GREASE FOR SLOW SCAN SPINDLE
LUBRICATING GREASE FOR SLOW SCAN SPINDLE
= Assembly
CHASSIS - CONNECTOR AND SWIVEL DRIVE


For DX-M (5170-200) SN10001 - SN10041

order Pos. 02 "Snaphook drive with light barrier" 02 03
together with Pos. 03 (M510)
"Parts for Snaphook drive with light barrier"
05 04
04
11
01
05
07 06
(M514)
06
10* 09* 08*


1 CM+9517026304 TRAVERSE VOLLST.
TRAVERSE WITH SNAP HOOKS
TRAVERSE
2 CM+9517026921 ANTRIEB SCHNAPPHAKEN MIT LICHTSCHRANKE (M510)
SNAPHOOK DRIVE WITH LIGHT BARRIER (M510)
ENTRAINEMENT À DÉCLIC AVEC CELLULE (M510)
3 CM+9517026940 TEILE FÜR SCHNAPPHAKENANTRIEB MIT LS
PARTS FOR SNAPHOOK DRIVE WITH LB
PARTIE D'ENTRAINEMENT À DÉCLIC AVEC CELLULE
4 CM+9517098750 IP STÜTZSEILE (3-TEILIG)
IP FEEDER WIRE ROPES (SET OF 3)
CÂBLES DE IP FEEDER (JEU DE 3)
5 CM+9517098700 TRAVERSENWAGEN LINKS / RECHTS (2-TEILIG)
TRAVERSE CARRIAGE LEFT / RIGHT (SET OF 2)
CHARIOT TRAVERSE GAUCHE / DROITE (JEU DE 2)
6 CM+9517098801 LINEAR TRANSPORT RIEMEN (2-TEILIG)
LINEAR TRANSPORT BELTS (SET OF 2)
COURROIE DE TRANSPORT (JEU DE 2)
7 CM+9517027100 SCHRITTMOTOR LINEAR TRANSPORT (M514)
STEPPER MOTOR LINEAR TRANSPORT (M514)
SM LINEAR TRANSPORT (M514)
8 CM+9517027252 * SEILSPANNER RECHTS
ROPE TENSIONER RIGHT
TENDEUR DE CABLE A DROITE
9 CM+9517027152 * SEILSPANNER MITTE
ROPE TENSIONER CENTER
TENDEUR DE CABLE CENTRAL
10 CM+9517027302 * SEILSPANNER LINKS
ROPE TENSIONER LEFT
TENDEUR DE CABLE A GAUCHE
11 CM+6017340 SCHNAPPHAKEN JUSTAGE
SNAPHOOK ADJUSTMENT
AJUSTAGE SCHNAPPHAKEN
= Assembly


01 07
04 (M624)
06
05
(B623)
02*
09 (B625)
03
(B610)
08 (B626)
CHASSIS - IP CARRIER ADAPTER PLATE


1 CM+9517023800 SAUGBÜHNE KOMPLETT
VACUUM PLATE
TÔLE À VIDE
2 CM+9517098920 * ABDECKUNG CALIBRATION BOARD
CALIBRATION BOARD COVER
CARTE D'ÉTALONNAGE
3 CM+9517029901 CALIBRATION BOARD (B610)
CALIBRATION BOARD (B610)
CALIBRATION BOARD (B610)
4 CM+9517023601 VENTILEINHEIT KOMPLETT (M624)
VACUUM VALVE (M624)
VALVE À VIDE (M624)
5 CM+9517024900 VERTEILERBORD (B623)
DISTRIBUTION BOARD IP-CARRIER (B623)
BOARD DE DISTRIBUTION (B623)
6 CM+9517042102 VERTEILERBORD KABEL (B623 - B510 UND B610)
DISTRIBUTION BOARD CABLE (B623 - B510 AND B610)
CABLE BOARD DE DISTRIBUTION (B623 - B510 ET B610)
7 CM+9517040100 KABEL IP HANDLING BOARD TO SM CARRIER
CABLE IP HANDLING BOARD TO SM CARRIER
CABLE IP HANDLING BOARD TO SM CARRIER
8 CM+9517024701 TRAVERSE ON IP CARRIER SENSOR (B626)
TRAVERSE ON IP CARRIER SENSOR (B626)
TRAVERSE ON IP CARRIER SENSOR (B626)
9 CM+9517024750 TRAVERSE LOCKED ON CARRIAGE SENSOR (B625)
TRAVERSE LOCKED ON CARRIAGE SENSOR (B625)
TRAVERSE LOCKED ON CARRIAGE SENSOR (B625)
= Assembly
CHASSIS - IP CARRIER ADAPTER PLATE


01 02
08
07
12
15
13
03* 06 (B619)
09**
04 14
05 11
(B411) 10
** USB stick may contain a version older than the most recent one.
In case update is performed by the FSE via download from “Agfa HealthCare Library”
CHASSIS - SCANNING AND ERASURE


1 CM+9517035004 LÖSCHEINHEIT
ERASURE UNIT
UNITÉ D'EFFACEMENT
1 RF+9517035004 LÖSCHEINHEIT
ERASURE UNIT
UNITÉ D'EFFACEMENT
2 CM+9517030015 PMT DETECTOR MIT LICHTSAMMLER
PMT WITH LIGHT COLLECTOR
DETECTEUR PMT
3 CM+9517030350 * STAUBBÜRSTE, KOMPL.
CLEANING BRUSH ASSEMBLY
BROSSE DE PROTECTION CONTRE POUSSIERE
4 CM+9517091601 REINIGUNGSBÜRSTE
CLEANING BRUSH
BROSSE PURIFICATION
5 CM+9517041203 PMI52-POWER-DISTRIBUTION (B411)
PMI52-POWER-DISTRIBUTION (B411)
5 RF+9517041203 PMI52-POWER-DISTRIBUTION (B411)
6 CM+9517030704 PMI52 BOARD MIT GEHÄUSE (B619)
PMI52 BOARD (B619)
PMI52 BOARD (B619)
6 RF+9517030704 PMI52 BOARD MIT GEHÄUSE (B619)
PMI52 BOARD (B619)
PMI52 BOARD (B619)
7 CM+9517098850 SPEICHERKARTE
SOLID STATE DISK
SOLID STATE DISK
8 CM+9517042700 KABEL PMI52 ZU PMT (B619 - B422)
CABLE PMI52 TO PMT (B619 - B422)
CABLE PMI52 A PMT (B619 - B422)
9 CM+9517007609 USB FLASH DRIVE WITH SW NIM_2407
USB FLASH DRIVE WITH SW NIM_2407
USB FLASH DRIVE WITH SW NIM_2407
10 CM+9517040111 KABEL PMI52 BOARD ZU IP HANDILNG BOARD (B619 - B510)
CABLE PMI52 BOARD TO IP HANDILNG BOARD (B619 - B510)
CABLE PMI52 BOARD A IP HANDILNG BOARD (B619 - B510)
11 CM+9517040142 KABEL PMI52 BOARD ZU CALIBRATION (B619 - B610)
CABLE PMI52 BOARD TO CALIBRATION (B619 - B610)
CABLE PMI52 BOARD À CALIBRATION (B619 - B610)
12 CM+9517042501 KABEL PMI52 BOARD ZU DISPLAY INTERFACE (B619 - B624)
CABLE PMI52 BOARD TO DISPLAY INTERFACE (B619 - B624)
CABLE PMI52 BOARD À DISPLAY INTERFACE (B619 - B624)
13 CM+9517027502 OPTIKBAUGRUPPE
OPTIC MODULE
ENSEMBLE OPTIC
14 CM+9517043800 KABEL PMI52 BOARD ZU PMI52 POWER DISTRIBUTION BOARD (B619 - B411)
CABLE PMI52 BOARD TO PMI52 POWER DISTRIBUTION BOARD (B619 - B411)
CABLE PMI52 BOARD À PMI52 POWER DISTRIBUTION BOARD (B619 - B411)
15 CM+9517043900 KABEL PMI52 BOARD ZU OPTIK MODUL (B619 - OPTIC MODULE)
CABLE PMI52 BOARD TO OPTIC MODULE (B619 - OPTIC MODULE)
CABLE PMI52 BOARD À OPTIC MODULE (B619 - OPTIC MODULE)
= Assembly
CHASSIS - SCANNING AND ERASURE


01
02
(M204)
03
(S209)
09
(M205)
04 (M203)
05 (M202)
07
06
(B206)
08
BUFFER UNIT - REAR


1 CM+9517060014 BUFFER EINHEIT
BUFFER UNIT
MODULE DU BUFFER
1 RF+9517060014 BUFFER EINHEIT
BUFFER UNIT
MODULE DU BUFFER
2 CM+9517586602 SCHRITTMOTOR FIXIERER (M204)
STEPPER MOTOR FIXER (M204)
MOTEUR PAS À PAS (M204)
3 CM+9517590600 MICROSCHALTER (S209)
CASSETTE EDGE SENSOR (S209)
MICRORUPTEUR (S209)
4 CM+9517056005 ENTRIEGLER KOMPLETT (M203)
LOCKING UNIT (M203)
DÉVERROUILLAGE (M203)
5 CM+9517053102 SCHRITTMOTOR KASSETTENTRANSPORT (M202)
SM CASSETTE TRANSPORT (M202)
MOTEUR PAS À PAS (M202)
6 CM+9949958801 GS GABELLICHTSCHRANKE UNTEN (B206)
LOWER POSITIONSENSOR (B206)
CI PHOTOCELLULE A FOURCHE (B206)
7 CM+9517098102 KASSETTEN TRANSPORTRIEMEN
CASSETTE TRANSPORT BELT
COURROIE TRANSPORT CASSETTE
8 CM+9517098960 ROLO KASSETTENKLEMMUNG
ROLLO, CASSETTE CLAMPING
ROLLO, CASSETTE CLAMPING
9 CM+9517059350 SCHRITTMOTOR PUSHER (M205)
STEPPER MOTOR PUSHER (M205)
MOTEUR PAS À PAS PUSHER (M205)
= Assembly
BUFFER UNIT - REAR


01*
02
(B211)
03
06
07
04
(B220) 05
(B202)
08
10 (M201)
09
(B204)
5170_chap05_08_m.CDR
BUFFER UNIT - FRONT


1 CM+9517098350 * VERKLEIDUNG KASSETTENEINGABE
CASSETTE INPUT COVER
CAPOT INTRODUCTION CASSETTE
2 CM+9048614171 CHIP READER (B211)
CHIP READER (B211)
CHIP READER (B211)
3 CM+9517052700 KASSETTENDECKELGREIFER MIT LEHRE
CASSETTE GRABBER WITH GAUGE
GRIFFE DE CASSETTES AVEC OUTIL
4 CM+9516047500 GS CASSETTE IP ADAPTER (B220)
GS CASSETTE IP ADAPTER (B220)
GS CASSETTE IP ADAPTER (B220)
5 CM+9517059901 CASSETTE HANDLING BOARD (B202)
CASSETTE HANDLING BOARD (B202)
5 RF+9517059901 CASSETTE HANDLING BOARD (B202)
6 CM+9517059550 CASSETTE READER KABEL
CASSETTE READER CABLE
CABLE CASSETTE READER
7 CM+9517043300 CASS TR HOME POS SENS KABEL
CABLE TO SENSOR
CABLE CASS TR HOME POS SENS
8 CM+9517051000 SCHRITTMOTOR KLAPPEN ÖFFNER (M201)
STEPPER MOTOR OPENER (M201)
STEPPER MOTOR OPENER (M201)
9 CM+9517052302 Z-SENSOR (B204)
Z-SENSOR (B204)
Z-SENSOR (B204)
10 CM+9517050080 ANTISTATIKBÜRSTE
ANTISTATIC BRUSH
BROSSE ANTISTATIQUE
= Assembly
BUFFER UNIT - FRONT


cable tie (small) 10x cable tie (large) 10x Washer for mounting of Mounting screw for Washer for mounting Swivel drive (left hand
- Buffer Rear Cover Calibration Board 2x screw for calibration side) retaining ring 2x
- Motors 8x board 2x
D6.0213.749.00
F7.0479.1316.0 F7.0479.1338.0 D7.0096.507.24 D7.0230.012.00 F7.0329.2060.0 D6.0223.125.00
Swivel drive (left hand Nut (M 4) for several Mounting screws for Washer for mounting Swivel drive (left hand Mounting screw for
side) spacer washer 2x parts inside Buffer Unit 2x Cleaning Brush on of light sensors 2x side) driving pin 2x Motors (M 3 x 6) 2x
Carrier (M 3 x 5) 2x
F7.0327.3170.0 D7.0207.021.24 D7.0230.236.00 D7.0096.602.28 D6.0200.439.00
Mounting screw for Mounting screw for Washer for mounting Mounting screw for Screw for mounting of Mounting screw for
Motors (M 3 x 8) 2x Motors (M 4 x 10) 2x of motors 2x PMI Carrier (M 4 x 8) 2x Z-Sensor (M 3 x 6) 2x PMI52 Board Housing 2x
D6.0205.447.00 D7.0250.152.24 D7.0213.899.24 D7.0250.153.24

D7.0250.154.24 D7.0213.836.24
Retainer screw for Washer for mounting Washer for mounting of Mounting Screws for Mounting Screws for Mounting screws for
Light Collector 2x of IP Handling Board 2x Z-Sensor 2x lower Optic Module Vacuum Plate (M 4 x 6) Traverse Carriages 2x
carrier 2x 2x
F7.5170.3064.2 D7.0096.602.24 D7.0096.504.24 D7.0213.816.24 D7.0242.205.28 F7.5170.2603.1
Retaining ring for Mounting Screws for Mounting screw (M 3 x 8) Mounting screw for
upper transport roller 2x Display Board with - IP Handling Board Buffer Rear Cover ´
Touch Panel 2x - Light Barriers 4x (M 4 x 6) 2x
D6.0223.114.00 D7.0213.828.24 D6.0213.746.00

D7.0250.211.28
Pulley for linear Connector drive gear (2x) Pusher drive cam left Pusher drive cam right Belt for swivel drive
01 02
transport belt
F7.8350.4212.x
Belt for pusher drive
F8.5170.2695.x
F7.8350.7303.x F7.5170.5967.x
F7.5170.5964.x
F7.0389.6141.x
F7.0389.6151.0
Lock front cover Fast lock right Belt for Belt for snaphook drive Belt for linear transport drive Belt for connector drive
cover (4x) cassette transport drive
cassette opener
(2x)
A605081.0
F7.5170.1426.2
F7.0389.6079.x
F7.0389.6143.x
F7.0389.6005.x
F7.5170.1427.0 A605090.0 F7.0389.6000.x
Light sensor cass. Spring for pusher Snap hook grip left /right transmitter
output B212 / B213 (2x) Opener Control Sensor B201 and receiver
Opener Home Position Sensor B203 B216 / B217 and B218 / B219
Z-Sensor B204 Light sensor cass. input B214 / B215
Linear Transport Home Position Sensor B512 (2x)
F7.9499.6546.x
Slow Scan Reference - ST1*4/4-BU361*4/4 Sensor B519
Carrier Drive Home Position Coarse Sensor B612
Carrier Drive Home Position Fine Sensor B615
F8.9499.4620.x
TRAVERSE LOCKED ON CARRIAGE SENSOR B625
TRAVERSE ON IP-CARRIER SENSOR B626
F7.5170.5940.x F7.5140.7512.x F8.9499.6540.x NOPPLER SENSOR B630
F7.8360.5109.x
F8.9499.4640.x
ACCESSORIES


1 CM+9517098201 SMALL PARTS KIT: FIXING MATERIALS
SMALL PARTS KIT: FIXING MATERIALS
SMALL PARTS KIT: FIXING MATERIALS
2 CM+9517098251 SMALL PARTS KIT: FUNCTIONAL PARTS
SMALL PARTS KIT: FUNCTIONAL PARTS
SMALL PARTS KIT: FUNCTIONAL PARTS
99 CM+6027200 MODIFICATION PACKAGE FOR LINEAR TRANSPORT
MODIFICATION PACKAGE FOR LINEAR TRANSPORT
MODIFICATION PACKAGE FOR LINEAR TRANSPORT
99 CM+9517098163 TRANSPORT PACKAGING DX-G / DX-M - TYPE 5170/100/200
TRANSPORT PACKAGING DX-G / DX-M - TYPE 5170/100/200
TRANSPORT PACKAGING DX-G / DX-M - TYPE 5170/100/200
= Assembly
ACCESSORIES


01* - 09*
10* - 18*
19*


1 CM+9518490800 * CR HD5.0 GENERAL DETEKTOR 15X30
CR HD5.0 GENERAL DETECTOR 15X30
CR HD5.0 DÉTECTEUR GENERAL 15X30
3 CM+9518358600 * CR HD5.0 AEC DETEKTOR 18X24
CR HD5.0 AEC DETECTOR 18X24
CR HD5.0 AEC DÉTECTEUR 18X24
7 CM+9518090301 * CR HD5.0 GENERAL SR DETEKTOR 35X43
CR HD5.0 GENERAL SR DETECTOR 35X43
CR HD5.0 DETECTEUR GENERAL SR 35X43
8 CM+9518090850 * CR HD5.0 FLFS DETEKTOR 35X43
CR HD5.0 FLFS DETECTOR 35X43
CR HD5.0 DÉTECTEUR FLFS 35X43
10 CM+9518458000 * CR HD5.0 GENERAL KASSETTE 15X30
CR HD5.0 GENERAL CASSETTE 15X30
CR HD5.0 CASSETTE GENERAL 15X30
12 CM+9518358500 * CR HD5.0 AEC KASSETTE 18X24
CR HD5.0 AEC CASSETTE 18X24
CR HD5.0 CASSETTE AEC 18X24
16 CM+9518056000 * CR HD5.0 GENERAL SR KASSETTE 35X43
CR HD5.0 GENERAL SR CASSETTE 35X43
CR HD5.0 CASSETTE GENERAL SR 35X43
17 CM+9518059000 * CR HD5.0 FLFS KASSETTE 35X43
CR HD5.0 FLFS CASSETTE 35X43
CR HD5.0 CASSETTE FLFS 35X43
19 CM+9518040050 * CHIPKARTE
TRANSPONDER
TRANSPONDER
= Assembly


01* - 02*
03* - 04*
05*
CASSETTE - NIP MAMMO HM5.0


1 CM+6053390 DETECTOR 18X24 - MAMMO OHNE IPSR ONLY FOR USA AND CANADA
DETECTOR 18X24 - MAMMO WITHOUT IPSR ONLY FOR USA AND CANADA
DETECTOR 18X24 - MAMMO SANS IPSR ONLY FOR USA AND CANADA
1 CM+9519190101 * CR HM5.0 MAMMO DETEKTOR 18X24 NOT AVAILABLE IN USA AND CANADA
CR HM5.0 MAMMO DETECTOR 18X24 NOT AVAILABLE IN USA AND CANADA
CR HM5.0 MAMMO DETECTEUR 18X24 NOT AVAILABLE IN USA AND CANADA
2 CM+6053380 DETECTOR 24X30 - MAMMO OHNE IPSR ONLY FOR USA AND CANADA
DETECTOR 24X30 - MAMMO WITHOUT IPSR ONLY FOR USA AND CANADA
DETECTOR 24X30 - MAMMO SANS IPSR ONLY FOR USA AND CANADA
2 CM+9519090101 * CR HM5.0 MAMMO DETEKTOR 24X30 NOT AVAILABLE IN USA AND CANADA
CR HM5.0 MAMMO DETECTOR 24X30 NOT AVAILABLE IN USA AND CANADA
CR HM5.0 MAMMO DETECTEUR 24X30 NOT AVAILABLE IN USA AND CANADA
3 CM+9519154000 * CR HM5.0 MAMMO KASSETTE 18X24
CR HM5.0 MAMMO CASSETTE 18X24
4 CM+9519054000 * CR HM5.0 MAMMO KASSETTE 24X30
5 CM+9518040050 * CHIPKARTE
TRANSPONDER
TRANSPONDER
99 10+9999912730 POLYNIT WIPES
POLYNIT WIPES
POLYNIT WIPES
= Assembly
CASSETTE - NIP MAMMO HM5.0


01* - 08*
09* - 15*
16*


1 CM+9518490200 * CR MD4.0R GENERAL CASSETTE 15X30
CR MD4.0R GENERAL CASSETTE 15X30
5 CM+9518154000 * CR MD4.0R GENERAL SR CASSETTE 35X35
CR MD4.0R GENERAL SR CASSETTE 35X35
7 CM+9518054000 * CR MD4.0R GENERAL SR CASSETTE 35X43
8 CM+9518090501 * CR MD4.0R FLFS CASSETTE 35X43
CR MD4.0R FLFS CASSETTE 35X43
CR MD4.0R FLFS CASSETTE 35X43
9 CM+9518490101 * CR MD4.0R GENERAL PLATE 15X30
CR MD4.0R GENERAL PLATE 15X30
13 CM+9518190900 * CR MD4.0R GENERAL SR PLATE 35X35
CR MD4.0R GENERAL SR PLATE 35X35
15 CM+9518090900 * CR MD4.0R GENERAL SR PLATE 35X43
16 CM+9518040050 * CHIPKARTE
TRANSPONDER
TRANSPONDER
= Assembly


01* - 02*
03* - 04*
05*
CASSETTE - PIP MAMMO MM3.0R


1 CM+9519090700 * CR MM3.0R MAMMO CASSETTE 24X30
CR MM3.0R MAMMO CASSETTE 24X30
2 CM+9519190700 * CR MM3.0R MAMMO CASSETTE 18X24
3 CM+9519090600 * CR MM3.0R MAMMO PLATE 24X30
CR MM3.0R MAMMO PLATE 24X30
4 CM+9519190600 * CR MM3.0R MAMMO PLATE 18X24
5 CM+9518040050 * CHIPKARTE
TRANSPONDER
TRANSPONDER
99 10+9999912190 PROSAT WIPERS
PROSAT WIPERS
PROSAT WIPERS
= Assembly
CASSETTE - PIP MAMMO MM3.0R


Type Overview
This spare parts list is valid for the following machine type(s):
Device Name Type Number Specification

DX-M 5170/0200 E4YW2
DX-G 5170/0100 5NBGQ
Accessory Overview
Following accesssories are separately available:


Imaging Services Accessories
DX-M
Type 5170 / 200
DX-G
Type 5170 / 100
This chapter lists all available accessories (options).

Revision Date
NIM_2000 and higher
Document Title

eq_06_accessories_toc_e_template_v06
DD+DIS001.10E Accessories
► Manufacturer
Publisher
D - 81539 München
Germany
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
the equipment.
the product.
NOTE:


DD+DIS001.10E Accessories
1 Accessories Overview
The following accessories are available for DX-G / DX-M digitizers:
Accessory ABC Code Description

CR EasyLift EJ8V8 The CR Easylift brings increased
accuracy and ease of operation to
Full Leg Full Spine exposures, enabling
precise positioning of the CR Full Body
Cassette Holder with respect to the
X-ray tube, regardless of patient height.
CR Full Body EAUGV Unique, low-wear cassette holder for

Cassette Holder increased productivity in full body
CR Imaging
CR Anti-scatter EMUXJ X-ray grids improve the sharpness of

grid version 2 X-ray images by trapping the greater
part of scatter radiation, resulting in
a cleaner, clearer and more detailed
image.
CR ID TABLET EPKAP The Identification Station is used to

(from write the cassette, patient, examination
SN 15539 on) and routing data to the cassette chip.
Earthquake kit 5NS2V Digitizer reinforcement for earthquake

damage prevention


Imaging Services Field Modifications
DX-M
Type 5170 / 200
DX-G
Type 5170 / 100
This document describes the field modifications for the DX-G (as of Software Version
NIM_2000) and the DX-M.
At the time of production start this chapter is empty.
During production it could be filled with upgrade installation instructions.

Revision Date
NIM_2000 and higher
Document Title
Not applicable

eq_07_field-modifications_e_template_v07
DD+DIS001.10E Field Modifications

Edition 2, Revision 0 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 7 / 2

Chapter 8
HEALTHCARE Manufacturing Standard
Imaging Services
Modifications
DX-M
Type 5170 / 200
DX-G
Type 5170 / 100
This document provides an overview of all product modifications of the DX-G (as of
software version NIM_2000) and the DX-M which may be of importance for Service.
They are listed in chronological sequence.
At the time of production start this chapter is empty.
During production it could be filled with product modifications.

Revision Date
NIM_2000 and higher
Document Title
Not applicable

eq_08_modifications_e_template_v07
DD+DIS001.10E Manufacturing Standard Modifications


Imaging Services Maintenance
DX-M
Type 5170 / 100
DX-G
Type 5170 / 200
This document is separately available. Order number: DD+DIS003.10E
eq_09_maintenance_e_template_v07
DD+DIS003.10E Maintenance
► Manufacturer
Publisher
D - 81539 München
Germany
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
the equipment.
the product.
NOTE:


This document contains all routines and tests to be carried out during maintenance.
It describes all must maintenance periodical steps in chronologically suitable order for
the DX-G (Type 5170 / 100) and DX-M (Type 5170 / 200) digitizers as of s
oftware version NIM_2000.

Revision Date
Document Title
Chapter 1 - Controls, Connections, Setup Procedure
Chapter 3.5 - Replacements / Repair Procedures
Chapter 3.6 - Adjustments and Calibrations


LIST OF CONTENTS
1 GENERAL INFORMATION ON PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE .............................................6

1.1 Maintenance Frequency ...........................................................................................................6
1.2 Required Time...........................................................................................................................6
1.3 Required Tools..........................................................................................................................7
1.4 Required Cleaning Material ......................................................................................................7
1.5 Required Spare Parts ...............................................................................................................7
2 DIAGNOSTICS .........................................................................................................................8
2.1 Questioning of the Customer ....................................................................................................8
2.2 Analyzing Device specific Information in the Service Software at the Local Display of the
digitizer......................................................................................................................................8
2.2.1 Check of Error Statistics ...........................................................................................................8
2.2.2 Info Counter Analysis................................................................................................................9
2.2.3 Reset of the Relative Counters .................................................................................................9
2.3 Documenting current Image Quality .......................................................................................10
3 MAINTENANCE - POWER OFF.............................................................................................10

3.1 Visual Inspection .....................................................................................................................11
3.1.1 Perform Visual Check of Power and Network Cable ..............................................................11
3.1.2 Perform Visual Check of Covers.............................................................................................11
3.1.3 Perform Visual Check of Cleaning Brush ...............................................................................12
3.1.4 Perform Visual Check of Flexible Cables inside the Digitizer.................................................14
3.1.5 Perform Visual Check of All Belts, Flexible Vacuum Hose and Spindle.................................17
3.1.6 Check the Parallelism of Traverse in Take over Position .......................................................19
3.2 Cleaning ..................................................................................................................................20
3.2.1 Cleaning General ....................................................................................................................20
3.2.2 Cleaning of the Erasure Unit...................................................................................................20
3.2.3 Checking of the Spindle of the Slow Scan Unit ......................................................................21
3.3 Checking Cassettes ................................................................................................................21
3.3.1 Checking of Cassette Condition..............................................................................................21
3.4 Reassembling of removed Parts.............................................................................................22


3.5 Replacement of Air Filter ........................................................................................................22
4 MAINTENANCE - POWER ON ..............................................................................................23

4.1 Check of Safety Switch ...........................................................................................................23
4.2 Performing Stall Calibration ....................................................................................................23
4.3 Performing one Test Cycle .....................................................................................................24
5 TECHNICAL IMAGE QUALITY CHECK OF THE SYSTEM...................................................24

5.1.1 Creating a Flatfield Image.......................................................................................................24
5.1.2 Checking the Images at the Lightbox or Viewing Station .......................................................25
6 COMPLETION OF THE MAINTENANCE...............................................................................26

6.1 Reset of the Maintenance Indicator ........................................................................................26
6.2 Creating a Backup of Device specific Data.............................................................................26
6.3 Customer Conversation ..........................................................................................................26
7 MAINTENANCE CHECKLIST ................................................................................................27


1 General Information on Preventive Maintenance
Carry out all the points listed in this document.

This ensures quality and functional reliability of the system.
IMPORTANT:
Check if additional maintenance points are necessary according to
country specific regulations.
NOTE:
For dismounting / mounting instructions for the different modules mentioned in this
document refer to chapter 3.5: ''Replacements / Repair Procedure''
1.1 Maintenance Frequency
The maintenance has to be carried out (whatever comes first):

• Every 25 000 image plate cycles or
• Once a year
1.2 Required Time
Approximately 3 hours


1.3 Required Tools
IMPORTANT:
The standard tools are listed in chapter 3.2: ''Tools and auxiliary means''
Tools required additionally to the standard tools:
Description Order number *

1,5 mm Cu filter CM+9 5155 1015 2
2 mm Al Filter CM+9 5148 1090 0
Troubleshooting Guide Refer to latest version on MedNet GSO
Library under:
MEDNET GSO => Computed Radiography
=> CR Digitizers => DX-M =>
Trouble shooting guide =>
1.4 Required Cleaning Material
Following cleaning material is required:
Description Order number *

Vacuum cleaner CM+9 9999 0895 0
(220/240V, 50-60 Hz) Or a comparable vacuum cleaner
commercially available: Acquire locally.
Dirt bags for vacuum cleaner (10 x) CM+9 9999 0896 0
Vacuum cleaner (100/120V, 50-60 Hz) Commercially available: Acquire locally.
CR screen cleaner (2 bottles) 10+9 9999 1197 0
Prosat wipes CM+9 9999 1219 0
Lint-free cloth Commercially available: Acquire locally.
1.5 Required Spare Parts
Description Order number*

Air filter CM+9 5170 9855 0


2 Diagnostics
2.1 Questioning of the Customer
ACTION:
Ask the customer for any problem that appeared since the last maintenance.
2.2 Analyzing Device specific Information in the Service Software at the Local
Display of the Digitizer
NOTE:
It is also possible to access every information via web interface.
2.2.1 Check of Error Statistics
(1) Enter the service menu in the local display of the digitizer.
(2) Select: <Reporting - Error Statistics>
(3) Analyze error statistics.
Figure 1: Example
NOTE:
For the explanation of the error codes use the web interface menu:
<explain error code> under Analysis and Repair.
For more information refer to chapter 3.2:
''Tools and auxiliary means''


2.2.2 Info Counter Analysis
(1) Select in the service menu:

<General Device Info →
Info Counter>
(2) Select node: "Entire Device"
(3) Select tab "Values" and Figure 2

check the different entries.
(4) Select tab "Counters" and check the different entries.
(5) Select tab "Lists" and check the different entries.
(6) Click on the errors displayed in the “Lists” tab to check the timestamp:
This shows when the error occurred.
(7) Check, whether one of these errors is sporadic and can be solved via software
upgrade, cleaning or a replacement.
(8) Repeat steps (3) to (7) for the other selectable nodes as shown in Figure 2.
NOTE:
For detailed information about the further proceeding concerning the checked values
and counters refer to the latest Troubleshooting Guide*.
2.2.3 Reset of the Relative Counters
(1) In the Info counter select the node: "Entire

device"
(2) Select tab: “Counters”
(3) Analyze the counters.
(4) Select all events (select upper most event,
then select lowest event with the shift key
pressed).
(5) Select: "Reset Counter"
This option will reset the relative
counter.
(6) Repeat steps (3) and (4) for
other selectable nodes as shown in Figure 2.
Figure 3


2.3 Documenting current Image Quality
IMPORTANT:
Documenting the current image quality is made by creating a flatfield image.
For instructions how to create a flatfield image refer to:
DX-G /DX-M Service Manual, Chapter 1 "Controls, Connections, Setup Procedure"
(1) Evaluate the image.

(2) Keep the image as reference image "before maintenance".
3 Maintenance - Power off
Preparation:
(1) Go to the service menu at the local display of the digitizer.
(2) Select:
<Analysis and Repair → Move IP Carrier to Maintenance
Position>
(3) Select <Maintenance Position>.
The digitizer moves the IP Carrier to maintenance position.
(4) Switch off the digitizer.
(5) Lift the digitizer and move it from the wall.
The “maintenance power off” is split up into the following steps:
# Step Section
1 Visual Inspection 3.1
2 Cleaning 3.2
3 Checking Cassettes 3.3
4 Reassembling of all parts 3.4
5 Replacement of Air Filter 3.5


3.1 Visual Inspection
3.1.1 Perform Visual Check of Power and Network Cable
(1) Unplug the mains and network cable at the digitizer.

(2) Check the condition of both cables.
3.1.2 Perform Visual Check of Covers
(1) Remove covers of the digitizer.

(2) Perform a visual check of the covers listed below:
• Front cover c
• Lower Buffer cover d
• Right side cover e 1
2
Figure 4
• Left side cover f

6
• Upper left cover g 7
5
• Upper right cover h
4 8
• Buffer right cover i
• Upper cover j
Figure 5


• Buffer rear cover k

• Rear cover l 9
10
Figure 6
3.1.3 Perform Visual Check of Cleaning Brush
(1) Remove Optic Module.

(2) Remove PMI 52 board carrier.
(3) Remove Photo Multiplier Tube (PMT) with Light collector carefully.
IMPORTANT:
• Handle the Photo Multiplier with Light collector very carefully.
• Store it on the straight, metal side (see Figure 7).
• Store it on a safe and clean place.
• Protect PMT from bright light. Cover the light entrance to protect the
PMT from excessive light entering.
Figure 7
(4) Check the condition of the cleaning brush (see Figure 8).


Figure 8
(5) If vertical stripes are visible in the image made under step ''2.3: Documenting
current Image Quality'':
Clean the mirror and the entrance surface of the light collector by moving the
brush a few times over the whole width of the light collector.


3.1.4 Perform Visual Check of Flexible Cables inside the Digitizer
ACTION:
Perform a visual check of the cables listed below.
NOTE:
Look after the condition of the cables.
There should be no rifts or other damages.
• Cable from PMI52 board to 1

PMI (Photo Multiplier Interface)
Power Distribution Board c 2
• Cable from PMI52 board to PMT d
• Cable from PMI52 board to
3
Display control board e
• Cable from PMI52 to 4
Optic module f
• Cable from PMI52 board to 6
IP (Image Plate) Handling Board and 5
to Cassette Handling Board g
• Cable from PMI52 board to
Calibration Board h
Figure 9
• Cable from Cassette Handling Board to Tag Reader i


Figure 10
• Cable from Cassette Handling Board to Cassette Transport Home

Position Sensor j
Figure 11


• Cable from IP Handling Board to IP

Carrier Distribution Board k
• Cable from IP Handling Board to
Interconnection SM Carrier Drive l
• Cable from IP Handling Board to SM 9
Linear Transport 10
• Cable from IP Handling Board 13
to SM-Slow scan
• Cable from IP Handling Board to
Vacuum Pump
11
12
Figure 12


3.1.5 Perform Visual Check of All Belts, Flexible Vacuum Hose and Spindle

(2) Check condition of the belts listed below:
NOTE:
Look after the condition of the belts.
There should be no rifts or other damages.
• Linear transport belt left

1 1
and right 1
• Connector drive belt d
2
• Linear transport drive belt e
• Swivel drive belt f
1 1
Figure 13
• Cassette transport belt g

• Cassette opener belt h


5
6
Figure 14
• Pusher Drive belt i
Figure 15
(3) Check the tension of the left and right linear transport belts: It should be the
same left and right.
(4) Check the ground plate of the digitizer for belt abrasion.
If linear transport belt abrasion is visible, check belts thoroughly: Investigate
reason for abrasion.
(5) Check the condition of the flexible vacuum hose.
(6) Check the condition of the spindle of the slow scan unit.
IMPORTANT:
If dust is visible on the ground plate from a previous repair action, clean the inside with
a vacuum cleaner.
If small parts from previous repair actions are on the ground plate, remove them.
Otherwise the small parts may get in between ground plate and chassis when lifting
and moving the digitizer the next time.


3.1.6 Check the Parallelism of Traverse in Take over Position
IMPORTANT:
Before pulling at the transport belt, be sure that the swivel drive is in home position.
(1) Pull left transport belt (see Figure 16) carefully downwards, until the traverse and
the L-bracket of the IP carrier adapter plate are on the same level.
(2) Check gap between L-bracket and upper stop position: No gap may be visible at
the left and right L-bracket.
Figure 16
(3) If there is a gap visible, a horizontal traverse adjustment must be performed.

Refer to Chapter 3.6 - Adjustments of the Service Manual.


3.2 Cleaning
3.2.1 Cleaning General
REQUIRED TOOLS:
Vacuum cleaner
ACTION:
Clean the inside with a vacuum cleaner.
The dust especially accumulates in the bottom of the digitizer.
3.2.2 Cleaning of the Erasure Unit
WARNING:
During operation the erasure unit is hot: 200 c
Risk of burns.
• Avoid contact with the Erasure Unit.
• Observe the relevant sticker on the Erasure Unit.
CAUTION:
Sensitive surface. Reduced image quality possible due to clouded reflector.
• Do not touch the reflector of the erasure unit by hand.
• Do not use cleaning agents to clean the reflector.
• Only use a lint-free cloth for cleaning.
REQUIRED TOOLS:
Lint free cloth
(1) Check the reflector, i.e. the lower side of the erasure unit.
(2) Remove dirt or dust with a lint free cloth.
Result The erasure unit is cleaned.


3.2.3 Checking of the Spindle of the Slow Scan Unit
CAUTION:
Spindle is lubricated with special grease. To prevent loss of lubrication
properties, this grease may not be mixed with other lubrication material.
Do not lubricate the spindle!
REQUIRED TOOLS:
Lint free cloth
(1) Remove 2 screws at the power supply carrier on the rear side of the digitizer.
(2) Move the power supply carrier to get access to the inside of the digitizer.
(3) Remove excess lubricant and dirt deposits from lower end of spindle.
DO NOT clean spindle.
Result The spindle is checked.
3.3 Checking Cassettes
3.3.1 Checking of Cassette Condition
ACTION:
Check the following items of the cassettes:
• Outside condition
• Shutter
• Obvious damage due to drop of cassette
In case of damages inform the customer and point out that the cassette should not be
used anymore, otherwise malfunction of the device may appear.


3.4 Reassembling of removed Parts
ACTION:
Reassemble the removed parts:
• Erasure unit
• PMT with light collector
• PMI board carrier
• Optic Module
• All covers
• Cables
• Covers
3.5 Replacement of Air Filter
(1) Release the 2 clamps at the air filter 1 .

(2) Remove the air filter frame and the air-filter element.
(3) Replace the air filter element 2 .
Observe arrows at filter element for airflow direction. Airflow direction is from
outside to inside of the digitizer as indicated on the frame.
Airflow
Direction
Figure 17
Result The air filter is replaced.


4 Maintenance - Power On
WARNING:
completely.
o Transportation locks are inserted.
o Digitizer is not lowered completely.
4.1 Check of Safety Switch

(2) Open the right door approximately 1 cm (approximately 0.4 inch):
Result: The safety switch has to switch off the digitizer.
If the test fails, the switch is defective and needs to be replaced.
(3) Close right door.
4.2 Performing Stall Calibration
(1) Start the digitizer Service Client.

(2) Enter username and password.
(3) Select: <Preventive Maintenance - Stall Calibration>
(4) Select: <Calibrate all Parameters>
(5) Wait till the stall calibration is finished: Takes approximately 10 minutes.
Result The stall calibration is successfully performed.


4.3 Performing one Test Cycle
(1) Identify an unexposed cassette on the Control PC with option

<System Diagnosis – Flatfield>.
(2) Insert the cassette in the digitizer.
(3) Check for abnormal noise.
5 Technical Image Quality Check of the System
# Step Section
1 Creating a flatfield image. 5.1.1
2 Checking the image quality. 5.1.2
If the image quality is not OK:
Compare the flatfield with the test patterns “lowest
acceptable quality”.
5.1.1 Creating a Flatfield Image
(1) Expose a flatfield with the same cassette used for image quality check before
maintenance as described in section 2.3.
(2) At the Control PC select exam type "System Diagnosis - Flatfield".
(3) Insert the exposed cassette in the digitizer.
IMPORTANT:
By selection of examination type "System Diagnosis - Flatfield",
the correct settings for image processing of the flatfield are used.
(4) Let it scan by the digitizer and wait until the digitizer shows the ready screen.
(5) Print the image or send it to the archive (depending on what is available).


5.1.2 Checking the Images at the Lightbox or Viewing Station
IMPORTANT:
The settings of window and level may not be changed after import of the limit pattern.
(1) Compare the flatfield made at the beginning of the maintenance procedure with
the one made under step 5.1.1.
Evaluation:
If the image made during step 5.1.1 visually looks as good or better than the
flatfield made at the beginning of the maintenance procedure described in
section 2.3, the image quality did not get worse during maintenance.
(2) Check the image quality of the flatfield for the following aberrations:
• Stripes in fast scan or slow scan direction
• Large area inhomogeneities
• Unacceptable number of white dots
Evaluation:
(1) If the flatfield does not show one of the aberrations,
If the flatfield shows one of the aberrations, continue with step (2).
• Limit Pattern Set for verification of shading calibration GenRad:
• Limit Pattern Set, for verification of Mixed Use and Mammo Only use:

IMPORTANT:
specialist.


6 Completion of the Maintenance
# Step Section
1 Reset Maintenance Indicator. 6.1
2 Create a backup of the system. 6.2
3 Inform the customer about what was done during the 6.3
maintenance and which repairs need to be done in next future.
6.1 Reset of the Maintenance Indicator
(1) In the digitizer service menu

select:
<Maintenance Indicator>
(2) Select: <Reset of
Maintenance Indicator>
(3) Click: <Confirm>
Figure 18
6.2 Creating a Backup of Device specific Data
(1) In the service menu select <Backup & Restore>.

(2) Leave default settings.
(3) Select <Backup selected files> to perform a backup.
(4) Select storage medium and instert the storage medium.
(5) Close the service menu.

(6) Answer the dialogue box “Did you perform any maintenance or repair actions?”
with <Yes>.
6.3 Customer Conversation
(1) Fill out the Maintenance checklist and hand it out to the customer.
(2) Explain the results of the maintenance to the customer.


Maintenance
DD+DIS003.10E Maintenance Checklist
7 Maintenance Checklist
Digitizer Serial Number: Image Plate Cycles since last maintenance:
The maintenance has to be carried out:

• Every 25 000 Image Plate Cycles or
• Once a year
NOTE:
Maintenance must be carried out according to the maintenance instructions:
DD+DIS003.10E
Diagnostics OK
Questioning of the Ask the customer about problems with the digitizer.
customer
Error statistics Read-out and analyze the error statistics.
Infocounter analysis Read-out and analyze the infocounter.
Reset of the relative Reset the relative counters of all nodes.
counters
Checking current Exposure and print or archive of a flatfield.
image quality
Maintenance points - Power off OK

Visual inspection Check visually power and network cable.
Check visually the covers.
Check visually the cleaning brush.
Check visually the cables inside the digitizer.
Check visually the belts.
Check visually the flexible vacuum hose.
Check visually the spindle.
Check visually the parallelism of the Traverse.


Maintenance
Maintenance points - Power off OK

Cleaning general Clean the inside with a vacuum cleaner.
Cleaning of the Clean the erasure unit with a lint free cloth.
erasure unit
Checking of spindle Remove excess lubricant and dirt deposits from lower
end of the spindle at the slow scan unit with a lint free
cloth.
Checking of cassette Check all cassettes for damage.
condition
Replacing the air filter Replace the air filter.
Maintenance points - Power on OK

Checking safety switch Open the left cover approx. 1 cm (approx. 0.4 in.) to
check function of safety switch.
Performing stall Perform stall calibration for all motors.
calibration for all
motors
Performing test cycles Perform scan with one unexposed IP.
Technical Image Quality Check of the System OK

Technical image Exposure and check of flatfield.
quality check of the Compare with flatfield made before maintenance.
system
Only if image quality is not OK:
Compare the flatfield with test pattern "lowest
acceptable quality" (slow scan / fast scan direction).
Completion OK
Reset of maintenance Reset the maintenance indicator.
indicator
Creating a backup of Create a backup.
device specific data
Storage on hard disk and on service PC.
Customer conversation Explain the results of preventive maintenance.


Maintenance
Remarks:
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
............................................................. .........................................................
Date / Signature Service Technician Date / Signature Customer


Imaging Services Service Bulletins
DX-M
Type 5170 / 200
DX-G
Type 5170 / 100
► Please note
Service Bulletins are not part of the Service Manual for Download.
Please download the Service Bulletins from the GSO Library:

MEDNET GSO Æ Computed Radiography Æ CR Digitizers Æ DX-M Æ
Service Bulletin *

service_bulletin_cover_e_template_v02
DD+DIS001.10E Service Bulletins


Imaging Services Installation Planning
DX-M
Type 5170 / 200
DX-G
Type 5170 / 100
This document is separately available. Order number: DD+DIS002.10E

06-2015 Printed in Germany Document Node ID 28905968
Document_standard_e_template_v01
1 2 3
DD+DIS002.10E Installation Planning
► Manufacturer
Published by
D - 81539 München
Germany
affiliates.
infringement.
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
the product.
IMPORTANT:


1 2 3
This document contains all planning data for DX-G (Type 5170 / 100) and
DX-M (Type 5170 / 200) with Software Version NIM_2000 and higher. It includes the
required measures to be carried out on site prior to the machine delivery.
This chapter is divided into:
 Construction planning data
 Technical connection and performance data
 Safety instructions, listing of certificates


1 2 3

2.4 06-2015  Adapted Sections:
 1 Product Description
 2.2 Accessories
 4 System Integration
 5.2 Conditions during Operation
 8.2 Compatible Cassettes / IP Types
 8.3 Functional Data
 8.4 Technical Data of Digitizer
 8.45 Climatic Data
 8.8 Interface Data
 9 Safety Standards
 Added Sections:
 4.2 Network connection in the installation room
 6.1 Network Connection
 8.11 Laser data
Document Title
DD+DIS077.09E NX Workstation Service Manual,
DD+DIS001.10E DX-M Service Manual,
Chapter 2 - Functional Description


1 2 3
LIST OF CONTENTS
1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION ......................................................................................................7

1.1 System overview .......................................................................................................................7
1.1.1 System components .................................................................................................................7
1.1.2 Centralized / Decentralized Installation ....................................................................................8
1.2 Workflow of a DX-G / DX-M system..........................................................................................9
2 SCOPE OF DELIVERY AND ACCESSORIES.......................................................................10

2.1 Scope of delivery ....................................................................................................................10
2.2 Accessories.............................................................................................................................11
3 ROOM PREPARATION..........................................................................................................12
3.1 Required free space................................................................................................................12
3.1.1 Minimum required free space for operation ............................................................................12
3.1.2 Minimum required free Space for Maintenance and Service Accessibility .............................13
3.2 Preparing optional earthquake kit / mobile use.......................................................................14
4 SYSTEM INTEGRATION .......................................................................................................16

4.1 Integration into the hospital network .......................................................................................16
4.2 Network connection in the installation room ...........................................................................17
5 CLIMATIC AND AMBIENT CONDITIONS..............................................................................17

5.1 Conditions during transport and storage.................................................................................17
5.2 Conditions during operation ....................................................................................................18
6 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS ..............................................................................................19

6.1 Network connection ................................................................................................................21
7 DIGITIZER DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHT ..............................................................................22

7.1 Digitizer with closed covers.....................................................................................................22
7.2 Digitizer with left cover opened ...............................................................................................22
7.3 Dimensions of the digitizer, including packaging ....................................................................23
7.4 Weight of digitizer ...................................................................................................................23
7.5 Dimensions ID tablet...............................................................................................................23
8 SPECIFICATIONS..................................................................................................................24
8.1 Type overview .........................................................................................................................24

1 2 3
8.2 Compatible cassette/IP types .................................................................................................24
8.3 Functional data .......................................................................................................................25
8.4 Electrical data of digitizer ........................................................................................................26
8.5 Climatic data ...........................................................................................................................26
8.6 Acoustic noise level ................................................................................................................26
8.7 Boot-up time and warm-up time..............................................................................................26
8.8 Interface data ..........................................................................................................................27
8.9 Service data ............................................................................................................................27
8.10 Functional data Image Plates .................................................................................................27
8.11 Laser data ...............................................................................................................................28
9 SAFETY STANDARDS...........................................................................................................29
10 CHECKLISTS .........................................................................................................................31
10.1 Installation planning checklist .................................................................................................31
10.2 Installation readiness checklist ...............................................................................................33


1 2 3
1 Product description
This document describes the installation planning of the digitizer including cassettes
& plates and the ID tablet. To be able to install the complete system
(see section 1.1.1) it is additionally required to perform all steps described in the
NX Workstation Installation Planning document. Refer to the Agfa HealthCare library:
Computed Radiography > CR Workstation Software
For more information concerning other system components like printers or softcopy
stations also refer to the Agfa HealthCare library.
This Service Manual provides information for the digitizers with type numbers:
 Type 5170, subtype 100 = DX-G
 Type 5170, subtype 200 = DX-M
1.1 System overview
1.1.1 System components
The DX-G / DX-M digitizer is part of a CR system, comprising:

 Digitizer: A digitizer for scanning image plates retaining latent X-ray images. The
digitizer accepts a maximum of 5 cassettes at a time, to be scanned sequentially.
 The NX Workstation: One or more CR workstations with ID Tablet for cassette
received from the digitizer.
 ID Tablet (from SN 15539 on): Exposed cassette has to be identified in ID-tablet
prior to entering into the digitizer.
NX workstation Digitizer
Cassettes with
Image Plates
ID Tablet Hospital Network
Figure 1


1 2 3
1.1.2 Centralized / Decentralized Installation
Due to its small footprint, the high throughput and the capability to store 5 cassettes in
the buffer, the digitizer can be installed as centralized or decentralized device.
 Centralized means:
The digitizer scans image plates from different examination rooms.
Figure 2: Installations example for centralized Installation
 Decentralized means:
The digitizer is used for one examination room.
Figure 3: Installations examples for decentralized Installation


1 2 3
1.2 Workflow of a DX-G / DX-M system
Figure 4
Step :
Take the exposure.
Step  and :
Go to the processing station and insert the cassette in the ID tablet.
Enter the patient data and select the examination type or select the patient from the
worklist. Select the "ID" button (ID stands for "identify").
Step :
Insert the cassette in the input buffer of the digitizer: Scanning starts.
The digitizer sends the image data during scanning (i.e. during the IP* cycle) to the NX
workstation. The digitizer also erases the IP*. After scanning it can be used for the next
exposure.
* IP = Image Plate


1 2 3
2 Scope of delivery and accessories

2.1 Scope of delivery
NOTE:
The digitizer is delivered with all parts, which are required to connect it into the
network. The number, type and format of cassettes / image plates are depending on
the individual order.
IMPORTANT:
It is not possible to connect the digitizer to another type of Agfa CR workstation than
NX Workstation (DX-G at least NX2.0.8000, DX-M: at least NX2.0.8200).
For additional system component compatibility information refer to following
documents:
 Solution Structure Data Document, Document ID 30781759
 CR/DR Interoperability Document ID 31333326
Example for packing list:

Quantity Description
1 Digitizer
1 Packing list for Accessory
1 CE declaration of conformity
1 Enclosure with information concerning RoHS*
1 Power cable, Europe, 3.00 m
1 Power cable, USA, 3.00 m / 10 feet long
1 Network cable 5 m / 16 feet long
1 1.5 mm CU filter
1 2 mm Al filter (only for DX-M)
1 Installation Procedure
(Chapters 1 and 11 of the Technical Documentation)
1 USB stick with software for the digitizer, limit patterns for
flatfield evaluation and service enclosures
1 Ratchet for lifting and lowering the device including elongation and
nut (8 mm)
1 Special Allen key for removal of vacuum valve
1 CD with User Manuals in all specified languages
1 DX-M Mobile only: Tool to lock/unlock IP Carrier
1 DX-M Mobile only: Quick Guide for Mobile Installation
* RoHS = Restriction of the use of certain Hazardous Substances
IMPORTANT:
The digitizer is delivered with two power cables for US/Europe. If digitizer is installed
outside the US or Europe, organize a power cable for your country locally.
For detailed specifications refer to section 6: Electrical Connections

1 2 3
2.2 Accessories
Warning:
standby generator.
The following accessories are available for DX-G / DX-M digitizers:
Item Comment ABC Codes

CR EasyLift The CR Easylift enables increased accuracy and EAUGV
ease of operation to Full Leg Full Spine
exposures, enabling precise positioning of the
CR Full Body Cassette Holder with respect to the
X-ray tube, regardless of patient height.
CR Full Body Unique, low-wear cassette holder for increased EAUGV
Cassette Holder productivity in full body CR imaging
CR Anti-scatter grid X-ray grids improve the sharpness of x-ray EMUXJ
version 2 for CR images by trapping the greater part of scatter
Full Body Cassette radiation, resulting in a cleaner, clearer and more
Holder detailed image.
Earthquake Kit To be used in earthquake areas. 5NS2V
ID Tablet Required for identification (= writing of patient EPKAP
(from SN 15539 on) related data on the ID chip) of the cassette.
Minimum required: One ID tablet per system
NOTE:
For order codes of the different accessories refer to the spare parts list.
IMPORTANT:
Connect the digitizer to an un-interruptible power supply (UPS) or an institutional
standby generator to avoid images being lost due to a power failure.
It is recommended to select an Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) which is capable to
supply  1.200 W (effective power) for a minimum of 5 minutes. Refer to the UPS
manufacturer specifications.
Note, that the digitizer has no interface (i.e. no RS232/USB) to the UPS. In case of a
power failure the customer will not be informed at the digitizer display.


1 2 3
NOTE to Accessory "Remote Service":

In general it is possible to diagnose and repair the Digitizer to a certain extent remotely.
To enable remote service of the Digitizer remote access has first to be organized.
Remote Access is established via the Agfa own Secure Remote Service System
(SRSS).
For more information to the SRSS see Agfa HealthCare Library*:
Technical Services > Service Delivery > SRSS
* Only applicable for Agfa Employees.
For external partners: Contact your local Agfa partner.
3 Room preparation
3.1 Required free space
3.1.1 Minimum required free space for operation
CAUTION:
Reduced airflow may lead to pollution in the digitizer.
Keep a minimum of 5 cm (2 inches) between left digitizer side and the wall.
Corner installation is possible. Observe minimum free space 5 cm on the left (air flow)
and 5 cm in the rear (for facilitating the right cover / door to be opened by the
customer). In case an earthquake fixation kit is installed 10 cm in the rear are required.
Do not store anything:

 In front of the left cover at the air outlet
 In front of the right cover (underneath the output buffer) at the air inlet
NOTE:
The floor of the installation place must be stable and may not transmit mechanical
vibrations as e.g. footfall sound.
IMPORTANT:
The main switch on the right side must always be accessible.
NOTE:
By the design of the output-buffer it is always possible to open the right cover.
This is necessary for replacing the air filter and cleaning the optic module using
the cleaning brush.


1 2 3
Figure 5: Minimum required free Space for Operation (space for mobile installations can be smaller)
3.1.2 Minimum required free Space for Maintenance and Service Accessibility
IMPORTANT:
For service purposes, to get more free space, the digitizer can be lifted up and moved
on the integrated rollers.
115 c
m [45.3
]
h]
i nc 5 5 cm
.65 h] [.]
[21 inc
5c
m
[2 0, 1 ch
]
5 in
cm .6
51 [23 Minimum space recommended for service accessibility
cm
60
Figure 6: Minimum required free Space for Maintenance and Service Accessibility
(space for mobile installations can be smaller)


1 2 3
3.2 Preparing optional earthquake kit / mobile use
WARNING:
Hospital is responsible for:
ACTION:
Make an appointment with the hospital technician (or his delegate) for mounting the
base plate and the retaining bracket for the wall fixation. Explain the tasks, which have
to be delivered by the hospital on time during the installation sequence.
Follow the instructions in the document enclosed to the earthquake kit to mount the
earthquake kit. Use dimensions shown in figures on the next page as orientation.
IMPORTANT:
The dimensions shown in the figures on the next page are only for orientation.
Exact dimensions must be derived from physical installation.
IMPORTANT:
The mobile installation of the DX-M digitizers requires the installation of the base plate
and the wall fixation. These parts must be mounted before the installation of the
digitizer at the mobile site by the manufacturer of the mammography trailer / bus.
For the mounting of these parts the responsibility lies in the hand of the manufacturer
of the mammography trailer / bus. The field service engineer is only responsible for the
installation of the digitizer itself at the prepared mobile site.


1 2 3
Wall Retaining
Bracket
6,6 mm [0.26 inch]
Retaining
901,5 mm [ 35.49 inch]

Bracket
Floor Floor
Figure 7: Side view of the digitizer Figure 8: Rear view of the digitizer
Base Plate
450 mm [17.71 inch]
Wall
600 mm [23.62 inch]
5,0 mm [0.2 inch]
125 mm [4.92 inch] 80 mm [3.15 inch]
Wall
Figure 9: Top view of the digitizer


1 2 3
4 System integration
(1) Download following documents before installation.

 Solution Structure Data Document, Document ID* 30781759
 CR/DR Interoperability Matrix, Document ID* 31333326,
(2) By means of these documents check, whether the new ordered system
components and the already available equipment on site (if available) can be
used together in the system.
* Access the document by entering the document ID in the Agfa HealthCare Library search window,
or follow the direct link.
4.1 Integration into the hospital network
The Digitizer has to be connected to the NX workstation via network cable,

either directly or via hospital network.
The following table lists the default network parameters of the Digitizer ex factory.
Parameter: Default value: Value:
IP Address: 192.192.192.192 ..............................................

Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0 ..............................................
Gateway IP Address: 192.192.192.1 ..............................................
AE Title: DIG_DEFAULT ..............................................
Hostname: 192.192.192.192 ..............................................
NOTE:
For detailed information, please refer to NX Workstation Installation Planning document
in the Agfa HealthCare library
Computed Radiography > CR Workstation Software


1 2 3
WARNING:
When different combinations of equipment are used in various medical
environments a potential difference (V) can exist between the protective earths in
different localities. If the protective earthing fails this potential difference can
cause a HAZARD for the OPERATOR or for the PATIENT.
 To comply with IEC 60601-1 (annex I) all computers and peripherals must be
 Always connect the associated monitor to the same
Uninterruptible Power Supply as the PC.
4.2 Network connection in the installation room
The network connection in the installation room has to comply with IEC 60950-1
5 Climatic and ambient conditions
5.1 Conditions during transport and storage
Storage of packed device According IEC 721-3-1 Storage: 1K4, 1M2

Transport of packed device According IEC 721-3-2 Transport: 2K2, 2M2
Ambient transport Minimum: -25 °C
temperature DX-G and DX-M Maximum: +55 °C


1 2 3
5.2 Conditions during operation
Ambient temperature Minimum: +15 °C (59°F)

DX-G and DX-M Maximum: +30 °C (86°F)
Ambient temperature DX-M Minimum: +20 °C (68°F)
when using Mammography Maximum: +30 °C (86°F)
applications NIP
Ambient temperature DX-M Minimum: +15 °C (59°F)
when using Mammography Maximum: +30 °C (86°F)
applications PIP
Relative humidity Minimum: 15 %
(non condensing) Maximum: 75 %
Barometric Pressure 70 kPa to 106 kPa
Related altitude on site 0 m to 3000 m
Radiation influences If the digitizer is installed in the X-Ray room, it has to
be protected against scatter radiation.
WARNING:
Image plate is sensitive for scattered X-rays. Reduced image quality possible.
The digitizer and the cassette storage shall be protected against X-ray radiation this
way, that the annual dose equivalent at the installation place will not exceed 1 mSv.


1 2 3
Ambient Light The digitizer may not be operated in direct sun light.
No influence on image quality is guaranteed if
operated in ambient light of maximum 2500 Lux.
High Frequency Emission For detailed information refer to the digitizer user
and Immunity manual.
Environmental vibration Operation without functional restrictions guaranteed
conditions under the following mechanical conditions:
IEC721-3-3: Class 3M1, restricted to frequency range
40 - 200 Hz / 1 m/s2
(instead of 9 - 200 Hz) for sinusoidal vibration.
NOTE:
The floor of the installation place must be stable and may not transmit mechanical
vibrations.
WARNING:
Excessive vibrations during scanning may decrease image quality.
Do not apply excessive shock or vibration to the DX-G / DX-M during operation. This
may decrease the image quality. Neither should the device be moved during operation.
6 Electrical connections
WARNING:
Electrical device. Shock possible.
INSTRUCTION:
 Position the Agfa products so that it is possible to disconnect the mains power
connection if required.
 Local and International wiring regulations must be observed. Check all supplies
and voltages, currents, trips and fuses with the Hospital facilities department or
their engineers.


1 2 3
The following installation guidelines have to be considered for the

installation of the digitizers:
Installation guidelines Electrical installations have to be done in accordance
with national regulations or statutory requirements, e.g.:
VDE (Germany)
Electrical installations in the installation room must be
in compliance with the regulations IEC 364, VDE 0100,
and VDE 0107.
UL (US)
Electrical installations in the installation room must be
in compliance with the regulations: “National Electrical
Code" (NEC) (NFPA70)
Mains connection in the VDE (Germany)
installation room Double earthed pin outlet in compliance with DIN
49441 and with CEE 7 standard cover V II
UL (US)
Earthed contact outlet for the NEMA 5-15 P plug,
hospital grade (HG)
The following electrical connections have to be considered for the installation of the
digitizer:
Mains cable Euro-Version: CEE7/7 - H05VV - F3G1 - 3 x 1 mm²

(part of delivery) with earthed pin plug; 3.0 m
US/CAN-Version: NEMA 5-15P - SJT, 3 x AGW 18

with NEMA 5-15P plug; 3.0 m, hospital grade (HG)
US Europe
IEC C13 CEE7/7
NEMA 5-15P IEC C13

5366_chap11_001.cdr
Network cable PATCHCABLE F/UTP CAT.5E 5,0M

(part of delivery)
Mains switch Upon digitizer installation, it must be ensured that either
the mains connector or an all-pole circuit breaker for
the installation on site is located close to the device and
easily accessible.


1 2 3
Ethernet
Connector
Mains
Switch
Intergrounding Power Supply Input

Connector 100-240 V / 50-60 Hz AC
Figure 10
6.1 Network connection
The network connection in the installation room has to comply with IEC 60950-1


1 2 3
7 Digitizer dimensions and weight
7.1 Digitizer with closed covers
Length / depth* (cm / inch) 51.0 / 20.1

Width* (cm / inch) 115.0 / 45.3
Height (cm / inch) 123.0 / 48.4
66.0 [26.0]
101.5 [40.0]
51.0 [20.1]
115.0 [45,3]
Figure 11: Dimensions in cm [inch]

* For mobile installations length is 57,5 cm (22,6 inch) and width is 117,0 cm (46,1 inch)
7.2 Digitizer with left cover opened
Length / depth (cm / inch) 55.5 / 21.9

Width (cm / inch) 149.0 / 58.7
Height (cm / inch) 123.0 / 48.4
100.0 [39.4]
135.5 [53.4]
55.5 [21.9]
149.0 [58.7]
Figure 12: Dimensions in cm [inch]
NOTE:
By the dimension of the Output-Buffer it is always possible to open the right cover.


1 2 3
7.3 Dimensions of the digitizer, including packaging

Width (cm / inch) 130.0 / 51.18
Height (cm / inch) incl. palette 146.0 / 57.48
7.4 Weight of digitizer
Digitizer alone (kg / lb) 180.0 / 396.8

Digitizer with packing 246.0 / 542.3
incl. palette (kg / lb)
7.5 Dimensions ID tablet

Width (cm / inch) 38.0 / 14.96
Height (cm / inch) 11.0 / 4.33
Weight of the ID Tablet (kg / lb) 12 / 26.5
44.0 cm
[1 7.32 inch
38.0 cm ]
[14.96 in
ch]
11.0 cm [4
.33 inch]
Figure 13


1 2 3
8 Specifications
8.1 Type overview
Name Type ABC Code Serial Numbers

DX-G DIGITIZER 5170/100 5NBGQ ≥ 1001
DX-M DIGITIZER 5170/200 E4YW2 ≥ 10001
DX-G DIGITIZER
- 5QQCW -
REWORKED
DX-M DIGITIZER
- 5QQDY -
REWORKED
8.2 Compatible cassette/IP types
IMPORTANT:
Do not perform a shading calibration with the CR HD5.0 AEC General cassettes.
CR HM5.0 Mammography and CR MM3.0R Mammography may not be used at the
same time at one device. The digitizer cannot process Mammo PIP and Mammo NIP
simultaneously.
(1) Refer to the CR/DR Interoperability Matrix, Document ID 31333326,

(Intranet Link / Extranet Link) for a list of compatible cassettes and Image Plates.


1 2 3
8.3 Functional data
Throughput Cassette format Minimum number of

Cassettes per hour
Using the 35 x 43 cm SR (CR HD5.0 / CR MD4.0R) 83
default erasure 35 x 43 cm HR (CR HD5.0 / CR MD4.0R) 72
cycle 35 x 43 cm HR (CR HD5.0 FLFS) 72
35 x 35 cm SR (CR MD4.0R) 83
35 x 43 cm (CR MD4.0R FLFS HR) 72
35 x 35 cm HR (CR MD4.0R) 71
24 x 30 cm (CR HD5.0) 85
24 x 30 cm (CR MD4.0R) 83
18 x 24 cm (CR HD5.0) 93
18 x 24 cm (CR MD4.0R) 90
15 x 30 cm (CR HD5.0) 100
15 x 30 cm (CR MD4.0R) 97
18 x 24 cm (CR HM5.0 MAMMO) 49
24 x 30 cm (CR HM5.0 MAMMO) 41
18 x 24 cm (CR MM3.0R MAMMO) 48
24 x 30 cm (CR MM3.0R MAMMO) 40
18 x 24 cm (CR HD5.0 Extremities) 49
24 x 30 cm (CR HD5.0 Extremities) 41
Bits per pixel / number of grey steps 16 / 65535

Scan Resolution GenRad [µm] 100 (for SR: 150)
Scan Resolution GenRad SR [µm] 150
Scan Resolution GenRad Extremities [µm] 50
Scan Resolution Mammo [µm] 50
Image Buffer DX-G and DX-M 10 images


1 2 3
8.4 Electrical data of digitizer
Operating Current 100 - 240V 6.3 - 2.6 A

50-60Hz
Rated voltage [~V] 100 - 240 AC
Mains fuse protection Europe: 16 A
USA & Japan: 15 A
Frequency [Hz] 50/60
Power consumption [W] Standby: 87
220 V - 240 V / 50-60 Hz Average continuous scanning: 237
configuration Maximum: 590
Power consumption [W] Standby: 92
100 V - 120 V / 50-60 Hz Average continuous scanning: 245
configuration Maximum: 621
8.5 Climatic data
Standby: 92 Wh / 314 BTU1 maximum

Heat dissipation per hour
During continuous 245 Wh / 836 BTU1 maximum
operation:
1
British Thermal Unit (BTU)
8.6 Acoustic noise level
Standby: 45 dB(A) maximum

Acoustic Noise Level
according ISO 7779
During scanning: 65 dB(A) maximum
8.7 Boot-up time and warm-up time
Boot-up Time - Warm Up Time 3 minutes


1 2 3
8.8 Interface data
Ethernet, RJ45 connector (female),

10/100 Mbit/s autosensing *,
Interface to NX workstation shielding CAT5
According to IEC 60950-1.
* Gigabit Ethernet is not supported.
8.9 Service data
Info counter Yes

Error diagnostics built in Yes
Remote service capable Yes
8.10 Functional data Image Plates
Image plate type CR HD5.0, CR HM5.0 Mammo,

CR MD4.0R, CR MM3.0R Mammo
Image retention Within 1 hour Recommended readout time
After 2 hours 70% of the stored energy is still
present with no visible loss of
information upon readout.
After 24 hours Image retention still exceeds 45%.
NOTE:
At the end of a digitizing cycle, the digitizer returns an erased image plate. In the
following cases, re-erase the IP before reusing it in order to prevent ghost images:
 If the image plate has not been used for more than 48 hours (GenRad) or 24
hours (Mammography). In this case, the image plate may have been exposed to
scattered radiation.
 If an image plate has been exposed to an exceptionally high X-ray dose.
In this case, deep layers of the image plate may still retain a latent image after
standard erasure. Leave the image plate to rest at least one day before
re-erasing it.


1 2 3
8.11 Laser data
Laser Classification Class 1

Laser diode power 80 mW
Laser diode classification Class IIIb
Laser wavelength 640-670 nm
Laser beam deflection frequency 120 up to 170 Hz
Laser beam divergence 12 mrad


1 2 3
9 Safety standards
DX-G and DX-M comply with:
North American Standards European Norm and International

Federal Communications Commission
Canadian Standards Association
Standards
Underwriters Laboratories European Norm
Code of Federal Regulations International Electrotechnical Commission
EMC* FCC part 15 EN 60601-1-2:2007

CSA 22.2 No. 601.1.2
EN 300 330-2 V1.1.1:2001
EN 301 489-1 V1.3.1:2001
Safety UL60601-1:2003 IEC 60601-1:1988 + A1:1991 +
CSA C 22.2 No. 601.1:1990 + A2:1995
S1:1994 + A2:1998
CSA-E60825-1-03 IEC 60825-1:1993 + A1:1997 +
A2:2001
ES 60601-1 1st Edition;
IEC 60601-1: 2005
CAN CSA 22.2 no. 60601-1-08
CFR parts 1040.10 and 1040.11
* EMC = Electromagnetic Compatibility


1 2 3
DX-G and DX-M comply with the IEC 60601-1 and UL 60601-1 standards for Medical
Electrical Equipment. Although this equipment is absolutely safe, patients may not
come in direct contact with it.
The leakage current limits for which this device is tested, excludes installation in the
patient vicinity. Therefore the equipment must be placed outside the patient vicinity
according to the local valid regulation (UL 60601-1 or EN 60601-1).
The patient vicinity is defined as follows:

The classification of this product according to the medical electrical equipment
standard IEC 60601-1 requires installation outside the patient environment.
For definition of patient environment see dimensions below.
R
Patient vicinity
h
Patient vicinity
patient_vicinity.cdr
R = 1.5 m / 4.9 feet (EN 60601-1) or 1.83 m / 6 feet (UL 60601-1)

h = 2.5 m / 8.2 feet (EN 60601-1) or 2.29 m / 7.5 feet (UL 60601-1)
Figure 14
 Other equipment that is in contact with the patient is not connected directly
to the Agfa system without additional protective measures.


Installation Planning
1 2 3
DD+DIS002.10E Checklist
10 Checklists
10.1 Installation planning checklist
# Step Goal Section OK Task

code*
1. Ask the Agfa sales To schedule an installation date
representative for a with the customer.
contact person in
the hospital.
To get the list of ordered - □ PRI**
equipment that needs to be
installed.
2. Make yourself To see in which environment the
familiar with the
System Overview.
digitizer will be installed. 1.1 □ PRI
3. Make yourself Basic information, to see

familiar with the whether additional, site specific
scope of delivery. material for installation might be
2.1 □ PRI
required.
4. Make yourself To have all digitizer parameters
familiar with the available which might be
digitizer
specifications.
required for people who are
involved in installation and
8 □ PRI
operation of the digitizer.

5. Have a look at the To inform the customer about
digitizer safety the safety standards and
standards and regulations for which the digitizer
9 □ PRI
regulations. is tested.
6. Have a look at the To check the transport path and
machine
dimensions.
the desired installation place for
sufficient space.
7 □ PRI
7. Ensure the required To see whether enough free

free space around
the digitizer.
space for repair and
maintenance is available.
3.1 □ PRI



1 2 3
# Step Goal Section OK Task

code
8. Make an Physical network access is
appointment with granted.
the network
IP addresses at hand during
administrator and
installation
check the network
access. Initiate to Hospital network sockets
- □ PRI
establish necessary operational at installation point in
amount of IP time
addresses at
installation time.
9. Make an Operators are available for
appointment with training at date.
the radiologist for
Workload is shifted adapted to
- □ PRI
operator training.
enable training.
10. Make an Hospital technician available and
appointment with prepared to perform mounting of
the hospital earthquake kit during installation
technician to mount / mobile site prepared for mobile
- □ PRI
the earthquake kit / installation.
mobile installation.
11. Make an Knowing where the device will
appointment with arrive.
the hospital
technician to define
Knowing the transport path;
clarifying eventual needs for
- □ PRI
delivery and
transportation means.
transport path.
12. Compare the To prevent installation of the
required ambient digitizer in an inappropriate
and climatic environment, leading to
conditions with the functional faults.
5 □ PRI
condition at the
installation place.
13. Make an To be able to initiate all required
appointment with prerequisites in advance to allow
the house electrician proper electrical connections.
or the authorized
electrician and
6 □ PRI
check the required
electrical
connection.
14. Check the To be sure that all required pre-
installation installation conditions are
readiness during fulfilled.
10.2 □ PRI
follow up visit.


1 2 3
10.2 Installation readiness checklist
In order to guarantee an effective and smooth installation process within the targeted
time frame, the following tasks of the checklist below must be carried out prior to the
installation of the device.
Check and discuss all the required measures for the installation by means of this
checklist. Remarks on the individual items can be noted on the back of the list.
For Agfa employees only:
After completion please hand out this checklist to your local Agfa representative.
Name of Field
Service Engineer: Checking date:
Client name:
Client address:
Contact person,
name and title:
Client phone
number: Extension:
Order / OGT*
Type of systems: number:


1 2 3
* OGT = Order Generation Tool, only applicable for Agfa OK

employees Task
Task code*
Installation date scheduled with the customer. □ PRI**
Tasks of Installation Planning Checklist performed

successfully.
Details see section 10.1: □ PRI
Installation planning checklist
Installation Site ready for Installation □ -

Remarks:
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
Signature of Field Service Engineer: _______________________________________


Imaging Services Glossary

DX-M
Type 5170 / 200
DX-G
Type 5170 / 100
This document contains explanations of product specific terms and abbreviations used
in the service documentation for DX-G / DX-M, Type 5170/100/200 as of Software
Version NIM_2000.

Revision Date
NIM_2000 and higher.
* Based on DX-G Service Manual Edition 1.
Document Title
Not applicable

eq_12_glossary_e_template_v07
DD+DIS001.10E Glossary
► Manufacturer
Publisher
D - 81539 München
Germany
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
the equipment.
the product.
NOTE:


07-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of Software Version NIM_2000Agfa Company Confidential
1 Glossary
Term Short Description

μGy Micro Gray is the unit for x-ray dose (1Gy = 0.87x10-2J/kg)
ADC Agfa Diagnostic Center
AE - title Application Entity
ALF Application License File
ASAP - Package AGFA Scanner Access Package
Software that runs on the processing station. It handles all
digitizer operations
ATP Acceptance Test Protocol
BOE Begin Of Erasure
BOL Begin Of Line
BOS Begin Of Scan
Browser A program that provides an interface to the World Wide
Web, e.g. Netscape Navigator, Microsoft Internet Explorer
Calibration Algorithm to counterbalance irregularities in the scanner of
CR.
CAN bus Control Area Network bus is a communication protocol to
interchange data between the connected participants via
only one medium – bus system used in the digitizer
CAS Clinical Application Specialist
CCM Configuration and Customization Manager: Tool to edit the
configuration file adc.cpf
Collimation Determination of the region of the interesting data in the
image. On that region the image processing is applied.
CPU Central Processing Unit. The computing part of a PC, also
known as the “processor” of a PC.
CR Computed Radiography
CU-Filter Copper plate (chemical symbol: Cu) used for exposure of a
flatfield.
DICOM Digital Imaging and Communications in Medicine
Dose, X-ray dose Dose is applied via kV x mA x sec settings.
It is measured in μGy.
Dosimeter Device to measure x-ray dose
DR Direct Radiography



DRA (for CR) Direct Remote Access (external product name: AGFATEC
LINK) or Delivery Readiness Assessment
Dynamic range Exposure range in which CR can get usable image data.
E-Label Electronic hardware medium containing data which is
relevant for proper device functionality.
EOE End Of Erasure
EOS End Of Scan
Fast Scan Direction Scan direction: This is vertical to the "Slow scan direction"
(= Transport direction of Image Plate through the scan unit).
FLFS Full Leg Full Spine
FSE Field Service Engineer
GenRad General Radiology
Grid A grid is used to reduce scattered radiation and to increase
sharpness.
GSC Global Support Center
GUI Graphical User Interface
Histogram Graphical display of the distribution of gray levels
HR High Resolution
HV High Voltage
ID - Chip Chip on the image plate on which the demographic data as
well as plate specific information are stored. It can be easily
replaced in case of defect.
Infocounter Software tool that collects information about the status of
the digitizer (installed SW-version, IP cycles, errors). It is
accessible via the Service Client.
IP For CR: Image Plate (phosphor plate)
IP Internet Protocol: Internet software that divides data into
packets for transmission over the Internet. Computers must
run IP to communicate across the Internet. See also TCP.
IP address (Internet Protocol address) The address of a computer
attached to a TCP/IP network.
Jitter Jitter means inaccuracies of the pixel positions. To “jitter a
pixel” means to place it off side of its normal placement by
some random amount in order to achieve a more natural
antialiasing effect.
Laser Light Amplification by Stimulated Emission of Radiation



LCD Liquid Crystal Display
LED Light Emitting Diode, Semi conductor emitting light.
mR milli Röntgen, measure for x-ray dose
(1 mR corresponds to 8.7 μGy)
MCBF Mean Cycles Between Failure
MTTI Mean Time To Install
MTTR Mean Time To Repair
MUSICA Multiple Scale Image Contrast Amplification is
Agfa’s image processing software
NIP Needle-structured Image Plate
Node Nodes in the CAN bus system = printed circuit board within
the CAN bus
PIP Powder-structured Image Plate
Pixel Smallest addressable point to be scanned on the film or
plate (also: picture element of a raster image). A maximum
of 2048 per line may be read by the Photomultiplier.
PMM Photo Multiplier Module
PMT Photo Multiplier Tube
RAM Random Access Memory
Volatile main memory of computers
RIS Radiology Information System
ROI Region Of Interest
ROM Read Only Memory. Memory that permanently stores
instructions and data. Its contents are created at the time of
manufacture and cannot be altered.
Shading calibration Shading calibration is a calibration of each pixel of the gray
value in a line, to achieve a homogeneous gray-scale
distribution in flat-field exposures.
Slow-scan direction Transport direction of Image Plate through the scan unit.
SM Stepper Motor
SR Standard Resolution
Throughput A value representing the number of image plates, a digitizer
can scan and erase in a certain time frame.



Twain Interface A programming interface that lets a graphics application
activate a scanner, frame grabber or other image-capturing
device.
UI User Interface is part of a computer program that handles
interaction with the user.
UPS Uninterruptible Power Supply. Backup power used when the
electrical power fails or drops to an unacceptable voltage
level.
URL Uniform Resource Locator. The address that defines the
route to a file on the Web or any other Internet facility. URLs
are typed into the browser to access Web pages, and URLs
are embedded within the pages themselves to provide the
hypertext links to other pages.
USB Universal Serial Bus
UTP - cable Unshielded Twisted Pair (Network transfer medium) cable.
Cable to connect to a computer network.
W/L Window and Leveling of digital images.


DD+DIS001.10E
DX-M
Document No:
2nd Edition Type 5170 / 200
DX-G
Type 5170 / 100
DD+DIS001.10E
DX-M
Document No:
2nd Edition
Type 5170 / 200
DX-G
Type 5170 / 100
DD+DIS001.10E
DX-M
Document No:
2nd Edition
Type 5170 / 200
DX-G
Type 5170 / 100
DD+DIS001.10E
DX-M
Document No:
2nd Edition
Type 5170 / 200
DX-G
Type 5170 / 100

DX-M DX-G - Service Manual For Download

Încărcat de

Informații document

Titlu original

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

DX-M DX-G - Service Manual For Download

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

HEALTHCARE ReadMeFirst

Imaging Services Service Manual for Download

► Purpose of this Document

Edition. Release Changes

1 Integrating the Order List for Documentation

2 Printing single Pages, Chapters or the complete Manual

Preferably print circuit diagrams on a DIN A3 or ANSI B (Ledger) printer, if

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

Edition 1, Revision 2 Page 2 of 5

2.1 Printing single Pages or Chapters

To print single chapters or pages of a chapter proceed as follows:

Figure 1: PDF page number in the Adobe reader toolbar

(3) Go the end of the section or desired range of pages.

Figure 2: Print dialogue for printing single pages or chapters

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

Edition 1, Revision 2 Page 3 of 5

2.2 Printing the complete Service Manual

To print the complete service manual proceed as follows:

Figure 3: Print dialogue for printing the complete manual

Figure 4: Adobe Reader comments toolbar

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

Edition 1, Revision 2 Page 4 of 5

3.1 Exporting your Comments

Figure 5: Drop down menu “Comment & Markup”

3.2 Importing Comments

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

Edition 1, Revision 2 Page 5 of 5

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

Edition 2, Revision 0 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 0 / 2

► Purpose of this Document

Edition. Release Changes

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

Edition 2, Revision 0 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 0 / 3

0 Generic Safety Directions

1 Controls, Connections and Set Up Procedures

3 Repair and Service

3.1 Machine specific Safety and Repair Information

3.2 Machine specific Tools, Software Tools and Auxiliary Equipment

4 Reference and Circuit Diagrams

5 Spare Parts List

8 Manufacturing Standard Modifications

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

Edition 2, Revision 0 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 0 / 4

Safety relevant Notes

Not-safety relevant Notes

IMPORTANT: Highlights very important actions which have to be carried out

NOTE: • Indicates advice to facilitate the following step or action

Highlighting of Buttons, Functions and Names within a Task

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

Edition 2, Revision 0 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 0 / 5

1 About this Manual

The DX-G / DX-M digitizer is part of a CR system, comprising:

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

Edition 2, Revision 0 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 0 / 6

Generic Safety Directions

► Purpose of this Document

Edition. Release Changes

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

2 USED ICONS ........................................................................................................ 6

7 INTENDED USER ............................................................................................... 11

8 QUALIFICATIONS FOR OPERATION AND SERVICE TASKS.......................... 11

9 ENVIRONMENTAL AND OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS............. 12